| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | ||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 |
|
Digishot Plus user manual | Users Manual | 5.06 MiB | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
|
Intellishot user manual | Users Manual | 5.42 MiB | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
|
QSG | Users Manual | 1.26 MiB | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | / May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Test Report | May 02 2019 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | / May 02 2019 |
| 1 2 3 4 | Digishot Plus user manual | Users Manual | 5.06 MiB |
DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System UTM-00339 | Rev 5 | 2018 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander SVN 36230C CE4 Tagger SVN 36230B 4G Detonator UTM-00339 | Rev 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................... 2 List of Figures .................................................................................................................................. 9 List of Tables .................................................................................................................................... 9 1 USERS OF THIS MANUAL...................................................................................................... 10 1.1. Purpose of this manual .......................................................................................................... 10 1.2. End User .................................................................................................................................. 10 1.2.1. Requirements ................................................................................................................................. 10 1.3. Training ................................................................................................................................... 10 2 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM PRODUCT SAFETY ................................... 11 2.1. DetNet Safety Philosophy ...................................................................................................... 11 2.2. User Safety .............................................................................................................................. 11 2.3. Product Safety ........................................................................................................................ 11 2.4. Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................... 11 2.5. Information in case of emergency ........................................................................................ 12 2.6. Warning, Caution, and Note Statements .............................................................................. 12 3 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM INTRODUCTION ......................................... 13 3.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Basic System Description ................................................ 13 3.1.1. Direct Blasting Configuration ......................................................................................................... 14 3.1.2. Remote Blasting Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15 3.1.3. Remote Blasting via a Repeater Configuration ............................................................................. 16 3.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander General Description .......................................................... 17 3.3. CE4 Tagger General Description .......................................................................................... 17 3.4. 4G Detonator General Description ........................................................................................ 17 3.5. BlastCards General Description ........................................................................................... 18 The Yellow BlastCard .................................................................................................................... 18 The Red BlastCard ........................................................................................................................ 18 3.6. Harness Wire ........................................................................................................................... 19 3.7. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Blast Application ................................................. 19 3.8. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System User Application ................................................. 20 3.8.1. Users that deploy simple blast patterns. Basic (B) Tagging Option ............................................. 20 3.8.2. Users that follow a paper plan. Advanced (A) Tagging Option .................................................... 20 3.8.3. Users that follow a plan. Planned (P) Tagging Option .................................................................. 20 3.9. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Limits and Specifications ................................... 21 3.9.1. CE4 Tagger System Limits ............................................................................................................ 21 3.9.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Limits ............................................................................. 22 3.5.1. 3.5.2. Page 2 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 4 4G DETONATOR ..................................................................................................................... 24 4.1. Components ............................................................................................................................ 24 4.1.1. Crimp Plug ..................................................................................................................................... 24 4.1.2. Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ........................................................................................................... 25 4.1.3. Fusehead ....................................................................................................................................... 25 4.1.4. Protective H-Plug ........................................................................................................................... 25 4.1.5. Connector ...................................................................................................................................... 25 4.1.6. Down-line wire ................................................................................................................................ 25 4.2. Connecting Up ........................................................................................................................ 26 4.2.1. Connector ...................................................................................................................................... 26 4.3. Application of Detonator ........................................................................................................ 27 4.4. Handling Precautions ............................................................................................................. 27 4.4.1. Storage .......................................................................................................................................... 27 4G Detonator Care ......................................................................................................................... 27 4.4.2. 4.5. Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 28 4.5.1. Number of 4G detonators ............................................................................................................... 28 4.5.2. Automated detonator capacity check ............................................................................................. 28 4.5.3. Decking .......................................................................................................................................... 28 4.5.4. Maximum delay times and increments ........................................................................................... 28 4.5.5. Temperature Limitations ................................................................................................................. 28 4.5.6. Storage Life and Equipment Life .................................................................................................... 28 4.5.7. Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity .................................... 28 4.6. Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 29 4.7. Safety Warnings ...................................................................................................................... 29 4.7.1. User and Safety Tips ...................................................................................................................... 29 4.7.2. Risks .............................................................................................................................................. 29 4.7.3. Destruction of 4G Detonators ......................................................................................................... 29 5 CE4 TAGGER .......................................................................................................................... 30 5.1. CE4 Tagger General Information .......................................................................................... 30 5.2. CE4 Tagger Components ....................................................................................................... 31 5.2.1. Harness wire terminals .................................................................................................................. 32 5.2.2. Pogo pins ....................................................................................................................................... 32 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5.2.3. 5.2.4. LCD Screen ................................................................................................................................... 32 5.2.5. SoftKeys ......................................................................................................................................... 32 5.2.6. Navigation and Numerical keys ..................................................................................................... 32 5.2.7. Enter key ........................................................................................................................................ 32 5.2.8. Backspace Key .............................................................................................................................. 32 5.2.9. On/Off key ...................................................................................................................................... 32 5.2.10. Esc key........................................................................................................................................... 33 5.2.11. Function key ................................................................................................................................... 33 5.2.12. USB connector port ........................................................................................................................ 33 5.2.13. Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 33 5.2.14. Audio Tones ................................................................................................................................... 33 5.2.15. Vibration Signals ............................................................................................................................ 33 Page 3 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.2.16. Visual Signals ................................................................................................................................ 34 5.2.17. Real Time Clock (RTC) Function ................................................................................................... 34 5.3. Power CE4 Tagger ON and OFF ............................................................................................ 35 5.3.1. CE4 Tagger Power-ON .................................................................................................................. 35 5.3.2. CE4 Tagger Power-OFF ................................................................................................................ 36 5.4. CE4 Tagger Menu Navigation ................................................................................................ 37 5.4.1. CE4 Tagger Common User Interface Conventions ....................................................................... 37 5.5. CE4 Tagger Menu Quick Reference ...................................................................................... 39 5.6. CE4 Tagger Accessories ....................................................................................................... 42 5.6.1. External Battery Pack .................................................................................................................... 42 5.6.2. Replaceable Top Connectors ........................................................................................................ 43 5.6.3. Surface Harness Wire .................................................................................................................... 44 5.7. CE4 Tagger Battery ................................................................................................................ 45 5.7.1. Charging the CE4 Tagger ............................................................................................................. 45 5.7.2. Low Battery .................................................................................................................................... 46 5.7.3. Battery Information ......................................................................................................................... 46 5.8. CE4 Tagger Storage Mode ..................................................................................................... 47 6 CE4 TAGGER SYSTEM INFORMATION ................................................................................ 49 6.1. System Info ............................................................................................................................. 49 6.1.1. System Info - Battery ..................................................................................................................... 49 6.1.2. System Info - Temperature and the Relative Humidity .................................................................. 49 6.1.3. System Info - Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number ............................................... 49 6.1.4. System Info - GPS Detail ............................................................................................................... 50 6.1.5. System Info User ID ..................................................................................................................... 50 7 CE4 TAGGER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ........................................................................ 51 7.1. CE4 Tagger 4G Setup Configuration .................................................................................... 51 7.1.1. Tag Option ..................................................................................................................................... 51 7.1.2. Site Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 52 Leakage Trigger ............................................................................................................................. 54 7.1.3. 7.2. Device Setup ........................................................................................................................... 55 7.2.1. Contrast ......................................................................................................................................... 55 7.2.2. Brightness ...................................................................................................................................... 56 Time Zone ...................................................................................................................................... 57 7.2.3. Timeouts ........................................................................................................................................ 58 7.2.4. 7.2.5. Language ....................................................................................................................................... 59 7.2.6. Units ............................................................................................................................................... 60 8 CE4 TAGGER ADVANCED SETUP ........................................................................................ 61 8.1. Tagger ID ................................................................................................................................. 61 8.2. Connections ............................................................................................................................ 63 8.2.1. Connect Tagger to PC via WiFi ..................................................................................................... 64 8.2.2. Connect CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander via WiFi ................................................ 65 8.2.3. Connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB ............................................................................................. 67 8.3. Remote View ........................................................................................................................... 68 Page 4 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.2. 10.3. 8.3.1. Select Remote View on CE4 Tagger ............................................................................................. 68 Initiate Remote View on PC ........................................................................................................... 69 8.3.2. 8.4. Clear Tags ............................................................................................................................... 70 8.5. Device Password .................................................................................................................... 71 8.6. Read All Detonator Data ........................................................................................................ 72 8.7. Maximum Wire Length ........................................................................................................... 73 9 CE4 TAGGER FACTORY SETUP ........................................................................................... 74 9.1. Factory Setup Menu Options ................................................................................................. 76 10 TAGGING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................ 78 10.1. COMMANDER SYSTEM TAGGING PRINCIPLE ............................................................. 78 10.1.1. Basic. ............................................................................................................................................ 78 10.1.2. Advanced ....................................................................................................................................... 79 10.1.3. Tag by Plan. .................................................................................................................................. 79 BASIC (B) TAGGING OPTION ......................................................................................... 80 10.2.1. Mark Detonators ............................................................................................................................ 82 PLANNED (P) TAGGING OPTION ................................................................................... 84 10.3.1. Connect the CE4 Tagger to the PC ............................................................................................... 85 10.3.2. Download the Plan (via ViewShot) ................................................................................................ 86 10.3.3. View the downloaded design on the CE4 Tagger ......................................................................... 89 10.3.4. Select Start Position ....................................................................................................................... 89 10.3.5. Tag by Plan Screen ....................................................................................................................... 91 10.3.6. Assigning ViewShot ....................................................................................................................... 92 10.3.7. Verify Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 93 10.3.1. Verify Delays .................................................................................................................................. 93 10.3.2. Show results .................................................................................................................................. 93 10.3.3. Merge Plan ..................................................................................................................................... 93 ADVANCED (A) TAGGING OPTION ................................................................................ 94 10.4.1. Advanced Mode ............................................................................................................................. 94 10.4.2. Edit the Hole configuration ............................................................................................................. 96 10.4.3. Delete the Hole Configuration ........................................................................................................ 97 Advanced (A) Tagging Screen Info ................................................................................ 99 10.5.1. Advanced Tagging Screen SoftKey Icons ................................................................................... 100 10.5.2. Toggle Increment Direction .......................................................................................................... 101 10.5.3. Inter Hole Delay ........................................................................................................................... 102 10.5.4. Absolute Detonator Time ............................................................................................................. 102 10.5.5. Autotag / Manual Mode ................................................................................................................ 103 10.5.6. Tagging Screen Info ..................................................................................................................... 104 10.5.7. Test Single Detonator .................................................................................................................. 105 10.5.8. Tagged Detonators ...................................................................................................................... 106 10.5.9. Mark Detonators .......................................................................................................................... 107 10.5.10. Review Tag Detonator Screen Parameters ................................................................................. 108 10.5.11. Advanced Screen Manual Adjustments ....................................................................................... 109 11 TEST MENU ........................................................................................................................... 110 10.4. 10.5. Page 5 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.1. 11.2. 11.3. 11.4. 11.5. 11.6. Test All ............................................................................................................................ 110 Test String ...................................................................................................................... 111 Test Single Detonator .................................................................................................... 112 Leakage Test .................................................................................................................. 113 Untagged Test ................................................................................................................ 114 Search Detonators (Binary Search) .............................................................................. 115 11.6.1. Search Function Results .............................................................................................................. 115 12 VIEW PLAN ............................................................................................................................ 116 List Detonators ............................................................................................................... 116 12.1. 12.1.1. Search Filter ................................................................................................................................. 117 12.1.2. Info SoftKey ................................................................................................................................. 118 12.1.3. Sort Detonator list ........................................................................................................................ 119 12.1.4. ViewShot Plan Summary (Heading) ............................................................................................ 121 List Missing detonators ................................................................................................. 122 12.2. List New detonators ....................................................................................................... 124 12.3. List Bad Status ............................................................................................................... 125 12.4. Duplicate Location ......................................................................................................... 126 12.5. Blast Summary ............................................................................................................... 127 12.6. 12.7. Tracking Detonators ...................................................................................................... 128 13 COMMANDER ....................................................................................................................... 130 13.1. General Information ....................................................................................................... 130 13.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Components ............................................................. 130 13.2.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Body .......................................................................................... 131 13.2.2. Internal antenna ........................................................................................................................... 131 13.2.3. Detonator Communication Channels (1 - 4) ................................................................................ 131 13.2.4. E-paper display ............................................................................................................................ 131 13.2.5. NEXT (FUNCTION) button .......................................................................................................... 131 13.2.6. POWER button ............................................................................................................................ 131 13.2.7. USB connector port ...................................................................................................................... 132 13.2.8. BlastCard (NFC) Sensor .............................................................................................................. 132 Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON and OFF ................................................... 133 13.3.1. Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON ................................................................................. 133 13.3.2. Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander OFF ............................................................................... 133 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Accessories .............................................................. 134 13.4.1. Battery .......................................................................................................................................... 134 13.4.2. Charging the CE4 Commander ................................................................................................... 134 13.4.3. Storage ........................................................................................................................................ 134 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Process Description................................................. 135 13.5.1. Start-up ........................................................................................................................................ 135 13.5.2. Shutdown ..................................................................................................................................... 135 13.5.3. Bootloading .................................................................................................................................. 135 13.5. 13.3. 13.4. Page 6 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.6. 13.7. 13.8. 13.5.4. Pairing .......................................................................................................................................... 135 13.5.5. Aborting ........................................................................................................................................ 135 13.5.6. Blasting ........................................................................................................................................ 135 Connecting CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus Commander via WiFi ............................ 136 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Information .................................................. 137 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander LCD Screen Icons .................................................... 139 13.8.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Base Commander Mode Icons ...................................................................... 139 13.8.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Icons .................................................................... 146 13.8.3. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Repeater Mode Icons ............................................................... 154 13.9. NEW DESIGN .................................................................................................................. 158 13.10. TEST MENU .................................................................................................................... 159 13.10.1. Test All ......................................................................................................................................... 159 13.10.2. Leakage Test ............................................................................................................................... 160 13.10.3. Untagged Test ............................................................................................................................. 161 13.11. VIEW DESIGN ................................................................................................................. 162 13.11.1. List Detonators ............................................................................................................................. 162 13.11.2. List Missing Detonators ................................................................................................................ 165 13.11.3. List New Detonators ..................................................................................................................... 166 13.11.4. List Bad Status Detonators .......................................................................................................... 167 13.11.5. Channel Summary ....................................................................................................................... 168 13.12. Prepare for Blast ............................................................................................................ 169 13.12.1. Local Blast ................................................................................................................................... 169 13.12.2. Remote Blast ............................................................................................................................... 172 14 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Configuration Settings ................................................... 177 14.1. Device Setup ................................................................................................................... 177 14.1.1. Time Zone .................................................................................................................................... 177 14.1.2. Language ..................................................................................................................................... 178 14.1.3. Timeouts ...................................................................................................................................... 179 14.1.4. Units ............................................................................................................................................. 180 Long Range RF ............................................................................................................... 181 14.2.1. Set RF Channel ........................................................................................................................... 181 14.2.2. Set Encryption Key ...................................................................................................................... 182 15 Advanced Setup ................................................................................................................... 184 15.1. Device ID ......................................................................................................................... 184 Base Station Mode ......................................................................................................... 185 15.2. Base + Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................... 186 15.3. 15.4. Bench Box Mode ............................................................................................................ 187 Repeater Mode ............................................................................................................... 188 15.5. 15.6. Device Password ............................................................................................................ 189 15.7. Last Det ........................................................................................................................... 190 16 Factory Setup ........................................................................................................................ 191 14.2. Page 7 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 16.1. Factory Setup Menu Options ........................................................................................ 193 17 Android Tablet General Description ................................................................................... 194 18 Commander System On-Bench Deployment Overview .................................................... 195 Blasting Overview .......................................................................................................... 195 18.1. 18.1.1. Local blasting ............................................................................................................................... 195 18.1.2. Remote blasting ........................................................................................................................... 196 18.1.3. Synchronized blasting (Multiple Commanders) ........................................................................... 197 19 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Troubleshooting ................................................ 198 19.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Troubleshooting: Reprogram required .... 203 20 Appendix A DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Practical Tips and Hints ........... 204 20.1. On Bench Delivery of Detonators ................................................................................. 205 Distributing Detonators on the Bench ......................................................................... 205 20.2. Priming with 4G Detonators .......................................................................................... 205 20.3. 20.4. Lowering Detonators into Drilled Holes ....................................................................... 205 Charging of Drilled Holes .............................................................................................. 206 20.5. 20.6. Stemming of Charged Holes ......................................................................................... 206 Tagging of Charged Holes with 4G Detonators .......................................................... 206 20.7. Harnessing of the Blast ................................................................................................. 207 20.8. 20.9. Testing of Blast Installation .......................................................................................... 208 20.10. Testing lead-in wire and rolling out harness wire to Bench Commander position . 208 20.11. Connecting Harness wires to Bench Commander ...................................................... 208 20.12. Setting Up RF Communication ..................................................................................... 208 20.13. Basic causes of leakage ................................................................................................ 209 20.14. Binary Search ................................................................................................................. 210 20.15. High Leakage .................................................................................................................. 211 20.16. Leakage through conductive materials ....................................................................... 212 21 Appendix B ABBREVIATIONS and DEFINITIONS ........................................................... 213 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................. 213 21.1. Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 214 21.2. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 8 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 List of Figures Figure 1: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Composition ........................................................................ 13 Figure 2: Direct Blasting ..................................................................................................................................... 14 Figure 3: Remote Blasting of up to 16000 detonators ........................................................................................ 15 Figure 4: Remote Blasting via a Repeater ......................................................................................................... 16 Figure 5: CE4 Tagger Component Identification ................................................................................................ 31 Figure 6: CE4 Tagger External Battery Pack ..................................................................................................... 42 Figure 7: CE4 Tagger Top Connector ............................................................................................................... 43 Figure 8: Surface Harness Wire ......................................................................................................................... 44 Figure 9: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Part Identification ........................................................................... 130 Figure 10: DigiShot Plus 4G Base Commander Mode Detail Screen ............................................................ 140 Figure 11: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Screen..................................................................... 147 Figure 12: Repeater Detail Screen ................................................................................................................... 154 Figure 13: Local Blasting .................................................................................................................................. 195 Figure 14: Remote Blasting .............................................................................................................................. 196 Figure 15: Synchronized Blasting via Multiple Commanders ........................................................................... 197 List of Tables Table 1: Component Description ........................................................................................................................ 14 Table 2: CE4 Tagger Icon Shortcut Keys and Commander Icons ..................................................................... 38 Table 3: CE4 Tagger Menu Reference .............................................................................................................. 39 Table 4: CE4 Tagger Main Menu Reference ...................................................................................................... 39 Table 5: CE4 Tagger Configuration Menu Reference ........................................................................................ 40 Table 6: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Select Position ....................................................................................... 90 Table 7: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Tag By Plan Option .............................................................................. 92 Table 8: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Advanced Tagging ............................................................................... 100 Table 9: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Base Station Screen Icons .............................................................. 140 Table 10: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Screen Icons ............................................................ 147 Table 11: Repeater Screen Icons ..................................................................................................................... 155 Page 9 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 1 USERS OF THIS MANUAL 1.1. This manual details the operation of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System. Purpose of this manual This manual is only to be used for the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System and the applicable software version as displayed. End User 1.2. 1.2.1. Requirements Only trained personnel, and personnel found competent, are allowed to operate the system. Users of the system shall be aware of the recommended procedures for using the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System as per manufacturers recommendations. These recommendations do not supersede the method as required by local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of detonators. In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. Training 1.3. Training and software upgrades shall only be performed by a DetNet SA subject matter expert. Contact the DetNet head office for additional information. ALL USERS OPERATING THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM SHALL HAVE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED THE SPECIFIC TRAINING BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WORK WITH THE DEVICE(S). Page 10 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 2 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM PRODUCT SAFETY 2.1. DetNet Safety Philosophy DetNet safety philosophy is to design, manufacturer and provide control equipment, detonators and accessories to the highest safety standards. Energy management in control equipment will be regulated by providing two separate circuits managing test voltage and blast voltage, through software and hardware safety interlocks. BlastCards remain in possession of the accountable person, and should only be used to authorize the blast process at such a time as stipulated by the Mine after completion of the required Risk Assessment. All products must conform to local and international standards before it is sold for use. DetNet complies to ISO 9001, SANS 551:2009, CEN/TS 13763-27 which is acceptable to countries we operate in; in countries not subscribing to the above marks, we advise users to engage with DetNet to ensure that all equipment comply to local regulations. 2.2. User Safety Safety is ensured when the user supplements the products in-built safety systems through adequate training in the safe use of the product:
Induction training Refresher training DetNet continuously upgrades software to make the products more user friendly and to ensure that users stay abreast on latest developments, it is important that users get trained on the relevant changes before their equipment is updated. 2.3. Inherent Safety Product Safety CE4 Taggers are Inherently Safe because they cannot produce the necessary minimum required firing voltage or encoded Fire command to initiate the electronic 4G Detonator. In addition, the CE4 Tagger firmware does not contain the procedures or commands necessary to calibrate, arm or fire the detonator. Transportation, Storage and Handling DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System equipment must be transported, stored, handled and used in conformity with all federal, state, provincial and local laws and regulations. Control equipment and accessories should be handled with due care and not dropped, mishandled, subjected to excessive vibration or exposed to any chemical agents. Connectors should be kept clean and the equipment must be kept in a safe environment to avoid misappropriation or misuse. 2.4. Maintenance Schedule All equipment in the field will need to be returned to DetNet, or its repair centres, for service at the following intervals:
Handheld Equipment (Tagger, etc.) 18 Months. Other equipment (Excluding accessories) 24 Months. Page 11 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Information in case of emergency 2.5. Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/ http://www.portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail and documentation. 2.6. Warning, Caution, and Note Statements WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE statements are used throughout this manual to emphasise important and critical information. Observe these statements to ensure safety and to prevent product damage. The statements are defined as follows:
A WARNING MEANS THAT INJURY OR DEATH IS POSSIBLE IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT OBEYED. Warnings draw special attention to anything that could injure or kill the reader/user. Warnings are generally placed before the step in the procedure they relate to. Warning messages are repeated wherever they apply. A CAUTION MEANS THAT DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT IS POSSIBLE. Cautions draw special attention to anything that could damage equipment or cause the loss of data and will normally describe what could happen if the caution is ignored. Cautions are generally placed before the step in the procedure they relate to. Notes are added to provide additional information. Notes are used to emphasise important information by visually distinguishing this from the rest of the text. Notes can contain any type of information except safety information, which is always placed in cautions or warnings. Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/ http://www.portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail and documentation. Page 12 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM INTRODUCTION 3.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Basic System Description The system description details a full system lay-out and also the individual component name, function and interaction between the components. This 4th generation Control Equipment (CE4) that is designed and developed by DetNet South Africa consists of two main devices, namely the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander and CE4 Tagger. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander unit may be set-up either as a Bench Commander (for connection to detonators) or as a Base Commander that is used to remotely communicate with a Bench Commander to initiate the blast (see illustration below). The Commander may also be used as a RF Repeater to increase remote blasting range and maintain line of sight. The CE4 Tagger is an inherently safe device that is used on the bench to test detonators and assign delays to them. The CE4 Tagger has a dual role and may also be used to wirelessly connect to a DigiShot Plus 4G Commander thereby acting as an interface unit for the CE4 Commander. This unique design simplifies the design of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander which comprises of a screen and two buttons allowing the user to control the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander remotely from the comfort of a CE4 Tagger. Peripheral devices such as a Laptop or Tablet will be COTS (Commercial Off-The-Shelf) equipment loaded with DetNet software to interact with the system. Figure 1 (below) depicts a scaled system as would be required to perform a 1600 detonator blast (Using 10 Commanders each connected to 1600 detonators the blast size can be increased to capacity of 16 000 detonators) 3000m 8 3000m 7 10m 6 2 CE4Tagger 1 Detonator(Max400DetsperChannel) 2 3 HarnessWire 4 BenchCommander 5 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 Repeater BaseCommander ShortRangeRF LongrangeRF Figure 1: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Composition Page 13 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Table 1: Component Description
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Component Detonator CE4 Tagger Harness Wire Bench Commander Repeater Base Commander Wi-Fi Function Detonator will initiate the blast on command from the Bench Commander Test, Write Location and/or Delay to detonator and remote control Commander Connects the detonator to the Bench Commander Test Detonators / Communicates with Base Commander directly, or via the Repeater to allow remote blasting. Can also enable a local blast Enables 2-way RF communication between a Base and Bench Commander where line of sight is not possible, effectively doubling the RF range Establish communication via all Bench Commanders and enables remote blasting Enable Wi-Fi communication Long range RF Enable RF communication The following illustrations depict some of the lesser configurations possible with the system. 3.1.1. Direct Blasting Configuration Direct blasting of up to 1600 detonators. The CE4 Tagger can be replaced with a Tablet or PDA. Bench Commander Tagger 10m Max 400 Detonators per Channel Figure 2: Direct Blasting Page 14 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.1.2. Remote Blasting Configuration Remote blasting of up to 16000 detonators (Total of 10 Bench Commanders with 1600 detonators per Bench Commander) using a CE4 Tagger as user-interface at the blasting point. Max 400 Detonators per Channel Bench Commander Base Commander Tagger 3000m 10 m Figure 3: Remote Blasting of up to 16000 detonators Page 15 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.1.3. Remote Blasting via a Repeater Configuration Multiple Bench Commanders can be used if they are within the 3000 m range of the Repeater (5). Every Bench Commander (4) adds a 1600 detonator capability. A maximum of 10 Bench Commanders may be used for the current iteration of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System. 3000m 8 7 10 m 3000m 6 2 5 1 3 4 1 Detonator (Max 400 Dets per Channel) 2 CE4 Tagger 3 Harness Wire 4 Bench Commander 5 Repeater 6 Base Commander Short Range RF 7 8 Long range RF Figure 4: Remote Blasting via a Repeater Page 16 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander General Description The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is a 4-channel multi-functional device intended for use across all surface blasting applications in the DetNet portfolio. DetNet has designed the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander to incorporate an internal antenna that may be shipped to function in either the 900 MHz, 868MHz or 2.4 GHz RF frequency range. Corresponding with the systems ease-of-use the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander has a simple user interface, which comprises a screen and two buttons. Allowing for easy inventory control, especially in the way of storing spare equipment, the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander unit may be configured to function either as:
Base Commander, Bench Commander, or Repeater. 3.3. CE4 Tagger General Description The CE4 Tagger is an inherently safe device that is used on the bench to test detonators and assign delays to them. The CE4 Tagger has a dual role and may also be used to wirelessly connect to a DigiShot Plus 4G Commander thereby acting as an interface unit for the CE4 Commander. 4G Detonator General Description 3.4. The 4G Detonator is a programmable detonator that is suitable for all types of blasting operations, especially those requiring precise timing. The 4G Detonator is housed in a copper tube, which protects the circuit board and the base charge. The 4G Detonator is attached to a robust black and green two wire down-line cable that is capped with a gel-filled connector that clips on a surface harness wire. ELECTRONIC DETONATORS ARE TOTALLY DIFFERENT TO CONVENTIONAL ELECTRIC DETONATORS AND ABSOLUTELY NO CONNECTION WITH CONVENTIONAL ELECTRIC DETONATORS OR ANY OTHER ELECTRONIC DETONATORS IS POSSIBLE AS IT CAN LEAD TO UNINTENDED INITIATION. ALL USERS OPERATING THE ELECTRONIC INITIATION SYSTEM SHALL HAVE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED THE SPECIFIC TRAINING BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WORK WITH THE DEVICE(S). DO NOT USE ANY DEVICES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS TYPE OF ELECTRONIC DETONATOR. NEVER CONNECT ANY THIRD PARTY OR OTHER UNAPPROVED DETONATORS TO THE COMMANDER SYSTEM. Page 17 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.5. BlastCards General Description For safety purposes, the system is activated through a pre-programmed and unique Password (PIN code) protected Blast card System. The system deploys two types of near field communication (NFC) BlastCards that are identified by a Yellow or Red colour. 3.5.1. The Yellow BlastCard The User will scan the Yellow BlastCard on the CE4 Bench Commander after completion of the connecting and testing of the blast installation. This should only be performed after the bench has been cleared of all personnel. Scanning the BlastCard will place the Bench Commander in a waiting to arm state and this should be undertaken in accordance with local legislation and prescribed blasting procedures on site.. A quick activation setting on the Commanderis also available. If turned ON and the unit has had a good scan and testing cycle with no errors, the user will be allowed to scan the yellow Activation Card and the Bench Commander will proceed to the waiting for arm state without being prompted by the user; connecting the Tagger. This function is known as AutoArm. 3.5.2. The Red BlastCard The Red BlastCard, when scanned at the Base Commander during an RF Multi-bench Commander blast, or at the Bench Commander during a local blast, will issue the Arm and Fire Commands. The ARM and FIRE commands for detonators will not initially be known to the DigiShot Plus.4G Commander. These commands are only available from the Red BlastCard and will be issued to the DigiShot Plus.4G Commander when the BlastCard is scanned. The ARM and FIRE blasting commands are erased from the DigiShot Plus.4G Commander memory after use. Always keep the BlastCards and PIN locked away in a secure place when not in use. Always place the BlastCards in direct control of the certified user during the blast. Always inform the supervisor and supplier immediately if a BlastCard is lost or damaged. BlastCards are classified as blast keys and must be handled in accordance with local legislation requirements. NEVER SWIPE THE RED BLASTCARD ONTO THE DIGISHOT PLUS.4G COMMANDER WHEN IN IDLE MODE, UNLESS IT IS INTENDED TO INITIATE A BLAST AND THE SOFTWARE PROMPTS THE USER TO DO SO. (THE YELLOW BLASTCARD CAN BE SWIPED TO OBTAIN THE RF SETUP INFORMATION AND ALSO TO AUTOARM). NEVER USE A FAULTY OR DAMAGED BLASTCARD. IF BLASTCARD IS FAULTY OR DAMAGED IT MUST BE RETURNED TO THE ORIGINAL SUPPLIER FOR DESTRUCTION. NEVER STORE THE BLASTCARDS AND BLASTING PIN TOGETHER. NEVER DIVULGE THE BLASTING PASSWORD/S TO ANOTHER PERSON. ONLY THE CERTIFIED USER TO WHOM THE BLASTCARDS WAS ALLOCATED SHOULD KNOW THE PASSWORD. A BLAST CANNOT BE INITIATED WITHOUT THE BLASTCARDS. Page 18 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.6. Harness Wire The Surface harness wire consists of a pair of yellow and green individually sheathed copper wire, 0.63mm in diameter. 4G Detonators are connected to the surface harness wire to enable communication with control equipment. The maximum length of 2-wire surface harness per channel, including the lead-in wire used to connect shall not exceed 2500m. 3.7. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Blast Application The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Blast Application is detailed in UTM-00346 DetNet Blast Application Tablet User Manual. Page 19 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.8. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System User Application There are three methods of operation for the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System, as detailed below:
3.8.1. Users that deploy simple blast patterns. Basic (B) Tagging Option With the Basic tagging option, the user will only need to concentrate on the Time value assigned to the detonator and it is best suited for small, single-primed hole blasts. It is advised to use only one Tagger per Commander when the Basic Tagging Option is used. If more than one Tagger need to be used then both Taggers can start at different String numbers. 3.8.2. Users that follow a paper plan. Advanced (A) Tagging Option The Advanced Tagging option is used when there is emphasis on both Time and Location but no ViewShot plan is available for download The Advanced Mode includes more functionality than the BASIC mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and time incremental settings The user will need to define a hole configuration from the Site Setup screen. 3.8.3. Users that follow a plan. Planned (P) Tagging Option With the Planned (P) option, a location and/or the delay is written into the detonator. The source for the data is received from a plan which is downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via the ViewShot blast design software. Page 20 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.9. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Limits and Specifications System Limits define the design parameters that users must adhere to when designing their blast to be used with DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System. Maximum harness wire per channel Maximum accumulated down-line wire per channel Maximum Bench Commanders per Base Commander Maximum detonators per Tagger Maximum detonators per Channel Maximum detonators per Bench Commander Maximum detonators RF Maximum detonators standalone Maximum detonators per hole Maximum holes per String Maximum line-of-sight for Remote Firing Maximum delay for any detonator Minimum delay per detonator Minimum delay increment Maximum Wi-Fi connectivity distance Maximum Distance using Repeater Maximum Tagger IDs Maximum Commander IDs 2,500m 12 000m 10 Full Design 400 1600 16000 1600 18 400 3km 20,000ms 0ms 1ms 10m 6km 10 10 3.9.1. CE4 Tagger System Limits 3.9.1.1. Strings User selectable 1 40 Strings. (Only 1 string can be connected to the Tagger at a time) 3.9.1.2. Maximum Dets tagged per Channel 400 Detonators using down-hole wire of 30m or lower. For longer lengths, see Wire calculation table under Product Documents on DetNet Portal of down-hole length versus amount of 4G detonators. 3.9.1.3. Maximum Dets tagged per CE4 Tagger (1 Channel) 16000 Detonators in storage/memory. Only 400 dets (one String) could physically be tested at a time on a Tagger. 3.9.1.4. Maximum Decking per Hole 18 Detonators per hole 3.9.1.5. Maximum Distance in Wi-Fi communicating to CE4 Commander 10 meters Page 21 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.9.1.6. CE4 Tagger Specifications
-30C to +60C / -22F to +140F. Cold Temperature Battery Pack can be used to extend battery operating life in sub-zero conditions. The CE4 Tagger may be used for approximately 10 hours at 25C / 77F. At temperatures below -15C
/ -5F battery life may be reduced significantly. When the battery level of the CE4 Tagger reaches 9%, a warning symbol will appear on the top bar. Should the user choose to continue, the CE4 Tagger will automatically switch off when the battery level reaches 3%. IP 57 Ingress protection: Protected against water and dust ingress and protected against immersion between 15cm and 1m for 30 minutes. 3.9.1.7. CE4 Tagger Storage It is recommended that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 50% when placed into long-term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The CE4 Tagger may be kept on charge for extended periods as the CE4 Tagger will manage the battery. 3.9.1.8. Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity The system is also designed to be immune (within limits) to Radio Frequency interference (RF) but it is advised that cell phones and two-way radios be kept at least 5m away from control equipment (Blasters) during Programming, Arming and Firing as communication between the blaster and 4G detonators may be corrupted. 3.9.1.9. Inherent Safety CE4 Taggers are Inherently Safe because they cannot produce the necessary minimum required firing voltage or coded Fire command to initiate the electronic 4G Detonator. In addition, the CE4 Tagger firmware does not contain the procedures or commands necessary to calibrate, arm or fire the detonator. 3.9.1.10. GPS The GPS location, and also the altitude and number of satellites found, will be displayed on the System Information screen. 3.9.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Limits 3.9.2.1. Channels Maximum of 4 Channels. 3.9.2.2. Maximum Dets per Channel 400 Detonators. A notification warning will be displayed when channel limits are exceeded. The system will still allow blasting to continue. 3.9.2.3. Maximum Dets per Bench Commander (4 Channels) 1600 Detonators. Page 22 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3.9.2.4. Maximum Distance in Wi-Fi communicating to Commander 10m 3.9.2.5. Maximum Distance in RF mode between DigiShot Plus 4G Base Commander and Bench Commander 3000m. 3.9.2.6. Maximum Harness wire between furthest 4G Detonator and Bench Commander 2500m. 3.9.2.7. Maximum Distance in RF mode between Base Commander and Repeater/ Bench Commander and Repeater 6000m between the Base and Bench Commanders via Repeater placed between Commanders. 3.9.2.8. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Specifications DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is operated by 3.7V 7.2Ah single cell Lithium Polymer battery.
-30C to +60C / -22F to +140F. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander can be used for approximately 8 hours at 25C. At temperatures below -15C / -5F battery life may be reduced significantly. Operating time is influenced by detonator load, backlight settings and operational temperature. When the battery level of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander reaches 15%, a warning symbol will appear. Should the user choose to continue, the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will automatically switch off when the battery level reaches 3%. 3.9.2.9. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Storage It is recommended that the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander be charged to 50% when placed into long-
term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander may be kept on charge for extended periods of time - the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will manage battery charging accordingly. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander may draw current up to 2 Amperes during charging, and an appropriately specified charger is therefore required it is recommended that the charger supplied with the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander be used for charging the unit. 3.9.2.10. GPS GPS information displayed on System Information screen. Page 23 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 from 0 increments Down-Line wire coil Connector filled with waterproof gel DigiShotTM 4G Detonator 4 4G DETONATOR The 4G Detonator is a programmable detonator that is suitable for all types of blasting operations, especially those requiring precise and flexible timing and is programmable in 1ms to 20 000ms The 4G Detonator is housed in a copper tube, which protects the circuit board and base charge. The 4G Detonator is attached to a robust black and green two wire down-line cable which ends in a gel filled connector that clips on a surface harness wire. 4.1. Components 4.1.1. Crimp Plug The crimp plug is a seal that is moulded onto the down-line wire preventing ingress of moisture and contaminants into the detonator tube between the down-line wire and crimp plug. Crimp plug Populated PCB Fuse Head Base charge H-Plug Copper tube Page 24 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 4.1.2. Printed Circuit Board (PCB) The PCB is an electronic module that houses components such as ASIC, resistors and a capacitor. ASIC:
The ASIC (Aplication Specific Integrated Circuitry) controles the functions of the detonator:
Resistors:
The resistors protect the detonator circuitry against external influences such as:
Over voltage, Over current, Electrostatic Discharge, Electromagnetic Pulse. Capacitor:
The capacitor is an energy storage device that stores the required energy for the detonator to function independently after the blast signal has been sent and the connection between the control equipment and detonator has been destroyed. 4.1.3. Fusehead The Fusehead is an incendiary explosive device that acts as the interface between the electronics and the explosives base charge of the detonator. 4.1.4. Protective H-Plug An anti-static H-plug that is used to centralise the PCB separates the base charge from the circuitry and prevent powder migration into the circuitry. It also protects the PCB from dynamic shock and static distcharge. The second crimp is situated around the H-Plug and provides the seal which separates the explosive powders from the circuit board. 4.1.5. Connector The Connector is used to connect the detonator down-line onto the surface harness-wire bus of the installation. The Connector has two spade connectors that ensures a secure connection on each harness-wire and has two grooves enabling the user to align each wire with these connectors and also facilitates ease of use. These connections are not polarity sensitive and can be connected in any configuration. The transparent polycarbonate connectors allow for improved visual inspection of the wires inside the connector to ensure correct connection. The connector is filled with a transparent gel to facilitate water resistance during use. It is advisable to not submerge connectors in water. 4.1.6. Down-line wire The down-line wire is a cable comprising 2 steel, copper or Bi-metal wire conductors which are individually sheathed and an outer black and green insulation. The down-line wire is manufactured in various lengths and can be supplied to the users requirements. Page 25 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 4.2. Connecting Up 4.2.1. Connector 1. Using one hand, hold the down-line wire with the connector facing away from your body. 2. With the other hand, pinch the locking clips together to release the connector and release the top lid. 3. Flip the connector lid open. 4. Ensure that there are no small stones and grit inside the connector. Locking Clip 5. Align the harness wire with the spade connectors inside the connector and pull the wires down. Guiding grooves on either side of the connector housing will facilitate the ease of this operation. 6. When closing the connector, ensure the connector clicks home to ensure a secure and proper connection and prevent the connector from opening Place connectors away from normal operational movement of vehicles and users. Walking or driving over these connectors will result in damaged connectors, requiring the replacement of detonators. Avoid contamination inside the connector by keeping the connector closed at all times before final connection to the harness-wire. Do not remove the gel because it assists with preventing moisture accumulating inside the connector that will lead to corrosion of the connectors and leakage. In addition, small stones and grit can cause damage to contacts causing loss of communication to the detonator. A connector that is not closed correctly could result in a poor connection which may cause communication problems with the detonator and ultimate misfire. Avoid contamination inside the connector by keeping the connector closed at all times. A connector that is not closed correctly could result in a poor connection which may cause communication problems with the detonator. Page 26 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 4.3. Application of Detonator Refer to Application document OPI-00390 for guidelines. The guideline does not supersede those required by the local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of 4G detonators. In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. 4.4. Handling Precautions Refer to the Electronic Detonator Material Data Sheet for detailed information on Precautions for safe handling, Conditions for safe storage, Disposal methods and Regulatory information. 4.4.1. Storage Store 4G detonators in accordance with relevant regulatory/legal requirements. . Ensure no smoking or open flames near 4G detonators. Always keep storage facilities clean and dry. Ensure rotation of stock to use product with the specified shelf life. 4.4.2. 4G Detonator Care Avoid dropping or applying any physical shock to 4G detonators because all detonators are impact sensitive. The connector is splash proof; water inside the connector could cause leakage that could result in 4G detonators malfunctioning. Keep detonators a minimum of 5m from cellular phones and 2 way radios as interference could cause the 4G Detonator to malfunction. Never attempt to open the 4G Detonator as it could initiate. Keep the connectors closed when not in use to prevent corrosion of the connectors pins. Grit and dirt inside the connector could damage the connector pins and result in poor connection Explosives inside the connector may cause corrosion on the connector pins that could result in poor connection and leakage. 4G DETONATORS MAY ONLY BE CONNECTED TO THE THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL LEGISLATION AND PRESCRIBED BLASTING PRACTICES ON SITE WHICH MAY REQUIRE THE BENCH TO BE CLEARED FOR BLASTING BEFORE CONNECTION TO A BLAST DEVICE IS ALLOWED. Page 27 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Specifications 4.5. 4.5.1. Number of 4G detonators A maximum of 400 4G detonators (dependent on down-hole wire length) can be accommodated per channel. 4.5.2. Automated detonator capacity check Due to the expanded non-volatile memory capacity of the new 4G Detonator, the cable length is now stored in the detonator during assembly. With this information stored in the detonator, the software on the Control Equipment will automatically verify the cumulative detonator down-hole length and warn the user should the installation limits be exceeded. 4.5.3. Decking The system can accommodate decking applications with up to six decks and three 4G detonators per deck while using the Advanced and Planned Tagging Options. 4.5.4. Maximum delay times and increments 4G detonators can be programmed from 0ms to a maximum delay of 20 000ms in 1ms increments. 4.5.5. Temperature Limitations The following temperature limitations apply to the 4G Detonator:
-40C to +80C
-40F to +176F 4.5.6. Storage Life and Equipment Life Store in a well-ventilated magazine suitably licensed for IMCO Class 1.1B or 1.4S (specified on packaging) and in accordance to specifications of the relevant Acts on the storage of explosives. The product has a 3 year shelf life from date of manufacture when stored in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements. 4.5.7. Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity LIKE ALL OTHER DETONATORS, 4G DETONATORS ARE SENSITIVE TO SHOCK AND TEMPERATURE AND USERS MUST REFRAIN FROM EXPOSING THEM TO EXCESSIVE SHOCK AND HEAT. The 4G detonators have resistors which provide the following safety features:
Over voltage protection - Over current protection, Static - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP), As per SANS 1717-1 and CEN 13763-27 requirements. Page 28 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Safety 4.6. The 4G Detonator cannot be initiated by the CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger is incapable of producing required firing voltage and cannot produce the required Fire command to initiate a 4G Detonator. the NEVER CONNECT ANY THIRD PARTY OR OTHER UNAPPROVED DETONATORS TO THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM. 4.7. Safety Warnings 4.7.1. User and Safety Tips Always keep connectors closed when not in use to avoid damage and/or contamination. Always ensure all the 4G detonators are connected to the system via the harness wire before leaving the bench. 4G detonators are impact sensitive and should always be handled with care. 4.7.2. Risks HANDLE MECHANICALLY DAMAGED 4G DETONATOR AS PER APPROVED PROCEDURES. NEVER CONNECT THE 4G DETONATOR TO A BATTERY OR ANY OTHER UNAPPROVED VOLTAGE SOURCE. NEVER CONNECT THE 4G DETONATOR TO ANY EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN A CE4 TAGGER WHILE ON THE BENCH. THE 4G DETONATOR MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE COMMANDER WHEN THE BENCH IS CLEARED FOR BLASTING. 4.7.3. Destruction of 4G Detonators Refer to Destruction of Shot Detonators document OPI-202 for guidelines. The guideline does not supersede those required by local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of 4G detonators In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. Page 29 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5 CE4 TAGGER 5.1. CE4 Tagger General Information The CE4 Tagger is a lightweight device that is powered by an internal rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer cell and equipped with a backlit screen and a keypad. The CE4 Tagger is used on the bench to test and configure the detonators by tagging the location of the detonators and assigning appropriate delays. The device is also used to establish a Wi-Fi link with an appropriate DigiShot Plus 4G Commander in order to interface with the CE4 Commander. The CE4 Tagger features various user-interface elements including separate LEDs located above the LCD screen, a buzzer and a vibration motor to draw the users attention to the systems current state. The CE4 Tagger is incapable of producing sufficient voltage and the coded signal required to fire any detonators, thus rendering the CE4 Tagger inherently safe. Page 30 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.2. CE4 Tagger Components Harnesswireterminals PogoPinConnector BlueStatusLED WhiteChargeLED RedErrorLED LCDScreen SoftKeys Navigationkeys(yellowarrows) Enterkey Backspacekey Escapekey On/Offkey Numericalkeys USBconnector Figure 5: CE4 Tagger Component Identification Page 31 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.2.1. Harness wire terminals The harness wire terminals are used to connect to detonator / surface harness wires. 5.2.2. Pogo pins The Pogo pins are used to connect a single detonator, while testing and tagging holes. 5.2.3. LEDs STATUS LED A Blue circular LED (
CHARGE LED A White DetNet Swirl shaped LED (
ERROR LED A Red triangular LED (
5.2.4. LCD Screen
) which indicates the status of the CE4 Tagger.
) which indicates that the CE4 Tagger is charging.
) which indicates when an error is present. The LCD screen displays 128x128 pixels. If the device is used in environments where the temperature drops below -15C, heating of the LCD will be necessary and the internal heater pad will automatically switch on to heat the display. 5.2.5. SoftKeys The SoftKeys will activate functions that appear at the bottom of the LCD screen, above the corresponding SoftKey, as an option in a menu. 5.2.6. Navigation and Numerical keys The Yellow arrows ( ) on the keypad are the Navigation keys. The Up and Down Navigation Keys are also used to increase and decrease values in certain screens. The Numerical keys are used to enter numerical values and to select a function from the list of commands or menus. The top bar displayed on each screen will indicate the keyboard mapping mode designed for that screen. 5.2.7. Enter key is used to accept an on-screen activity/option. The Enter key 5.2.8. Backspace Key The Backspace key 5.2.9. On/Off key is used to delete the character to the left of the cursor. key to switch ON the CE4 Tagger. key while holding the Press Press To save battery power, the CE4 Tagger turns off automatically after a set period of idle operation. The auto power-off time may be adjusted, within limits, by the user. key to switch the CE4 Tagger OFF. Page 32 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.2.10. Esc key is used to cancel and escape out of selected options. The Esc key 5.2.11. Function key key is a function key that is used in conjunction with other keys to perform specific functions. The 5.2.12. USB connector port NO DETONATOR SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CE4 TAGGER WHILST THE TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO A CHARGER. The USB connector port will allow for charging of the battery and also for software upgrades and communication with a PC. To perform a software upgrade, plug a flash drive containing the new software version into the USB connector while the CE4 Tagger is switched off. Hold down any key
(Except the key) and then press the power ON button This will place the CE4 Tagger in bootloader mode and start the download of the new software. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software upgrade. 5.2.13. Battery The CE4 Tagger uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer battery. Consult Section 5.7 for more details on the CE4 Tagger battery, charging and maintenance procedure. 5.2.14. Audio Tones Audible feedback operates as follows:
A specific audio sample is played during the boot-up process A positive acknowledgement sound accompanies successful tasks An error acknowledgement sound accompanies errors or automatic power-off after a software timeout An informational sound accompanies other noteworthy events to draw the users attention to the screen 5.2.15. Vibration Signals Error events are accompanied by a CE4 Tagger vibration sequence. Page 33 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.2.16. Visual Signals LEDs will illuminate to visually signal a change to the user. A round blue LED (
) and a triangular red LED (
) will illuminate under the following conditions:
Successful tests or operations result in the blue led illuminating until a new operation is performed or until the screen is exited. Unsuccessful tests or operations result in the red LED flashing until a new operation is performed or until the screen is exited. When an error is accepted by the User, the red LED will switch off, and only if a test fails will the red LED flash. The red and blue LEDs will illuminate simultaneously only if the operation has completed but some error conditions (acknowledged by the user) have been encountered (example: tagging a det with a bad fuse). The DetNet Swirl shaped 5.2.17. Real Time Clock (RTC) Function white LED will illuminate to indicate that the CE4 Tagger is charging. The CE4 Tagger contains an internal Real Time Clock (RTC), which is required for its operation and log keeping. The user should manually confirm/set the time-zone on the CE4 Tagger. The time is automatically updated via the internal GPS. 5.2.18. NFC The CE4 Tagger (version 4 and later) is equipped with a Near Field Communication (NFC) reader located on the rear of the Tagger. NFC functionality will be activated in a future software release. 5.2.19. Wireless Charging Wireless charging has been incorporated into the CE4 Tagger (version 4 and later) to allow the unit to be charged using a commercially available off-the-shelf Qi wireless charging pad. This will allow the user to charge the Tagger without the need for USB cables, and also ensures that the protective cover on the USB connector remains closed and sealed in harsh environments. The wireless charging receiver is situated on the rear of the Tagger. The receiver supports a power transfer of 5W and can charge the Tagger with a current of 500mA. Note that at the supported power transfer rate the Tagger will take longer to charge wirelessly than when connected to a USB cable / charger, where a charging current of up to 1A is supported. Page 34 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Power CE4 Tagger ON and OFF 5.3. 5.3.1. CE4 Tagger Power-ON key. Press the ON The splash screen will display for approximately 1.5 seconds during the CE4 Tagger boot sequence. The system name will be displayed. The software release and hardware version number will be displayed similar to example shown. Release 36230B Hardware ver.3 1. 2. 3. 4. ONLY TRAINED USERS SHALL BE ALLOWED TO USE THIS EQUIPMENT. 5. Warning will be displayed to indicate that the Tagger is due for service
(If applicable) Press the SoftKey to acknowledge and continue. 6. 7. Warning will be displayed indicating that Tagger must have a unique number which the user must acknowledge before proceeding Press the SoftKey to acknowledge and continue. Disclaimer will be displayed which the user must acknowledge before proceeding. SoftKey to acknowledge the Disclaimer. 8. 9. 10. Press the The charging screen will only be displayed when the CE4 Tagger is plugged into a USB, or external battery pack charging source. Pressing ESCAPE returns the user to the original screen and prevents this screen being shown again until the next power-on sequence. Page 35 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Device password 11. Enter the Device password using the numerical keypad. 12. Press to continue. To prevent unauthorised use, the CE4 Tagger is assigned a default password by the manufacturer. The default password may be changed by the user and can be configured from the Settings menu. Entering value 0 as a password will remove the password-required step when starting the device. 13. Main Menu screen will be displayed. The main menu screen will vary dependant on the mode of operation. 5.3.2. CE4 Tagger Power-OFF 14. Press and hold key and then press the key to power OFF CE4 Tagger. In the event of the software not responding to the key in combination with the key, it is possible to force the CE4 Tagger to power off by pressing and holding key for at least 10 seconds to forcibly power OFF the CE4 Tagger. Note that the this action may result in settings or blast information being lost and should not be used in normal practice as hard power downs can lead to data corruption or loss. Page 36 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.4. CE4 Tagger Menu Navigation Menu navigation is performed by directly pressing the associated menu item number key. This is indicated to the user by the 123 keyboard mode displayed in the top bar. Pressing escape will normally navigate to the previous menu. In some screens, such as Tagging, other keyboard modes may be appropriate e.g. an arrow notation may be displayed to indicate that options on the screen may be incremented or decremented using up and down arrow keys. The charging Icon power. will only be displayed while the CE4 Tagger is plugged into a Keyboard Mapping Mode Menu Title / List Heading Instructions and Information Interactive window SoftKey Menus Press the Numerical keys to enter numerical values or to select a function from the list of menus. The Yellow arrows are Navigation keys and are used to navigate during actions where it is required to move left, right, up or down in an active screen. The Up and Down Navigation Keys are also used to increase and decrease values in certain screens. Use the SoftKeys to select soft menu options. Soft menu options will appear as icons at the bottom of the LCD screen directly above the corresponding SoftKey, as an option in a menu. Press the corresponding SoftKey to perform the indicated function. Press the Press the 5.4.1. CE4 Tagger Common User Interface Conventions key to confirm an instruction. key to cancel an instruction. The CE4 Tagger screens support standard conventions of interaction as detailed below:
5.4.1.1. Box Numeric input When a default number is displayed on the screen, any numeric keyboard input will replace the existing number entirely. Pressing Enter will move to the next field, if any Pressing Escape will exit the numeric field and consequently also the active screen if it cannot continue without the required input. The Backspace key will delete the rightmost character, including that of a default number if present. Escape will not return a changed numeric input field to the original value. Pressing escape will exit the menu. Page 37 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.4.1.2. Scrolled Numeric input Fixed range numeric input may be scrolled if indicated by up/down arrows associated with the field:
Pressing the Up key (2) increments the number, if possible. Pressing the Down key (8) decrements the number, if possible. 5.4.1.3. Navigation Navigation follows the conventions of DigiShot to ease migration as detailed below:
Menus are selected by pressing the appropriate numeric key directly. Soft-keys perform the indicated function. Escape exits the current field or screen, as appropriate. Arrow keys may be used to move in selected lists or scroll selected lists e.g. the detonator list. Arrow keys may also jump between selected fields in specific screens, typically those involving configuration settings. Table 2: CE4 Tagger Icon Shortcut Keys and Commander Icons ICON / KEYSTROKES DESCRIPTION
&
&
Press both the Function & Escape keys to disconnect the Tagger from the Commander Press both Function and Enter keys while in the main menu to connect Tagger to the Commander Press Hash to display errors / View Notifications screen Number of commanders connected Amount of detonators (Per Commander) Errors exist. Press hash. Wait Not ready yet Info Return to SAFE (Abort) Fire Button(s) Force fire buttons (Should the last det check fail, the User can force the blast with blast override password) Fire keys Disabled Busy with background tasks Page 38 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.5. CE4 Tagger Menu Quick Reference Info Screen Battery/Current/Temp/Humidity HW serial no/SW release GPS data/Satellites/Altitude User ID Table 3: CE4 Tagger Menu Reference Main Menu 1. New design 2. Tag detonators 3. Test menu 4. View design 5. Mark detonators 6. Assign ViewShot - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only 7. Verify Plan - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only Configuration 1. 4G Setup 2. Device Setup 3. Advanced Setup 4. Factory Setup Table 4: CE4 Tagger Main Menu Reference 1-New Design 2 -Tag detonators 3-Test Menu 4-View Design/Plan 5-Mark Detonators Warning Displayed: Do you want to clear the detlist? Y/N Main Menu is presented. This will clear the tagged detonator list and not the ViewShot design Warning Displayed:
Connect one det at a time If No plan available. Use ViewShot to download a plan!
Tagging detail settings 3.1. Test All 3.2. Test String 3.3. Test Single Det 3.4. Leakage Test 3.5. Untagged Test 3.6. Search Dets 4.1. List Detonators 4.2. List Missing Dets 4.3. List New Dets 4.4. List Bad Status 4.5. Duplicate Location 4.6- Blast Summary 5.1. End of Line 5.2. Start of Row 5.3. End of Row 5.4. Inflection Pt. 5.5. Remove Mark Page 39 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 6- Assign ViewShot - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only 7- Verify Plan - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only No detonators message is displayed if the detonator list (tagged) is empty 6.1. List Detonators Message displayed: Verification Complete 1. Verify Plan 2. Verify Delays 3. Show Results 4. Merge Plan Table 5: CE4 Tagger Configuration Menu Reference
.1: 4G Setup
.1.1. Tag Option Select:
Basic (B) Advanced (A) Planned (P)
.1.2. Site Setup Use Markers (B/A/P) Autotag (A/P) Multi-Commander Primed (A) Assign Locations(P) List Hole Config (A/ P) Det Label (A/ P) Delete ViewShot
.1.3. Leakage Trigger Select leakage warning trigger (Between 0.1 and 1mA)
.2: Device Setup
.3: Advanced Setup 1. Contrast 2. Brightness 3. Time Zone 4. Timeouts 5. Language 6. Units 1. Tagger ID 2. Connections 3. Remote View 4. Clear Tags 5. Device Password 6. Read All Det Data 7. Max Wire length Page 40 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5
.4: Factory Setup 1. Clear Tags 2. Clear Logs 3. Leakage Calibrate 4. Start Self-Test 5. Experimental Menu 6. Storage Mode 7. Connector Type 8. Reset Service Date 9. SD card Dump The Factory Setup Menu is password protected and not for normal use. It is required to access the Factory Setup only. Page 41 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.6. CE4 Tagger Accessories 5.6.1. External Battery Pack The External Battery Pack is an optional accessory used to increase the capacity of the internal battery when operating in sub-zero temperatures or other environments that demand extended operating times. The Internal Heater Pad can operate with the internal polymer battery, independently of the external battery pack, and will switch ON when the temperature drops below -15C. External Battery Pack enclosure is attached to the back of the CE4 Tagger by four retaining screws. Six batteries are fitted in the bottom of the External Battery Pack. A cover closes the battery bay. Replace using 6 x 1.5V AA Alkaline or 6 x 1.2V Ni-MH / Ni-Cd batteries only. Closed External Battery Pack fitted to the CE4 Tagger. Figure 6: CE4 Tagger External Battery Pack Page 42 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.6.2. Replaceable Top Connectors The Top Connector contains the pogo pins, used for tagging the detonators (one detonator at a time) It also consists of the Harness wire terminals, used to connect to the detonator harness wire (multiple detonators on the same wire bus). THIS PART SHOULD BE REPLACED IN A CLEAN ENVIRONMENT. Figure 7: CE4 Tagger Top Connector Always keep the contacts clean and free of contamination. The Top Connector may be ordered separately and is easily replaceable should the contacts become worn and/or damaged, through prolonged use. Page 43 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.6.3. Surface Harness Wire The Surface harness wire consists of a pair of yellow and green individually sheathed copper wire, 0.63mm in diameter. Figure 8: Surface Harness Wire 4G detonators are connected to the surface harness wire to enable communication with control equipment. The maximum length of 2-wire surface harness per channel, including the lead-in wire used to connect shall not exceed 2500m. BY EXCEEDING THIS LIMIT THE INHERENT RESISTANCE ON THE HARNESS WIRE WILL INCREASE RESULTING IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SECURELY TWISTED AND INSULATED TO PREVENT INTERMITTENT CONNECTIONS, SHORT CIRCUITS AND EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE. THESE CAN BE A MAJOR SOURCE OF TROUBLE CAUSING POTENTIAL MISFIRES Page 44 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.7. CE4 Tagger Battery The CE4 Tagger uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer cell battery. The CE4 Tagger battery compartment is sealed to prevent moisture ingression and condensation which could cause corrosion and or short circuits within the CE4 Tagger resulting in a possible malfunction or an unreliable CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger is tested to an IP 57 rating. NO DETONATOR SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CE4 TAGGER WHILST CONNECTED TO A CHARGER. The battery is not replaceable in the field and should only be replaced by a DetNet qualified technician . 5.7.1. Charging the CE4 Tagger Connect the USB cable between the mini USB port on the CE4 Tagger and a Personal Computer or use a DetNet Universal charger to charge the CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger will automatically start charging as soon as the USB connector port is plugged into a USB socket. A battery level indication will be displayed during charging. The CE4 Tagger may not charge sufficiently if the CE4 Tagger is connected to a weak charger or damaged USB port. The charging circuit of the CE4 Tagger may require as much as 1A for charging. It is recommended that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 100% before use, to allow for maximum operating time. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CE4 TAGGER BE CHARGED TO 50% WHEN PLACED INTO STORAGE, AND THEREAFTER THE UNIT SHOULD BE CHARGED AT LEAST EVERY SIX MONTHS TO 50%, TO MAINTAIN THE EXPECTED LIFETIME OF THE BATTERY. REFER TO CE4 TAGGER STORAGE MODE UNDER ADVANCED SETUP FOR MORE DETAIL. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 45 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.7.2. Low Battery Once the battery has discharged to 9%, the CE4 Tagger will display the message icon in the top bar indicating a possible low battery condition. (The message Icon is active for any fault condition). The CE4 Tagger will automatically switch off when the battery capacity drops below 3%. button to view Notifications screen. Press Screen will display Low Battery!
Press Exit SoftKey to return to previous screen. 5.7.3. Battery Information The user may navigate to the System information screen (detailed in paragraph 6.1.1) to check that the CE4 Tagger is being charged and to verify the state of health of the battery. Page 46 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5.8. CE4 Tagger Storage Mode The CE4 Tagger storage process is to be followed when the CE4 Tagger will be stored for an extended period of time. It is recommend that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 50% when put into storage and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. Store the CE4 Tagger in a cool, dry place when not in use. to select Configuration Settings Menu. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey below From Configuration Settings Menu to select Factory Setup. 2. Press to select Factory Setup Menu Factory Password 3. Enter Factory Password Press Factory Setup Menu 4. Press key to select Storage Mode Page 47 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Storage Mode 5. When the battery capacity is more than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will discharge the battery by activating various battery consuming functions such as the heating pad, to accelerate the discharge level to the required 50% charge level. When the battery capacity is less than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will prompt the user to connect a charger to attain the required 50% charge level. When the CE4 Tagger reaches the 50% battery storage capacity as required, it will switch off automatically allowing for safe storage. Page 48 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 System Info 6 CE4 TAGGER SYSTEM INFORMATION This function enables the user to view battery charge information, current consumption, state-of-health of the battery, temperature information, hardware and software serial numbers, GPS detail and User ID. 6.1. From the Main Menu, press 6.1.1. System Info - Battery SoftKey to view the CE4 Tagger System Information 95%: Battery charge information (USB = the charging source). Should the charger not be able to supply enough power to charge the CE4 Tagger, Weak Charger will be indicated as the charging status, instead of Charging (USB). Current Consumption: By convention a negative value indicates that current is being drawn from the battery. Cell Status: (Good) indicates the state of health of the battery. Should the status indicate Low the unit should be serviced to have the battery replaced. The CE4 Tagger will switch OFF automatically when the battery capacity drops below 3%.
(The CE4 Tagger will display a warning at 9% and switch OFF at 3%). 6.1.2. System Info - Temperature and the Relative Humidity The Temperature and the Relative Humidity as measured inside the CE4 Tagger are displayed as follows:
Temperature: The Temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit (Dependant on Units Setting under Device Setup). Humidity: The Relative Humidity is displayed as a percentage. 6.1.3. System Info - Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number Hardware Serial Number will be displayed, and Software Release Number will be displayed. Press to select next page. Hardware Serial number is required when Challenge Response tickets are required from the DetNet Portal. 36230B Page 49 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 6.1.4. System Info - GPS Detail The GPS location will be displayed. Altitude and the number of satellites found will also be displayed. Press to select next page. 6.1.5. System Info User ID SoftKey to enter or edit User ID. Press Use alphanumeric characters to enter a User ID. Press to select next page. The User ID may be used to identify ownership of the CE4 Tagger such as the User name or Site name/code where used. Page 50 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7 CE4 TAGGER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS 7.1. CE4 Tagger 4G Setup Configuration 7.1.1. Tag Option The Tag Option will allow the User to select one of the following three tagging options:
Basic (B) Advanced (A) Planned (P) Main Menu Press A corresponding symbol (B, A or P) will be displayed in the top bar once the tag option is set. 1. SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Tag Option Tag Option Use navigational keys to scroll up/down and display the required selection as follows:
Press SoftKey to save option as required. Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 51 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.1.2. Site Setup Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Site Setup 1. 2. 3. The Site Setup is dependent on the Tagging Option and in this menu, the user may allow certain functions to be active when tagging. Advanced mode has more advanced features and can be used with double primed or decked holes. Detail about decking and hole configuration can be found further in this document where Advanced mode is detailed Site Setup 4. Site Setup screen for each (Basic, Advanced and Planned) tagging mode are depicted below. Use Markers: When the Use Markers option is enabled (Black filled rectangle) the tagging screen will contain a SoftKey to allow the simultaneous marking and tagging of a detonator. Mark detonators menu includes more types of markers besides End of Line which typically is assigned to the detonator connected last on a wire harness. Multi-Commander: When this option is selected, the user may tag more than 4 channels and up to 16000 detonators on a single Tagger. If not selected it will stop and provide a warning when more than 4 channels are allocated and more than 1600 detonators are being tagged. Page 52 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Autotag: If the Autotag option is disabled (White filled rectangle), tagging can only be performed on the pogo pins, and not by connecting a detonator onto the harness wire (It is not practical to connect and then remove the detonator from the harness wires). Multi-Primed: When this item is enabled one can load more than one detonator per hole and tagging can also be restricted to a deck only if necessary. . Assign Locations: With large blast designs, the plan may not be complete at the time of tagging and to speed up the process, tagging can be conducted in parallel with drilling. If this item is checked, the Tag Detonators menu will only write the locations in the detonator. When the plan is available later, the tagging must be completed using the tagger to Assign Delays (as the commander does not have the option to time dets) in order to prepare the detonators for the blast. List Hole Configuration: Allows users to define a hole configuration. A hole configuration consists of the number of decks in a hole, the number of detonators in each deck and the time offset of each deck. The system allows more than one hole configuration to be defined but only one can be employed at the time of tagging. Det Label: The label defines how the hole (det) is referred to throughout the system. The following choices are available:
1. Row number, hole number, det number 2. Literal row, hole number, det number 3. Hole Number, det number 4. Numeric sequence (used internally in basic mode)*
Delete ViewShot: This option allows for the previously saved ViewShot plan to be deleted from the Tagger memory Refer to individual Tag Options in the Tagging Operation section (Chapter 10) of this manual where detail is provided regarding the Site Setup. This will differ according to the type of Tagging Option selected. Page 53 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.1.3. Leakage Trigger The user could set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered. This limit could be set from 0.1 mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Leakage Trigger Use display the required selection navigational keys to scroll up/down and Set warning trigger between 0.1 and 1mA Press SoftKey to save. Page 54 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2. Device Setup This menu will allow the user to adjust device specific settings. The following options are available:
1. Contrast 2. Brightness 3. Time Zone 4. Time Outs 5. Language 6. Units 7.2.1. Contrast This function enables the user to adjust the LCD screen contrast. The contrast adjusts as the value changes but the setting will only be saved permanently when the SoftKey is pressed. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Contrast. Contrast Use the arrow key Adjust to ensure the displayed contrast blocks are distinguishable to allow to adjust contrast. viewing greyed out versus bold items. If the contrast is either too high or too low, these font differences will not be notable. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 55 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2.2. Brightness The Brightness menu allows the LCD screen display brightness to be adjusted using the arrow keys. The Brightness adjusts as the value changes but the setting will only be saved permanently when the SoftKey is pressed. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Brightness. Adjusting the Brightness Use the arrow Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. keys to adjust brightness. 1. 2. 3. 4. Page 56 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2.3. Time Zone This function enables the user to define the time zone. Date/time settings are controlled by GPS GMT data but, since the time zone is not configured automatically, it should always be set by the user in order to ensure the correct time display. The time zones may be adjusted in 0.5 hour increments. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Time Zone. Set Time Zone Use the arrow key to navigate the Time Zone options (Time zone can be adjusted in 0.5h increments). Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. 2. 3. 4. Page 57 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2.4. Timeouts This function enables the user to set a time period of inactivity before the CE4 Tagger will automatically power off to conserve battery power. The user can set the idle time between 2 to 120 minutes. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Timeouts. Auto Shutdown Use navigational keys to navigate selection. o Minimum of 2 minutes. o Maximum of 120 minutes. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 58 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2.5. Language This function enables the user to select a language preference for the 4G CE4 Tagger menus. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Language. Language Press Press Press Press on the keypad to select English. on the keypad to select Espaol. on the keypad to select Franais. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 59 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 7.2.6. Units This function enables the user to select either the Imperial or Metric Units of Measure as preferred. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Units. Units Use Press Press navigational keys to toggle selection. to select either Imperial or Metric. SoftKey to save. Page 60 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8 CE4 TAGGER ADVANCED SETUP The Advanced Setup Menu displays the following options:
1. Tagger ID 2. Connections 3. Remote View 4. Clear Tags 5. Device Password 6. Read all det data(trouble shooting option) Tagger ID 8.1. This function enables the user to set a unique Tagger ID that is used for device identification and RF communication. The Tagger ID should be unique amongst all Taggers at a site. IDs from 1 to 10 are supported. The current CE4 Tagger ID is displayed on the right side of the top bar on the screen (#1 in the screen depicted below). WHEN USING MULTIPLE TAGGERS ON THE SAME BLAST, ENSURE THAT TAGGER IDS ARE UNIQUE AS TAGGERS USING THE SAME ID WILL CAUSE ERRORS ON THE BLAST. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 61 of 214 1. 2. UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3. 4. Advanced Setup Press to select Tagger ID Tagger ID Use numerical keypad to enter Unique Tagger ID between 1 and 10. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 62 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.2. Connections This function enables the user to activate the WiFi and/or USB module allowing the Tagger to communicate with other equipment. Additional software for a PC may be required from the manufacturer to support this feature. USB cable or Wi-Fi must be connected, and the PC software must be configured and activated before this function can be used. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press Press Press on the keypad to connect Tagger to PC via WiFi. on the keypad to connect Tagger to Commander via WiFi on the keypad to connect Tagger to PC via USB During initial connection with a PC, the device will be displayed on the PC WiFi List and will require a Password to connect. Use Generic Password: 145634235. Subsequent connections will connect automatically. 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 63 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.2.1. Connect Tagger to PC via WiFi To establish WiFi connectivity between the CE4 Tagger and a PC, the PC must be equipped with the required WiFi functionality and corresponding software. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via Wi-Fi. PC via Wi-Fi CE4 Tagger will search for access point on PC CE4 Tagger will connect to the PC Follow on-screen prompts to connect to CE4 Tagger Access point Wi-Fi 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 64 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.2.2. Connect CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander via WiFi ENSURE THAT THE BENCH IS CLEARED BEFORE THE CE4 TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO THE BENCH COMMANDER. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connect to Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander via WiFi. Commander via WiFi Enter the Commanders ID using the keypad to connect Press Enter Commanders ID will also be displayed if Commander is not found to continue while attempting to connect. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Page 65 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Only one Commander with selected ID must be active when connected. When connectivity is established between the CE4 Tagger and the Commander an audible Bling and subsequent Tock sound should be heard for every button press. CE4 Tagger will connect to the selected CE4 Commander Shortcut key combination is available from the Tagger main menu to connect the CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander via WiFi menu as follows:
Press and hold key and then press the key to connect. Press and hold key and then press the key to disconnect. Page 66 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.2.3. Connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB. USB Link with PC The CE4 Tagger will wait for the connection to be established and the following messages will appear:
Ready for PC Connect USB cable between PC and CE4 Tagger Connected to PC Page 67 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.3. Remote View This function enables the user to demonstrate the CE4 Tagger in action by replicating the screen on a PC. It may be used by trainers, product presenters and document writers. Additional PC software may be required from the manufacturer to support this feature. USB cable or Wi-Fi must be connected, and the PC software must be configured and activated before the Remote View function can be used. 8.3.1. Select Remote View on CE4 Tagger Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Remote View. Screen Capture to Enable on USB when prompted Press CE4 Tagger actions will be replicated on the PC screen Press to disable remote view. 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 68 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.3.2. Initiate Remote View on PC 1. Open the Remote View software application on the PC 2. Click on Connect tab 3. Select either Serial Port or WiFi as required from option 4. Ensure CE4 Tagger is switched ON Connect USB cable between CE4 Tagger and PC Click OK to continue Connect Device Select Serial (COM) Port from dropdown list Click OK to continue 5. Navigate to Advanced Setup/ Remote View on CE4 Tagger to select Remote View 6. Press 7. Press 8. Remote View will be displayed on PC to enable Remote View on PC via USB Page 69 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.4. Clear Tags This function enables the user to clear the detonator memory and remove the tag that was assigned. After the process completes the detonators will contain the factory ID that they were shipped with. Connect the harness wire to the Harness wire terminals of the CE4 Tagger. The detonators should remain connected to the Harness wire during the process. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Clear Tags Clear Tags An information screen will be displayed. Press SoftKey to erase all detonators tags for connected detonators. Press SoftKey to exit without clearing detonators. 5. When SoftKey was selected, Det tags cleared message will be displayed to indicate that Tags have been cleared. Press SoftKey to return to Advanced Setup Menu. Use this feature with caution. Once all det tags are cleared, the detonators will need to be re-tagged from the start, which will be time consuming . 6. Page 70 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.5. Device Password The CE4 Tagger is protected from unauthorised use by assigning a password. This function enables the user to change the default password by assigning a new unique password that is known only to the user. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Device Password Passwords Use the numerical keypad to enter Current Password. Press Use the numerical keypad to enter New Password. to confirm. Leave blank and press requirement during start-up of the Tagger for NO password Press to confirm. Information message confirming password changed will be displayed briefly. Passwords CE4 Tagger will display Passwords Screen. Press Press to return to Advanced Menu. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. The Password should be changed regularly to maintain security. Unlike conventional password entry, the chosen password is visible to the user (rather than ****) to enable the user to see if any typing errors are being made. Page 71 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.6. Read All Detonator Data This function was designed for debug purposes and it captures the data from a single detonator in the Tagger logs. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Read All Det Data Read All Det Data Connect a single detonator to the pogo pins or spring terminals Tagger will indicate the test progress. Detonator information will be recorded in the Tagger logs Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 72 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 8.7. Maximum Wire Length This function enables the user to set the maximum detonator wire length on a particular string. When the total detonator wire length on a particular string exceeds the set maximum wire limit, a system notification warning will be triggered. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. 3. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Max Wire length 4. Max Wire length Use numerical keypad to enter maximum wire length. Default is 10000m Page 73 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 9 CE4 TAGGER FACTORY SETUP The Factory Setup is password protected and may only be accessed by designated maintenance teams. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Factory Setup. Use numerical keypad Password. Press ENTER to continue. to enter Unique Tagger Factory Setup Menu Factory Setup will be displayed. Press Press to go to next page. to return to previous page. 1. 2. 3. 4. Page 74 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 With the exception of the storage mode function, each option is protected by its own web-based ticket system. If no active ticket is available for the chosen option (as stored on the tagger), the user is prompted for a ticket issued by portal.detnet.com. The ticket is comprised of two 10-digit numbers that need to be entered before continuing. If the ticket is valid, access will be granted to the given function. Tickets can be issued for a selected number of repeated uses before a given expiry date. Tickets issued are specific to a given CE4 Tagger as determined by the hardware serial number, thus allowing flexible control over protected features. 5. Web Ticket Press required Menu option. Obtain Ticket to continue. Page 75 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 9.1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Factory Setup Menu Options Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Factory Setup. Use numerical keypad to enter Unique Tagger Password. Press ENTER to continue. Factory Setup Menu Factory Setup will be displayed. Press Press to go to next page. to return to previous page. Each Factory menu option is described below:
Clear Tags (Factory) The factory clear tags option allows any connected detonators to be rewritten to the factory untagged ID. Clear Logs (Factory) The clear logs option erases the internal log and will display a confirmation dialog briefly. Page 76 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Leakage Calibrate (Factory) The Leakage Calibration option recalculates the leakage and current offsets by measuring the current and leakage with no detonators connected. It functions in the same fashion as the leakage test screen, except that it initially shows a leakage calibrate dialog briefly and then proceeds to the leakage screen. Start Self-Test (Factory) The self-test function starts a factory self-test of the device. Experimental Menu (Factory) The Experimental Menu option will contain any experimental functions that are required by the engineering team only. Storage Mode This item is not web-ticket protected. Please refer to Chapter 5.8 for detail. Connector Type (Factory) This option will allow the user to select the replaceable Top Connector Type as fitted to the CE4 Tagger. Reset Service Date (Factory) The option will reset the maintenance schedule warning. SD Card Dump (Factory) This option will dump all content on the SD card via the USB. Page 77 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10 TAGGING OPERATIONS It is good tagging practice to clear the list whenever a new tagging process is started. From the Main Menu, select NEW DESIGN and confirm that the list needs to be cleared. From the Main Menu, select NEW DESIGN and confirm that the list needs to be cleared Tagging allows the User to tag detonators in various configurations. To cater for specific user requirements, refer to Chapter 7.1.1 - CE4 Tagger 4G Setup Configuration to configure the required Tag Option as some features displayed on-screen may not be applicable to a particular tagging option. 10.1. COMMANDER SYSTEM TAGGING PRINCIPLE The main principle of tagging in the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System is to assign a delay for each detonator tagged. To make the detonator uniquely identifiable in the blast, the CE4 Tagger writes an ID in the detonator. A part of the ID written in the detonator reveals the CE4 Tagger ID involved in the assignment. The tagging process for the entire blast may be shared by multiple CE4 Taggers. Each CE4 Tagger MUST be uniquely identified, i.e. no two CE4 Taggers may have the same Device ID. Each CE4 Tagger can contain a maximum of 16000 Detonators in storage/memory. Only 400 dets (one String) could physically be tested at a time on a Tagger For tracking and troubleshooting purposes, the CE4 Tagger can also write a location in the detonator memory. This location can be a number only (referred to as sequence) or may be a fully descriptive position of a detonator in the blast as Row (number), Hole (number) and Det (number) in a hole. When tagging a detonator, the record is automatically appended to an internal list and saved on the persistent data storage card. 10.1.1. Basic. The BASIC tagging option (B) is offered to make the tagging simpler and also suitable for smaller applications. Page 78 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.1.2. Advanced The Advanced Mode option is more complex than the Basic Mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and the user will need to control several parameters within this mode. To define a hole configuration the Site Setup screen will need to be accessed. The Advanced (A) Tagging option also allows the user to tag detonators using Detonator Label methods as follows:
Method 1: {NNNNN} {N}, a hole number and det number is assigned Method 2: {NNN} {NNN} {NNN} a group number depicted as Row number, hole number and det number is used. Method 3: {AA} {NNN} {N}, a user configurable 2 letter group number, hole number and det number is assigned. Method 4: {A} {NNNNN} {N}, a user configurable single letter group number, hole number and det number is assigned. 10.1.3. Tag by Plan. With the Planned (P) tagging option, both the location and a delay must be written into the detonator. The data written into the detonator is taken from a plan downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via ViewShot. Locations can be deployed separately from delays by using Planned mode with Assign Location setting checked. This feature can be used when the delays are not yet known. Delays can be deployed to the tagged detonators later, using the available plan based on location matching. Page 79 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.2. BASIC (B) TAGGING OPTION With the BASIC tagging option, the user needs to only concentrate on the Delay value assigned to the detonator. The BASIC option is best suited for single primed hole blasts. It is advised to use only one Tagger per Commander when the Basic Tagging Option is used. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators Tag Detonators Warning Press OK SoftKey to acknowledge warning This detonator warning message will only be displayed when the user opens the tagging screen on the initial start-up of the device. 2. The user will be prompted to configure the Tagger with the desired String ID and new starting Sequence Number when tagging From the Tag Detonators Option Observe String ID (1 depicted on screen) Enter new String ID (2 depicted on next screen) Press Press Enter new starting Sequence # as required to save new starting Sequence #
to save new String ID The User may bypass the above procedure if required and Press the display the following Enter Delay screen. SoftKey to Page 80 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 3. Enter desired delay Use the keypad to enter the delay in ms to continue String Number 2 Total Count of detonators tagged Connect detonator and press ST2
#1 100m Total down wire length Detonator number and delay entered will be displayed Tagger will be ready state to enter next detonator delay 4. Enter desired delay for following detonators Use the keypad to enter the delay in ms Connect next detonator and press Detonator number and delay entered will be displayed Tagger will be ready state to enter next detonator delay to continue 5. Enter the required delay values for all detonators to be tagged and press each entry to save and move to next field. after Page 81 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.2.1. Mark Detonators With the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System it is good practice to mark the detonator that will be placed at the end of the harness wire, as the Bench Commander will verify the voltage level of this detonator just before presenting firing buttons. Each String should have 1 detonator marked as End of Line. The other types of marking are not explicitly used in this version of the system although it is planned to use it in a future release of the software. They would typically indicate that specific points of the blast have been captured and also indicate if a change of plan (delays and increments) is required. 1. 2. From the Main Menu Press to select Mark Detonators From Mark Detonators Menu Press Press Press Press Press Press Cancel SoftKey to return to Main Menu Press Apply SoftKey to apply the setting. to select/deselect End of Line to select/deselect Start of Row to select/deselect End of Row to select/deselect Inflection Point to Remove Mark from previously marked Detonator Page 82 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.2.1.1. Multiple Last-Det assignment From List Detonators Menu Select detonators to be assigned as Last Det Press Enter Press Set as Last Det Multiple last detonator will be set and displayed SoftKey Page 83 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3. PLANNED (P) TAGGING OPTION With the Planned (P) tagging option, both the location and a delay must be written into the detonator. The data written into the detonator is taken from a plan downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via ViewShot. If the delay plan is not yet known, but the holes are drilled at known locations one can tag the blast in 2 steps. The first step is to deploy the known locations by exporting the pattern from ViewShot 3D as Plan Location Only Delays can be deployed or updated to the tagged dets later using an updated ViewShot plan. To assign/update the delays, one must enter Assign ViewShot menu which is on the main menu. The user needs to ensure that he/she is at the correct location before tagging the detonator. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators If the CE4 Tagger does not detect a downloaded ViewShot plan, the user will be prompted to download a plan. Page 84 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3.1. Connect the CE4 Tagger to the PC 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. 3. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. 4. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB. 5. USB Link with PC Ready for PC Connect USB cable between PC and CE4 Tagger Connected to PC Page 85 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3.2. Download the Plan (via ViewShot) Download the Plan (via ViewShot 3D on the PC) onto the CE4 Tagger to enable the use of the Tag by Plan option. Refer to the ViewShot 3D User Manual for detail 1. Open ViewShot 3D on the PC 2. Press NEW DESIGN to start the application Select 4G System 3. Design Plan Import the .CSV file Page 86 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Create the timing design Create the tag path for each string 4. Send design to the (Tagger) Click on FILE Click Device Communication Select either Send Plan Locations Only or Send to Device Enter YES to continue Page 87 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. Select the required rows
(For individual taggers) or rows Include all rows by clicking on the >> button when a single Tagger is used 6. Select 4G System Tagger and press CONNECT 7. Press the SEND Button 8. The CE4 Tagger will receive the Plan via ViewShot 3D and the user will be able to tag by plan. Page 88 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3.3. View the downloaded design on the CE4 Tagger 1. From the Main Menu Press to select View Design. 2. View Plan The ViewShot plan will be displayed as a list. 3. Users may exercise the functions on the Soft-Keys such as Plan Summary to check that all the detonators are captured in the plan. 4. Plan Summery screen will be displayed 10.3.4. Select Start Position When tagging by following a plan, the user is expected to follow the path determined by a row or a tagging path (ViewShot). To allow the user to select a starting position / Row, Hole and Det number, the planned list is displayed. Only the remaining (untagged) positions will be displayed in this list. The screen presented here can also be recalled in the Tagging screen / configuration SoftKey. The user will be prompted to select the starting position from the list. Only the detonator situated at the top position in the list can be selected. Selection in a list is displayed as white text on black background The keyboard mapping mode at the top of the screen indicates navigation by arrows. Use keys to navigate by one up/down. Page 89 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Use keys Press and to navigate to previous/next page (6 locations displayed per page). or key once the selected position is made to return to tagging screen. Table 6: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Select Position Filter the list:
The list may be filtered by Row, String, Channel or Hole Search the list:
Search for the number within the parameter as set by the Filter #
Sort Tag order:
To enable tagging in Unsorted (according to Tag path), Reversed order (starting at the end of the string), Acending (starting at the highest hole number and tagging backwards in sequencial hole numbers) or Decending (starting at the lowest hole number and tagging forward in sequencial hole numbers) Amend the plan. If required to adjust the time for a particular hole/detonator or delete a detonator from the list. The deleted detonators will be skipped when tagging. Page 90 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3.5. Tag by Plan Screen 1. Connect the detonator and press the 2. key to tag The screen will confirm the tagged detonator and display details as tagged. Observe Autotag status (Should Auto-Tag be selected an arrow will indicate either ascending or descending
) Screen Instruction : Enter From this screen the user will have two options:
to tag next detonator Return to the list, or Stay in the current screen (Waiting for user to connect the next detonator). Observe that the current implementation remains in the tagging screen and adjusts the parameters according to the next position in the list which can be verified by pressing on tag configuration SoftKey. SoftKey from the tagging screen to return to the list. 3. Press tag configuration 4. To skip a position (mark as deleted) while tagging, the user must navigate to the panel of SoftKeys that contains the Add/Delete + and - Icons. 5. Press the indicated Delete SoftKey to skip the current location, the tagging screen will be updated with the next location as illustrated in this example Page 91 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Table 7: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Tag By Plan Option Tag Configuration Toggle Autotag *
Tagging Screen Information Test Single Det with harness connected Display the current tagged list Undo the last detonator tagged Skip or add det and or shothole Next Page String Statistics
?
Undo
+ -
>>
10.3.6. Assigning ViewShot 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Assign ViewShot. When the locations have been tagged separately, the detonators will not be ready to be connected to the Commander. To deploy the delays, the Tagger needs a plan (with updated delays) that matches the actual locations already deployed. By executing Assign ViewShot from the main menu, the Tagger will check every detonator recorded in the tagged list against the ViewShot plan (loaded on the Tagger). If the delay in the detonator does not match the plan, the new delay will be tagged in the detonator and the ViewShot plan will be updated with a checked mark against the matching record. Page 92 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.3.7. Verify Plan This menu option is only available for the Planned mode context. 2. From the Main Menu Press to select Verify Plan. The list of tagged detonators is compared with the actual plan. The user can view the updates in the View Plan menu. All detonators that do not match the plan are flagged in the list (Listed as new and indicated by asterisk). Matching positions are also marked off as completed, (a checked sign) if location and delay are matched and just a tag symbol if only location is matched but not the delay. 10.3.1. Verify Delays Times as in the Plan correspond to detlist 10.3.2. Show results Actioned Delay results are displayed 10.3.3. Merge Plan The Merge Plan option will merge all deleted/added detonators to the plan. Page 93 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.4. ADVANCED (A) TAGGING OPTION The Advanced Tagging option is used in situations where there is only a paper plan available and when holes are decked or multi-primed. It is a good tagging practice to clear the list when starting a new tagging process. From the Main Menu, select New Design and confirm that list needs to be cleared. 10.4.1. Advanced Mode The Advanced Mode option, as the name suggests, includes more features than the Basic Mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and the user will need to control several parameters within this mode. To define a hole configuration the Site Setup screen needs to be accessed. The Advanced Mode option is NOT recommended if the user does NOT have a paper plan. The emphasis with this tagging option is on DELAY, since location is used for tracking purposes. 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) Page 94 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. Press + SoftKey to add to the list of hole templates Note that the Default hole type cannot be edited 6. Press up/down arrows to select the required List Press ENTER key to continue 7. Press up/down arrows to select the number of Decks per Hole (Maximum of 9 allowed) Press Press key to continue to save Press Use Keypad to enter Time per deck to continue to next Time Press to save The detonators should be counted from the bottom of the hole up i.e. Detonator 1 is located at the bottom of the hole or in the bottom deck by convention Page 95 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.4.2. Edit the Hole configuration 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) 5. List Hole Config screen will be displayed (after creation) Use up/down arrow keys to select the required option Press Enter to select. Selection in a list will be displayed as white text on black background Page 96 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 6. Edit Configuration screen will be displayed Edit as required. Press SoftKey to save 10.4.3. Delete the Hole Configuration 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) Page 97 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. From List Hole Config screen Use up/down keys to select the required option. Delete the Hole configuration by selecting the required option Press the dustbin SoftKey to delete Default hole type can NOT be edited and a message will be displayed if attempted Page 98 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5. Advanced (A) Tagging Screen Info 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press ? to select Tagging Screen Info 3. Press or SoftKeys to navigate to Next / Previous Screens to display the following Information screens:
Location Timing Settings Tools Page 99 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.1. Advanced Tagging Screen SoftKey Icons The following table contains a detailed list of SoftKey icons that are used in the Advanced Tagging Screens. Table 8: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Advanced Tagging AdvancedScreen Icon Description Toggle Increment Direction Inter-hole increment Absolute Time Next Page Tag Configuration Test Single Det Tagged List Next Page Change Tagging order Toggle Autotag
* Tagged List Next Page Statistics Tagging Screen Information Next Page
>>
>>
>>
?
>>
Items marked with an asterisk * are subject to Site Setup selected options. Page 100 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.2. Toggle Increment Direction 1. Press SoftKey Time to toggle Increment, between Decrement and Manual modes. 2. Auto Incrementing Mode displayed Increasing time - arrow displayed next to time value points upwards 3. Auto-Decrementing Mode displayed Decreasing arrow displayed next to time value points downwards 4. User (Manual) Input Mode displayed User is prompted to enter the absolute time with each tag Page 101 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.3. Inter Hole Delay 1. 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press to select Inter Hole delay From Time Increment Screen Use numeric keypad to enter Inter-Hole delay Press Enter to return 10.5.4. Absolute Detonator Time 1. 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press to select Inter Hole delay From Detonator Time Screen Use numeric keypad to enter value Press Enter to return Page 102 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.5. Autotag / Manual Mode 1. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press either the AutoX (Auto OFF) or Auto (Auto ON) SoftKey as displayed to toggle the Autotag Mode Press AutoX SoftKey to toggle between Autotag and Manual Mode Auto indicates Autotag ON AutoX indicates Manual Mode (Autotag OFF) When using Autotag ON mode, the detonators may be directly connected to the wire bus and only untagged detonators will be searched for. When Autotag is OFF, connect the detonator to the pogo pins to tag. In Autotag OFF mode, any detonator can be re-tagged (i.e. any detonator can be detected). Retagging is not possible if Autotag is turned ON. Page 103 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.6. Tagging Screen Info The User may check the Tagging Screen Info to browse through a brief description of the active keys in the tagging screen. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press ? SoftKey to select Tagging Screen Info Press or SoftKeys to navigate to Previous/Next screens to display the following Information:
Location The sequence tracked as location may be adjusted in real time by using the first set of arrow keys. up/down Timing The time can be adjusted with the increment value in real time by using the last set of up/down The row increment may be applied to the absolute time using the second set of up/down arrow keys. arrow keys Settings The user can navigate to the configuration from the tagging screen. Should Autotag be allowed, this function may be switched off when a detonator has to be re-tagged Tools Users can test any detonator without leaving the tagging screen The tagged detonators list may be checked from the tagging screen Statistical data is accumulated as tagging is performed. Page 104 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.7. Test Single Detonator At times it is useful to allow testing of detonators from the tagging screen, and to check if a detonator has previously been tagged or if it is untagged, without disturbing the setup of the current tagging context. The information displayed with this test contains the location, the time the detonator was tagged to, the length of the detonator and also the mark allocated to the detonator. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. 3. From Advanced Tagging Screen Connect a detonator to the Tagger Press SoftKey to select Test Single Det From Test Single Det screen Press or to toggle between options indicates single test indicates continuous test Press or SoftKey to toggle between testing a single detonator as follows:
indicates testing on POGO Pins or Wire Connectors indicates testing on POGO Pins Only Page 105 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.8. Tagged Detonators From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators From Advanced Tagging Screen Press SoftKey to select Row Statistics Row Statistics screen will display:
Row Detonators (Total) Holes Start hole/det Wire Length (Metric or Imperial as set) 1. 2. 3. Page 106 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.9. Mark Detonators With the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System it is good practice to mark the detonator that will be placed at the end of the harness wire, as the Bench Commander will verify the voltage level of this detonator just before firing. Each String should have 1 detonator marked as End of Line. The other types of marking are not explicitly used in this version of the system although it is planned to use it in a future release of the software. They would typically indicate that specific points of the blast have been captured and also indicate if a change of plan (delays and increments) is required. 3. 4. From the Main Menu Press to select Mark Detonators From Mark Detonators Menu Press Press Press Press Press Press Cancel SoftKey to return to Main Menu Press Apply SoftKey to apply the setting. to select/deselect End of Line to select/deselect Start of Row to select/deselect End of Row to select/deselect Inflection Point to Remove Mark from previously marked Detonator Page 107 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.10. Review Tag Detonator Screen Parameters The user may review the parameters at any time in the tagging screen. 1. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press Tag Configuration SoftKey to select Tag Detonators Screen 2. Should the value be correct, press a) String From Tag Detonators Screen, check the following:
key to move to the next field. Check that the correct Row is being tagged; if not, adjust it as follows:
Use numeric keypad to enter new Row number, and Press to continue b) Initial Time Ability to modify the Initial time Use numeric keypad to set the initial time Press to continue c) Inter-hole Increment Ability to modify the Dealy time from one hole to the next. Use numeric keypad to set the inter-hole increment Press to continue d) Hole Conf(iguration) Ability to switch to a user defined hole configuration Use setup) Press to toggle (Available options as configured during the initial to continue e) Loading mode Set the Loading mode. Use Press to toggle between available options. to continue Page 108 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 10.5.11. Advanced Screen Manual Adjustments 1. The user may set:
Absolute time (at any time) Hole number but not counting direction Det number (if multiple primed and not loading per deck) Increment values and if increments are to be factored in for the next hole (Incrementing /Decrementing
/ Manual) 2. The Up/Down arrow keys may be used as follows:
Left UP/DOWN arrow functions:
Adjust hole number and time by adding/subtracting the defined inter-hole offset. When in Manual timing mode it will adjust hole number only, no time adjustments are made Middle UP/DOWN arrow functions:
Increments the detonator and applies the inter-row offset to initial time. Will also Decrement if selected. Right UP/DOWN arrow functions:
Used to increment/decrement the Time with inter-hole offset value. Side Arrow keys Only available when tagging group/row hole and det. This key will change the det number. or Adjust the row number with no effect on time values. Page 109 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11 TEST MENU The Test Menu will allow the user to perform the following tests:
1. Test All, 2. Test Channel 3. Test Single Det 4. Leakage Test, 5. Untagged Test 6. Search Dets 11.1. Test All From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the tagged detonators. . Although the tagger detonator list capacity is equal to a Full Blast Design which can be a maximum of 16000 detonators, the Tagger will only test one string at a time with large blast designs. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select Test Menu. 2. 3. 4. Test Menu Press Key to select Test All. Test All CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test After Testing press the Press the Key to return to the Test Menu SoftKey to View the design or, Press the Key to return to the Main Menu. Page 110 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.2. Test String From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the detonators connected to a String 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test String. 3. Test String Enter required String number Press to clear and re-enter required string number Press to continue CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test to View Design After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 111 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.3. Test Single Detonator From the test menu, the user will have the option to test a single detonators connected either to the POGO Pins Only or to the POGO Pins and Harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Single Det. Test Single Det Connect Detonator to CE4 Tagger Press Connect the required single detonator to be tested Press to toggle selection to test or Detonator will be tested Results will be displayed Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test Press SoftKey to untag the detonator DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 112 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.4. Leakage Test This function enables the user to perform a current measurement and a leakage measurement test. Leakage is measured in milli-amps (mA) and low leakage is considered to be below 0.5mA. Leakage higher than 1mA is considered high leakage and may result in blasting problems (potential misfires) and should therefore be addressed and resolved prior to arming. The user can set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered from 0.1mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA. A warning will be displayed when the leakage level exceeds the leakage warning trigger level as set by the user. HIGH LEAKAGE LEVELS CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES OF THE 4G DETONATORS . Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Leakage Test. LeakageTest CE4 Tagger will Test Leakage on all Channels Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating CE4 Tagger will display leakage test results Press to continue After Testing, press the Key to return to the Test Menu 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 113 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.5. Untagged Test This function enables the user to test for Untagged Detonators connected to the harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press 3. Untagged Test SoftKey to select Untagged Test OK message will be displayed when no untagged detonators are found. Error message will displayed when untagged detonators are found. 4. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Use a binary search to locate untagged detonator(s) Page 114 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 11.6. Search Detonators (Binary Search) This function enables the user to search for detonators connected to the harness wire. It can be conducted with any CE4 Tagger and no prior tagged list is necessary. This same function will be performed by the Bench Commander to discover detonators. The detonators found will be compared with the detonators in the tagged list and the tagged list will be amended with new detonators if any are found. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Search Dets Search Dets Enter required Channel number Press to continue CE4 Tagger will search for detonators and display Done when complete Press Press to return to the Test Menu to View Design 11.6.1. Search Function Results 4. Press the SoftKey to check the Search results The View Design Menu will be displayed Refer to Chaper 12 - VIEW in this manual for more information. Page 115 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12 VIEW PLAN The View Plan Menu will display the planned ViewShot List when the tag option is set to Tag by Plan. The Basic and Advanced options will allow the user to view the list of tagged detonators filtered by various important characteristics. 12.1. List Detonators 1. From Main Menu Press to select View Plan 2. View design screen will be displayed Highlighted detonators position in String Plan Search Filter Search Number Info Toggle Next soft keys Detonator position in String Plan will be displayed in the page header. A tick mark will be displayed under Stat when the plan contains tagged detonators Page 116 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.1.1. Search Filter Press the Search Filter Hole Number, SoftKey to toggle between options as detailed below:
Row number, String Number, Channel number. Press Search SoftKey and insert the Channel, String, Row or Hole number to be searched (Channel number shown in example) Press Enter to search Page 117 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.1.2. Info SoftKey Press the Information . SoftKey to display options as detailed below. Detonator Timing and Status Allocation to Commander and String Channel and String Press the Next page SoftKey and observe the follow set of SoftKeys displayed Filter Detonator list order Search soft key Cancel all filter settings and revert to default Page 118 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.1.3. Sort Detonator list Press Sort Detonator List SoftKey to display the detonator list in the order as required:
Unsorted Order Ascending Order Descending Order Reversed Order 1. Unsorted Order (Tag Path) 2. Ascending Order 3. Descending order 4. Reversed order (Tag Path) Page 119 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 SoftKey (criteria based on previous filter settings will be selected) UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. Press Search 6. Press the Cancel Search Criteria filters Filter reset message will be displayed SoftKey to cancel previous search SoftKey follow set of Press the Next page and observe the SoftKeys displayed. Tagged detonator list (Highlighted if available ViewShot plan Summaries Page 120 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.1.4. ViewShot Plan Summary (Heading) Press the Next page following set of SoftKeys. Press the String Summary SoftKey to page to the Back to ViewShot Plan String Summary Commander Summary ViewShot plan Summary SoftKey to display the string statistics as follows:
String number, Number of Detonators per string Number of Detonators tagged on that string. Press Softkey to return to ViewShot Plan Press the Commander Summary follows:
SoftKey to display the Commander statistics as Commander number, Channel number per Commander, Number of of detonatorss in plan per channel, Number of detonatorss tagged per channel. Press Softkey to return to ViewShot Plan Press the ViewShot plan summary SoftKey to display the summary Press Softkey to return to ViewShot Plan Page 121 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.2. List Missing detonators This screen lists the detonators that were not found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. View Design Menu Press to select List Missing Detonators 3. The List Missing Detonators screen will be displayed. List Missing Dets Soft keys will be available as displayed o Search Filter, o Search Number, o Viewshot Plan Summaries o Next Page Press Next Page o List order, o Information Toggle SoftKey to display Toggle Information to view o Wire m - Wire length information Search Filter Search no ViewShot Plan summaries List order Info Toggle Page 122 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 o String number, o Channel number, o Commander number o Det position in ViewShot Plan Info o Detonator ID o GPS information
(if available) of highlighted detonator Page 123 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.3. List New detonators This screen will list the new detonators found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. View Design Menu Press to select List New Detonators List New Dets The List New Detonators screen will be displayed Press SoftKey to un-mark the detonators as new (*). Page 124 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.4. List Bad Status This screen will list the detonators that were found to have an error status during the test. (A bad status indicates the detonator may have a bad fuse or another internal problem). This List does NOT include untagged detonators. Main Menu Press to select View Design View Design Menu Press SoftKey to select List Bad Status Detonators List Bad Status The List Bad Status screen will be displayed Use SoftKeys to sort/filter or display other information as required. 1. 2. 3. Page 125 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.5. Duplicate Location This screen will list the detonators that were found to be tagged with the same location. The system does not rely on the location data to communicate with the dets and provided that the detonator has been tagged with a delay, all detonators can be fired. However, a duplicate location means that either the user has assigned the same location when tagging, or another user with another CE4 Tagger has assigned this same location to a detonator. Note that this error is flagged when the user attempts to assign the same location on the same Tagger. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. View Design Menu Press The duplicated location will be displayed Key to select Duplicate Location List Duplicate Location The Duplicate Location screen will be displayed Original det found in detlist Duplicate det found added after first hence asterisk Page 126 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.6. Blast Summary The Blast Summary function enables the user to view a blast summary per channel. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. 4. 5. View Design Menu Press SoftKey to select Blast Summary to page back to previous The Blast Summary screen will be displayed Press the Back SoftKey screen Press the Info SoftKey . to toggle display a summary as indicated as follows:
New - New Detonators Mis - Missing Detonators EOL - End of Line Detonators Bad - Bad Detonators Page 127 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12.7. Tracking Detonators This option will allow the user to track detonators that have been tagged, the user will be directed to the location of the tagged detonator. The detonators can only be tracked using the same Tagger that it was tagged with and a GPS signal was available during the initial tagging, and is available to track the detonator. From Main Menu Press to select View Design From View Design Menu Press to select List Detonators Detonator list will be displayed Hold the tagger in upright position Highlight the Detonator to be tracked from the list. (Selected detonator will be displayed as highlighted in the top position of the screen). Press SoftKey 4 Scroll until the location Press the location to scroll to next page SoftKey is displayed. SoftKey to select 1. 2. 3. Page 128 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Start walking towards the bench Tagger will detect the direction and distance to the selected detonator. The distance and direction to the detonator will be displayed Proceed indicated. in the direction as When the Tagger is within 3 meters of the selected detonator, Near Location will be displayed The user will now have tracked the selected detonator to be within 3 meters of the current vicinity. Page 129 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13 COMMANDER 13.1. General Information The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is a 4-channel blasting device intended for use across all surface blasting platforms in the DetNet portfolio. These devices are controlled from a CE4 Tagger or an optional tablet device /
PC loaded with the DetNet Android Application. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander can be configured to operate in different modes as follows:
The Base Commander, Bench Commander, or Repeater. 13.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Components The following illustration depicts a front and rear view of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander indicating the major components. Figure 9: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Part Identification Page 130 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.2.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Body The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander housing body contains all the electronic components in a durable environment equipped with a carry handle. 13.2.2. Internal antenna RF long range:
RF short range:
3000m (900MHz data radio, internal antenna) 10m (Wi-Fi, internal antenna) The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander must be placed on a tripod or otherwise elevated during use; elevating it to approximately 1,5m above ground level ensures that the internal antenna will operate at optimum levels. Future versions of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will also include a connection to accommodate external antennae which should also be at least 1.5m above ground level. 13.2.3. Detonator Communication Channels (1 - 4) The four detonator communication channels on the front panel are clearly marked 1 4. Harness wire terminals on each channel are used to connect to detonator / surface harness lead-in wires. 13.2.4. E-paper display The e-paper display reflects light unlike conventional backlit flat panel displays that emit light. This makes it more comfortable to read, and provide a wider viewing angle than most light-emitting displays The display remains visible even if the device is off thus the last screen that was visible before shut-down will be displayed while in off mode until the commander is booted-up again.The e-paper display should never be exposed to direct sunlight for long periods. 13.2.5. NEXT (FUNCTION) button The NEXT (FUNCTION) button is used in conjunction with other keys to perform specific functions. 13.2.6. POWER button The POWER button is used to switch the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON and OFF. It is also used, in conjunction with the NEXT (FUNCTION) button, to enter the bootloading mode from where software updates can be performed. While the Commander is plugged in and charging the Power button can be used to toggle between low and high charge rates. This function is useful when charging from a less powerful charger. Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, waiting a few seconds and then pressing the Power button. Page 131 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.2.7. USB connector port The USB connector port allows charging of the rechargeable battery and is also used to upgrade software and downloading logs. Plug in a flash drive containing the new version and then hold in the NEXT button and press the power ON button. This will place the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander in bootloader-mode and start the download of the software. 13.2.8. BlastCard (NFC) Sensor A Near Field Communication (NFC) Sensor located inside the back of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander makes use of technology that enables the NFC BlastCard to establish communication with the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander by touching the devices together or bringing them into proximity to a distance of typically 5cm (2in) or less. Page 132 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.3. Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON and OFF 13.3.1. Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON 1. While the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is in an OFF state, it will display the following information:
DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID (4) Mode (BASE) Hardware version (HW Ver. 4) Software version (SW Ver. 36230C) Press the POWER ON Button. POWER Button A two-part splash screen will be displayed. The first part will request the user to WAIT during power-on. Battery Percentage will be displayed Power On Self-Test (P.O.S.T.) will be displayed 2. Shortly after the previous screen, the second-part splash screen will be displayed requesting user to press the NEXT button. Battery Percentage will be displayed Press the NEXT Button to continue. 3. 13.3.2. Power DigiShot Plus 4G Commander OFF NEXT Button 4. Press the POWER Button to power OFF the CE4 Commander. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will power off after a second or two. POWER Button Page 133 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.4. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Accessories 13.4.1. Battery The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer battery. Battery life is influenced by the conditions in which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander operates. When the battery capacity drops below 15%, a warning will be displayed. When the battery capacity drops below 3%, the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will shut down. The battery should only be replaced by a DetNet qualified technician and is not field replaceable. THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE 4G DETONATORS OR THE LEAD-IN HARNESS WIRE WHILST THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER IS CONNECTED TO A CHARGER . 13.4.2. Charging the CE4 Commander Connect charger to CE4 Commander. Connect charger to correct power supply. Detonators should never be connected while charging. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander should be charged for at least six hours prior to a blast. While the Commander is plugged in and charging, the Power button can be used to toggle between low (500mA) and high (2A) charge rates. The low option (500mA)is the default charging rate. Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, wait a few seconds and then press the Power button. 13.4.3. Storage Store the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander in a cool, dry place, with an ambient temperature of approximately 21 C. It is recommend that the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander be charged to 50% when placed into long-term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged to 50%, at least every six months to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander may be kept on charge for extended periods as the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will manage the battery. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander can draw current of up to 2 Amperes during charging. Page 134 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.5. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Process Description The following paragraphs contain a detailed description of User-interaction and safety features designed into the CE4 Commander. 13.5.1. Start-up Press the POWER button briefly to switch ON the device. 13.5.2. Shutdown Press-and-hold the POWER button for 2 seconds to switch the device OFF. In case of malfunction, press-and-hold the POWER button for 10 seconds to force the device OFF. While the Commander is plugged in and charging, the Power button can also be used to toggle between low and high (2A)
(500mA) Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, waiting a few seconds and then pressing the Power button. 13.5.3. Bootloading charge rates. Ensure that the device is switched OFF. Press-and-hold the NEXT button, then press the POWER button to switch ON. The device will now enter bootloading mode. To load new software, connect a flash drive containing the new software version into the CE4 Commander. Place the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander in boot loader-mode to start the download of the software. 13.5.4. Pairing After the start-up sequence the identification number (1-10) will be displayed. Remote control of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is now possible from a CE4 Tagger within range (or a tablet loaded with the required software). Press and hold the from the Main Menu on the CE4 Tagger to start the pairing function. Select the appropriate DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID (1-10). The CE4 Tagger will establish a communication link with one DigiShot Plus 4G Commander at a time. Commanders will clearly indicate their pairing status on the E-paper display. button and press All DigiShot Plus 4G Commander s have a default ID of 1. Users will have to change these IDs if intending to use multiple Commanders in a single setup. 13.5.5. Aborting Choosing the ABORT option will return all devices in the setup to a safe state. No further activities can be initiated remotely before cycling the power ON, on all said devices. Aborting is typically accomplished by pressing escape and confirming the abort action when in an active blasting screen. 13.5.6. Blasting Refer to the Blasting Overview contained in Chapter 18 of this document. Page 135 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.6. Connecting CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus Commander via WiFi ENSURE THAT THE BENCH IS CLEARED BEFORE THE DETONATORS OR CE4 TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO THE BENCH COMMANDER. Switch both the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander and the CE4 Tagger ON Press and hold Commander via WiFi key and then press the key to connect CE4 Tagger to DigiShot Plus 4G Observe the Commander ID Enter the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID Press key to connect to CE4 Commander CE4 Tagger will connect to Commander Enter device password when prompted Press key to continue Device password will be required only during first connection to the CE4 Commander. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Main Menu will be displayed 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 136 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.7. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Information This function enables the user to view the CE4 Commanders: battery charge information, current consumption, state-of-health of the battery, temperature information, hardware and software serial numbers, GPS detail and User ID. 1. Main Menu SoftKey to view System Info Press 2. 54%: Battery charge Information System Info - Battery Current Consumption: By convention a negative value indicates that current is being drawn from the battery. Cell Status: (Good) indicates the state of health of the battery. Should the status indicate Low the unit should be serviced to have the battery replaced. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will display a warning at 15% and switch OFF at 3%. Temperature and the Relative Humidity as measured inside the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander are displayed as follows:
Temp: The Temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit. Humidity: The Relative Humidity is displayed as a percentage. to select page right. System Info Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number Press Hardware Serial Number will be displayed. Software Release Number will be displayed Hardware Serial number is required when tickets are required from the DetNet Portal. Hardware Serial number is required when Web tickets are required from the DetNet Portal. Web tickets are not needed in normal use. 3. 4. Page 137 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 System Info GPS Detail to select page right. Press The GPS location will be displayed. The number of satellites found and Altitude and will also be displayed. 5. 6. User ID Press Use alphanumeric characters to enter a User ID. Press SoftKey to enter or edit User ID. to select next page. System Info Serial Number Serial numbers of the internal circuit boards will be displayed. Page 138 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.8. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander LCD Screen Icons The Icons as displayed on the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will differ according to the selected mode. Each of the following modes will display icons that are applicable to the selected mode:
Base Mode, Base with Repeater Mode Bench Mode, and Repeater Mode. Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. 13.8.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Base Commander Mode Icons When the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to a CE4 Tagger / Laptop / Tablet via WiFi, it will display only the WiFi symbol on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected via USB will be displayed rather than WiFi, the USB symbol When the Base Commander is connected via RF, it will display the in the main screen RF symbol Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. Page 139 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item
#
1 The Detail screen is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Figure 10: DigiShot Plus 4G Base Commander Mode Detail Screen Table 9: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Base Station Screen Icons Options / Variants /
Description As simultaneous WiFi and USB connections are allowed
(one of each), this section can indicate a combination of connections. Refer to 1.4 below for possible combinations. Description Detail Indication Icon Wi-Fi/USB connectivity indication area (CE4 Tagger or PC) 1.1 Connection type 1.2 of Type connected to device Connected something to Connected via WiFi Connected via USB Connected Tagger to CE4 Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected via WiFi or USB Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G is Commander connected to CE4 Tagger or PC Indicates the connection type and will also show the last connection active type when disconnected Indicates the type of device / driving unit that DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. Page 140 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Detail Indication Icon Connected to PC Options / Variants /
Description UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item
#
Description 1.3 ID CE4 Tagger to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to 1.4 Possible connection combinations Indicates the CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected. Tagger CE4 connections to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is always via WiFi. Whenever a non-zero value indicated, that value represents active WiFi an connection the relevant CE4 Tagger. USB WiFi and connections, and combinations thereof. to is 2 connectivity RF indication area is Indicates whether the RF module on this active Base Indicates whether Base Commander is connected to one or more Benches via RF Indicates the signal quality of the RF connection Tagger CE4 connected to ID 110 CE4 Tagger connected via WiFi ID 1 PC connected via USB PC connected via WiFi ID PC connected via AND CE4 USB Tagger 1 connected via WiFi Connected to Bench
(In this case depicted, connected to 1 Bench Refer to section 2.3 below) Page 141 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item
#
2.1 Description Detail Indication Icon Options / Variants /
Description RF active and waiting for Base connection RF active 2.2 RF signal quality Signal low Signal medium Signal high 2.3 3 4 5 Number of Bench Commanders connected Base Total detonator count this to Battery percentage indicator DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID the includes all Indicates total number of detonators that this Base can detect. the It detonators found on all Bench Commanders connected Base. Indicates the remaining battery life as a percentage this the to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID used to connect to over WiFi. Base directly connects to Benches RF-connected Bench Commander count 110 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID 110 Only Base Base set up to use Repeater Base + Repeater Page 142 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item
#
6 Description Detail Indication Icon DigiShot Plus 4G Commander system state the that state Indicates the current system the DigiShot Plus 4G is Commander in. Will also indicate some of the lagging Bench Commander where states, applicable. This means it will show the Bench state with lowest system state. This first section of states are states that will be indicated as a result of Base Commander system. 6.1 indicates states relevant the connected Bench Commanders. This description is terrible. The state shown on the base is simply the least advanced of all the benches that are involved in the blast. the to State = UNKNOWN State = IDLE
=
State BLASTCARD SCAN
= ENTER State BLASTCARD PIN State
= PRESS NEXT WITHIN 2sec Options / Variants /
Description Undefined DigiShot Plus 4G Commander state processes Idle state, DigiShot Plus 4G Commander waiting for to commence, start-up to finish Waiting for user to scan NFC BlastCard at the back (NFC area) of the CE4 Commander. Waiting for user to enter the scanned BlastCard's PIN on the connected CE4 Tagger / PC. to Waiting the depress Commander's NEXT button for at least 2 sec. for user Page 143 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item
#
6.1 7 Description Detail Indication Icon Options / Variants /
Description Lagging Bench state
= Grace Lagging Bench state
= Charging Bench-state-on-base icon Indicating last
(lagging) connected Bench Commander state
"Ready and Indicates the system state of the lagging Bench Commander. If all other connected Benches are in e.g. state to Charge"
the lagging Bench is still in state
"Awaiting Grace", that state will be indicated along with the icon identifying Bench state. See previous comments re clarity of description. then Error notification area DigiShot Plus 4G will Commander indicate any error condition it has by printing the exclamation triangle. errors Holds the reported connected Bench Commanders as well. for on Page 144 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Description Detail Indication Icon that signal display images If Base is in ? state after Function button was pressed to ARM the WiFi/USB and connection is severed/lost/discon-
nected, then drop to this that indicates the Bench with the first occurring shutdown time. If we already have mentioned the wifi takes precedence over the other then repeating stuff about wifi elsewhere is just overly verbose. If Base is ready to blast and WiFi/USB connection is severed/lost/discon-
nected, then drop to this that indicates the Base is in READY_TO_BLAST state. See comment above. When blasted, to request user to turn off power, when WiFi/USB connection lost Ditto when in ABORTED state, to also turn off power, when WiFi/USB connection lost display Options / Variants /
Description Item
#
DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 145 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.8.2. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Icons When the CE4 Commander, in Bench Mode, is connected to a CE4 Tagger
/ Laptop / Tablet via WiFi, it will display only the WiFi symbol on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the Bench Commander is connected via USB rather than WiFi, the will be displayed USB symbol When the Bench Commander is connected via RF, it will display the RF in the main screen symbol When the Bench Commander NOT is connected via RF, it will display the following main screen Swipe SmartKey for AutoArm Bench Commander will perform programming and then go to the waiting for next key press state. Programming screen Waiting for next button press screen Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. The Detail screen is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Page 146 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fix image below. And earlier image Figure 11: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Screen Table 10: DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Bench Mode Screen Icons Indication Detcount Icon Options / Variants /
Description Det count; Min = 000, Max=400 Item# Description Detail 1 Detonator count of each of the Bench Commander's channels decremented Indicates the total det countofdetsfoundper channel. Will be reset everytimeanewscanis demanded. It is of an upwardscounting nature,incrementingas dets are detected, but not
/
if dets are decreased These missing. descriptions are just terrible, The number shown total number of dets known to the commander for this channel. Not all of thedetsarenecessarily good. the is Page 147 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description Detail Indication Icon 2 WiFi/USBconnectivity indication area
(CE4 TaggerorPC) Connected something to Plus whether Indicates 4G DigiShot Commander is connected via WiFi or USB Indicates DigiShot Commander connected TaggerorPC whether 4G is CE4 Plus to 2.1 Connectiontype ConnectedviaWiFi Indicatestheconnection typeandwillalsoshow the active connection type when disconnected last 2.2 Type of connectedto device Indicates the type of device/drivingunitthe DigiShot 4G Commander is connectedto. Plus ConnectedviaUSB Connected Tagger to CE4 ConnectedtoPC connections Options / Variants /
Description AssimultaneousWiFiand USB are allowed (one of each), thissectioncanindicatea combination of connections.Asthisisall the space available to us for the connections,connections willbeprintedoverone another.Seepoint2.4for possiblecombinations. screen 2.3 CE4TaggerIDtowhich the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connectedto 2.4 connection Possible combinations IndicatestheCE4Tagger IDtowhichtheDigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. CE4Taggerconnections to DigiShot Plus 4G is always Commander via WiFi. Whenever a nonzero value is indicated here, thatvaluerepresentsan active WiFi connection to relevant CE4 the Tagger. WiFi connections, combinationsthereof. USB and and Tagger CE4 connectedto ID 110 Tagger CE4 connectedviaWiFi ID 1 Page 148 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description 3 connectivity RF indicationarea 3.1 RF active and waiting forBaseconnection 3.2 RFsignalquality 3.3 4 5 IDoftheRFconnected BaseCommander DigiShot Plus CommanderID 4G Plus 4G system DigiShot Commander state Detail Indication Icon Options / Variants /
Description PCconnectedviaUSB PCconnectedviaWiFi PC connected via USB AND CE4 connectedviaWiFi ConnectedtoBase Tagger ID 1 Indicates whether the RFmoduleonthisBench active is whether Indicates Bench Commander is connectedtoBaseviaRF signal Indicates quality of RF connection the the RFactive Signallow Signalmedium Signalhigh Plus DigiShot 4G Commander ID used to connecttooverWiFi. the current Indicates the state system DigiShot Plus 4G Commanderisin BaseCommanderID 110 DigiShot Plus CommanderID 4G 110 State=UNKNOWN State=IDLE Undefined DigiShot Plus 4GCommanderstate Idle state, DigiShot Plus 4G Commander waiting for to commence, startup to finish processes Page 149 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description Detail Indication Icon State=ABORTED State=SEARCHING State=TESTING State PROGRAMMING
=
State=PROGRAMMED State
=
BLASTCARD SCAN
=
State BLASTCARDPIN ENTER State = PRESS NEXT WITHIN2sec State = AWAITING GRACETIMEOUT state. User blast abort Options / Variants /
Description Aborted issued command. STATE IS LATCHED and requiresDigiShotPlus4G CommanderPowerCycle. Communication channels andtestingfunctionsstill active, blasting cannot be performed anymore. Searching detonators new but for Testingdetonatorsfound during previous search. Testing detonators as a userrequest. Programmingdetonators Detonator programming finished of the Waiting for user to scan NFC BLAST / ACTIVATE card at the back (NFC area) CE4 Commander. Waitingforusertoenter scanned BlastCard's PIN on the connected CE4 Tagger/PC. Not applicable to BlastCard withnoPIN Waiting to depresstheNEXTbutton foratleast2sec. for user Plus DigiShot 4G Commander waiting for GRACEtimertoexpire Page 150 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description 6 Errornotificationarea 7 8 percentage Battery indicator Blast shutdown timer indicator Detail Indication Icon State = READY TO CHARGE State=CHARGING State=LASTDETTEST State = READY TO BLAST State=BLASTED Plus 4G DigiShot will Commander error any indicate condition it has by printingtheexclamation triangle Indicates the remaining battery a percentage life as Timerinactive AssoonasDigiShotPlus 4G Commander has been past state "PRESS NEXT"
the shutdown timer started. is Assoonastimerexpires, DigiShot 4G Commander will be turned off. Timerindicatedinterms ofhoursandminutes Plus Plus Options / Variants /
Description DigiShot 4G Commander waiting for theCHARGINGcommand tobereceived DigiShot 4G Commanderblastvoltage charging Plus transmit Plus ready Testing the detonators specified as endofline /
endofrow in the blast layout 4G DigiShot Commander to receive blast instruction and blast commandtodetonators. Blast Blasted command sent. STATE IS LATCHED and requiresDigiShotPlus4G CommanderPowerCycle. Communication channels stillactive. state. timer shutdown Blast inactive. 4G DigiShot Plus be Commander will if Auto turned Shutdown timer
(inactivitytimer)expires. off Page 151 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description Detail Indication Icon Timeractive this down terrible indicates grace If Bench is in GRACE after Function button waspressedtoARMand the WiFi/USB connection is severed /
lost/disconnected,this the display time Bench counting See earliercommentsabout thewifi/usbverbiage.As a further example of how is, nothing has properly explainedwhatgraceis. The same thing applies toallthestuffbelow. IfBenchisinstateafter GRACEistimedoutand the WiFi/USB connection is severed /
lost
/ disconnected, thendroptothisdisplay thatindicatestheBench a potentially is dangerous state, awaitingARMcommand either from CE4 Tagger orfromBase in timer shutdown Options / Variants /
Description Blast active. Auto Shutdown timer deactivated as soon as Blast shutdown timer is started, and DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will turn off after Blast shutdowntimerexpires inthisinstanceafter2hrs 51minutes. Its totally inappropriate to put this information here.ThisistheMAIN SCREEN AND THE MAIN SCREENS NEED TO BE DEALT WITH FIRST AND SEPARATELY FROM THE DETAIL SCREEN. Same issue applies below cover the main screens first. big, beautiful and tons less confusingthanthedetail screens which can be coveredlater. Theyre Thetopfigureindicatesa local blast, where RF is not used or for remote, not when RF connected. Bottom figureindicatesRFsignal is Page 152 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item# Description Detail Indication Icon IfBaseisreadytoblast and WiFi/USB connection is severed /
lost
/ disconnected, thendroptothisdisplay thatindicatestheBaseis in READY_TO_BLAST state blasted, When to requestusertoturnoff power, when WiFi/USB connectionlost wheninABORTEDstate, to also turn off power, when WiFi/USB connectionlost Options / Variants /
Description Thetopfigureindicatesa local blast, where RF is not used or for remote, not when RF connected. Bottom figureindicatesRFsignal is Page 153 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.8.3. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Repeater Mode Icons on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the Repeater is connected via Wi-Fi, it will display only the Wi-Fi symbol When the Repeater is connected via USB rather than Wi-Fi, the USB symbol will be displayed When the Bench Commander is connected via RF, it will display the RF in the main screen symbol Repeater will display the following main screen Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. The Detail screen is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Figure 12: Repeater Detail Screen Page 154 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Options/Variants
/Description AssimultaneousWi FiandUSB connectionsare allowed(oneof each),thissection canindicatea combinationof connections.Asthis isallthescreenspace availabletousforthe connections, connectionswillbe printedoverone another.Seepoint 1.4forpossible combinations. UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item#
Description Detail Indication Icon Table 11: Repeater Screen Icons 1 WiFi/USB connectivityindication area(CE4TaggerorPC) Connectedto something Indicateswhether DigiShotPlus4G Commanderis connectedviaWiFior USB Indicateswhether DigiShotPlus4G Commanderis connectedtoCE4 TaggerorPC 1.1 Connectiontype ConnectedviaWiFi Indicatesthe connectiontypeand willalsoshowthelast activeconnectiontype whendisconnected 1.2 Typeofdevice connectedto 1.3 CE4TaggerIDtowhich theDigiShotPlus4G Commanderis connectedto ConnectedviaUSB ConnectedtoCE4 Tagger ConnectedtoPC CE4TaggerID connectedto Indicatesthetypeof device/drivingunit theDigiShotPlus4G Commanderis connectedto. IndicatestheCE4 TaggerIDtowhichthe DigiShotPlus4G Commanderis connectedto. CE4Tagger connectionsto DigiShotPlus4G Commanderisalways viaWiFi. Wheneveranonzero valueisindicatedhere, thatvaluerepresents anactiveWiFi connectiontothe relevantCE4Tagger. 110 Page 155 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Options/Variants
/Description UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item#
Description Detail Indication Icon 1.4 Possibleconnection combinations WiFiandUSB connections,and combinationsthereof. CE4TaggerID1 connectedviaWiFi 2 RFconnectivity indicationarea PCconnectedviaUSB PCconnectedviaWiFi PCconnectedviaUSB AND CE4TaggerID1 connectedviaWiFi ConnectedtoBench
(Inthiscaseconnected to1Benchsection 2.3) Indicateswhetherthe RFmoduleonthis Repeaterisactive. OnRepeatertheRF moduleispermanently engaged. IndicateswhetherBase Commanderis connectedtooneor moreBenchesviaRF Indicatesthesignal qualityoftheRF connectionasreported bytheBase. 2.1 RFactive RFactive 2.2 RFsignalquality Signallow Signalmedium Signalhigh Noconnectionto Benches Blankspace Page 156 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Item#
Description Detail Indication Icon 2.3 IDoftheRFconnected BaseCommander BaseCommanderID 3 4 DigiShotPlus4G CommanderID DigiShotPlus4G CommanderIDusedto connecttooverWiFi. DigiShotPlus4G CommanderID Batterypercentage indicator Indicatesthe remainingbatterylife asapercentage 110 110 Options/Variants
/Description Repeaterindicates theBaseCommander IDthatisinchargeof theremotesetup. Page 157 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.9. NEW DESIGN It is a good practice to clear the list when starting a new blasting process as the Commander retains original detonator details from the previous blast. From the Main Menu, select new design and confirm that list needs to be cleared. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select New Design. 2. Clear Memory Menu SoftKey to Clear Memory. Press Det List Cleared will be displayed briefly Page 158 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.10. TEST MENU The Test Menu will allow the user to perform the following tests:
1. Test All, 2. Leakage Test, 3. Untagged Test. 13.10.1. Test All From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the detonators known to the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander to check if they are still connected to the Harness wire 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. 4. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test All. Test All DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will test all known detonators Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press to View Design SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test Failures are detonators that are known to the Commander but have not responded to the test command. These detonators might not be connected to the harness for example. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 159 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.10.2. Leakage Test This function enables the user to perform a current measurement and a leakage measurement test. Leakage is measured in milli-amps (mA) and low leakage is considered to be below 0.5mA. Leakage higher than 1mA is considered high leakage and may result in blasting problems (potential misfires) and should therefore be addressed and resolved prior to arming. The user can set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered from 0.1mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA. A warning will be displayed when the leakage level exceeds the leakage warning trigger level as set by the user. HIGH LEAKAGE LEVELS CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES OF THE 4G DETONATORS. SoftKey to select Test Menu. SoftKey to select Leakage Test. 1. Main Menu Press 2. Test Menu Press 3. Leakage Test DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will Test Leakage on all Channels Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 4. CE4 Tagger will display leakage test results 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Refer to basic causes of leakage as detailed in the CE4 Tagger section Page 160 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.10.3. Untagged Test This function enables the user to test for Untagged Detonators connected to the harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press 3. Untagged Test SoftKey to select Untagged Test. The Channel and Result will be displayed OK message will be displayed when no untagged detonators are found. Error message will displayed when untagged detonators are found. 4. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Use a binary search to locate untagged detonator(s). Refer to Appendix A for details to perform binary search. Page 161 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.11. VIEW DESIGN The View Design Menu will allow the user to view detonator lists sorted or filtered as desired. The following menu options are available:
1. List Detonators, 2. List Missing Detonators, 3. List New Detonators, 4. List Bad Status Detonators, 5. Channel Summary. 13.11.1. List Detonators The Lists do NOT include untagged detonators. Key to select View Design. 1. Main Menu Press 2. View Design Press Key to select List Detonators. 3. Detonator list will be displayed Press >> SoftKey to cycle between various views as required Press SoftKey to filter Press SoftKey to search Sequence o Enter Sequence number o Press ENTER to filter the list and place the required detonator at the top of the list Page 162 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Press SoftKey to view Plan Summary Press SoftKey to select:
o Sort By Channel o Sort by Location o Sort by Time view. o Sort in Tag order. Press CHX SoftKey to display the required Channel Press WireX SoftKey to display the Wire Length DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 163 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 to view the selected detonators details. The following icons may be keys to navigate up or down, and In the List Detonator screens, make use of the press displayed under the Status column:
* indicates a New Det indicates a Last Det
? indicates a Missing Det X Bad Status det D Duplicate dets Start row marker End row marker Inflection point 4. Press the Key to return to the View Design Menu Page 164 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.11.2. List Missing Detonators This screen will list the detonators that were not found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select List Missing Detonators. 3. The List Missing Detonators screen will be displayed Press the applicable SoftKey as required. 4. List Missing Dets Press the Key to return to the View Design Menu Page 165 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.11.3. List New Detonators New detonators are detonators that were not found when the Commander completed the original search but were found when it repeated the search later (i.e. the detonators are new). Once programming is done, the detonators are considered to be accepted as part of the design and will not be shown as new anymore. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select List New Detonators. 3. List New Detonators New detonator(s) found will be displayed Page 166 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.11.4. List Bad Status Detonators This screen lists the detonators that were found to be bad during the test. (A bad status indicates the detonator may have a bad fuse or other internal problem). This List does NOT include untagged detonators. This screen lists the detonators that were found to be bad during the test all test. (A bad status indicates the detonator may have a bad fuse or other internal problem). 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select List Bad Status Detonators. 3. List Bad Status The List Bad Status screen will be displayed Use SoftKeys to navigate pages and sort/filter the view as required. Page 167 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Channel Summary 13.11.5. The Channel Summary menu allows the user to view summaries of the number of detonators on each Channel. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select Channel Summary. 3. Channel Summary screen Press the following SoftKeys to toggle display as follows:
o EOL = End of Line o Bad = Bad Detonators o New = New Detonators o Mis = Bad Detonators Page 168 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.12. Prepare for Blast This function prepares for either a Local Blast or a Remote Blast 13.12.1. Local Blast 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. 2. Warning for last det not set User is enforced to select last dets on all channels. A warning will appear where the user may:
Press to automatically select last det, which is the last det on the list for each channel Press to have the list of detonators displayed and select the last dets manually Press to return to main menu If the user selects the last det automatically, a warning will appear to ensure that all dets are connected before proceeding to programming. Prepare for Blast Press Key to select Program Detonators. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press Press button to return to Prepare for Blast Menu to continue. 3. 4. Page 169 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Check Blast Design Pres from main Menu to view Design to view Prepare for Blast Press button to select Arm. Arm Press button to select Local Blast ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER AT POWER ON. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTING
(RED) BLASTCARD AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE RED BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. Local Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan the Red BlastCard at the back of the CE4 Commander Enter the associated PIN Press to continue. BLAST CARD NFC SENSOR The screen will alternate between displaying awaiting high voltage and prompting the User to press next. The time displayed indicates the time remaining to press next before it disarms. 5. 6. 7. 8. Page 170 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Local Blast Press and hold the NEXT button on the front of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander for 2 seconds NEXT Local Blast The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will initiate a 30-
second high-voltage charging period followed by a 90-
second blast window. Should there be detonators marked as last det, the last det test will be performed between the charge and blast window Local Blast Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger simultaneously to fire Local Blast Blast Command sent Switch Off Commander and Tagger 9. 10. 11. 12. Page 171 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 13.12.2. Remote Blast The following Remote Blast description details the manual process to arm the system. The user is also provided with an option to Arm the Commander without the need to connect the Tagger via an AutoArm function. The AutoArm function will allow the user to scan a no-PIN yellow BlastCard and if there are no errors present; program and move to the waiting for next press state. The user will then have to press next for 2 seconds and the unit will then be ready to arm. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. 2. Prepare for Blast Press SoftKey to select Program Detonators. 3. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press or button to return to Prepare for Blast Menu. 4. Prepare for Blast Press button to select Arm. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 172 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. Arm Press button to select Remote Blast ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER AT POWER ON. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTING (RED) BLASTCARD AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE RED BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE CE4 COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. 6. Remote Blast Press SoftKey to initialise RF communication 7. Remote Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan the Yellow BlastCard at the back of the CE4 Commander BLAST CARD NFC SENSOR Yellow NFC card must be from the same group as Red NFC card for RF communication to take place. 8. Remote Blast Press and hold the NEXT button on the front of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander for 2 seconds The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will initiate a Grace period NEXT Page 173 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Disconnect the CE4 Tagger from the Bench Commander. CE4 Tagger will automatically disconnect from the Bench Commander during charging. 9. Remote Blast The Bench Commander will await a command from the Base Commander Connect the CE4 Tagger via WiFi to the Base Commander. Select the applicable Bench Commander by pressing corresponding number on the keypad. Select Bench 10 by pressing 0 on the keypad. (Bench 1 is selected as indicated by the tick mark in example shown). Applicable Bench Commander will be Indicated by Press to continue 10. To remove a Commander from the blast:
Press Highlight Commander button to be removed Press Then press remove Soft button to 11. To add a removed Commander Press + Button Page 174 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 12. Remote Blast Wait if message Not ready yet is displayed User will be prompted to Scan Key once all the bench commanders are out of grace period and ready to blast. The user is also provided with an option to Arm the commander without the need to connect the tagger via an AutoArm function. The AutoArm function will allow the user to scan a 0 PIN yellow BlastCard and if there are no errors present; program and move to the waiting for next press state. The user will then have to press next for 2 seconds and the unit will then be ready to arm. 13. Scan Key Scan the RED BlastCard at the back of the CE4 Commander Enter the corresponding PIN Press to continue Press and Hold the NEXT button on the front of the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander for 2 seconds?
NEXT The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will initiate arming and a 30-second high-voltage charging period followed by Testing Line and the 90-second blast window 14. To end the blast process or abort the blast From the Base Commander press the button If you select No it will continue with blast process Page 175 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 If you select Yes the Base will return to Scan Key If ABORT is selected, the Base will abort the Benches connected to it The Bench Commander will display Aborted and Request to be reset Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger simultaneously to fire BLASTING WILL TAKE PLACE Blast Command sent message will be displayed Page 176 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 14 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS The configuration menu presents a variety of informational screens and configurable options for the following:
1. Device Setup 2. Long Range RF 3. Advanced Setup 4. Factory Setup. 14.1. Device Setup The Device Setup menu will allow the user to adjust device specific settings. The following options are available:
1. Time Zone 2. Language 3. Time Outs 4. Units 14.1.1. Time Zone This function enables the user to define the time zone. Date/time settings are controlled by GPS GMT time data but since the time zone cannot be configured automatically, it should always be set by the user in order to ensure the correct local time display. The time zones may be adjusted in 0.5 hour increments. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup 3. Press Device Setup to select Time Zone Page 177 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 4. Set Time Zone to navigate the TIME ZONE options. SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Use the arrow key Press Press 14.1.2. Language This function enables the user to select a language preference for the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander menus. This version of software does not have complete translations of all languages other than English. The addtional languages will be included in a later software release. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup to select Language 3. Press 1. Press Press Press A confirmation screen will be displayed when the language is changed. Press on the keypad to select English. on the keypad to select Espaol (Spanish). on the keypad to select Franais (French). SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Language Page 178 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 14.1.3. Timeouts This function enables the user to set a time-period of inactivity before the Commander will automatically power off to conserve battery power. The user can set the idle time between 2 and 120 minutes. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup 3. Press 4. Device Setup to select Timeouts Auto Shutdown navigational keys to navigate selection. Use Minimum of 2 minutes. Maximum of 120 minutes. SoftKey to save. Press Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu Page 179 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 14.1.4. Units This function enables the user to select either the Imperial or Metric Units of Measure as preferred. 5. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 6. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup to select Unit 7. Press 1. Units Use Press Press navigational keys to toggle selection. to select either Imperial or Metric. SoftKey to save. Page 180 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 14.2. Long Range RF This function enables the user to manually select the region where the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will be deployed, set the region specific RF Channel and set the Encryption Key. Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel and encryption key settings are the same on Base and Bench commanders. This will be automated when the RF settings from card is enabled, and the onus will thus not be on the user to ensure matching settings, unless it needs to be altered. When the option to obtain RF settings from card is enabled, simply swipe a yellow blast card in idle state and the system will obtain the RF settings 14.2.1. Set RF Channel 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF 3. RF Setup Menu Press Press to toggle SET RF CHANNEL to toggle Set Encryption Key Press to select Set RF Channel Use Press navigational keys to navigate selection. to select Region and open RF Channel selection. Page 181 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Use numerical keypad to enter Unique RF Channel within the range as follows:
Between 16 and 47 for Americas Between 48 and 55 for Australia. Press Press to continue SoftKey to return to Main Menu Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel and encryption key settings are the same on Base and Bench commanders. The channel range will also change to reflect the available allocated RF channels for each specific region 14.2.2. Set Encryption Key 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF 3. RF Setup Press to select Set Encryption Key 4. Set Encryption Key Key will be displayed Press Use numerical keypad to enter desired 6 digit to edit encryption key Press to continue DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 182 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Press SoftKey to save the change Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel and encryption key settings are the same on Base and Bench commanders. We should emphasize in this section and the previous that this is now automated, so the onus is not on the user to ensure matching settings, unless they need to alter them. Page 183 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15 ADVANCED SETUP The Advanced Setup menu presents configurable options for the following:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Device ID Base Station Mode Bench Box Mode Repeater Mode Device Password. Last Det 15.1. Device ID 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press to select Device ID 4. Device ID Use numerical keypad to enter desired Device ID Press Press Press Power cycle the Commander for the change to take to continue SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu effect. All devices must have unique IDs. Devices with IDs greater than 6 will be displayed as remote blasting with device ID 6. i.e. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander 8 will be 8 6 = 2 for a remote blast. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 184 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.2. Base Station Mode The Base Station Mode menu allows the User to configure the Commander to be utilised in either Base Station or Base Station + Repeater Mode. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode 4. Base Station Mode Press Base Station Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off to select Base Station Mode automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect. Page 185 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.3. Base + Repeat Mode The Base and Repeat mode will allow the Base Commander to communicate through a repeater. The User should use this mode of operation when a repeater is used in the blast. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. 4. Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode Base Station Mode Press Base + Repeat Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off to select Base + Repeat Mode automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 186 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.4. Bench Box Mode The Bench Box Mode menu allows the User to configure the 4G DigiShot Plus 4G Commander to be utilised as a Bench Box. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press Bench Box Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off to select Bench Box Mode automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect Page 187 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.5. Repeater Mode The Repeater Mode menu allows the User to configure the 4G DigiShot Plus 4G Commander to be utilised as a Repeater. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup to select Repeater Mode Press Repeater Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect Page 188 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.6. Device Password This function enables the user to change the device password by assigning a new unique password that is known only to the user. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press to select Device Password Passwords 4. Use the numerical keypad to enter Current Password. Press to confirm. Unlike conventional password entry, the chosen password is visible to the user (rather than ****) to enable the user to see if any typing errors are being made. Leaving the new password blank disables the password request when the Commander is switched on. Use the numerical keypad to enter New Password. Press Information message confirming password changed will be displayed briefly. to confirm. Advanced Menu will be displayed. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 189 of 214 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 15.7. Last Det This function enables the user to enable or disable the last det test. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. 4. Advanced Setup Press to select Last Det Last Det Press key to toggle between Last Det Enabled, Last Det Disabled and select Last Det Preferred Last det preferred indicates that the last det test will be used in preference to the normal current measurement checks in blasting Press to select and save the setting Page 190 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 16 FACTORY SETUP The Factory Setup is password protected and may only be accessed by designated maintenance teams. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Factory Setup 3. 4. Factory Password The factory setup menu will prompt for a password, after which the factory options will be displayed. Use numerical keypad to enter Unique CE4 Tagger Password. Press to continue. Factory Setup Factory Setup will be displayed. Each option is further protected by its own web-based ticket system. If no active ticket is available for the chosen option (as stored on the CE4 Tagger), the user is prompted for a ticket issued by portal.detnet.com. The ticket is comprised of two 10-digit numbers that need to be entered before continuing. If the ticket is valid, access will be granted to the given function. Tickets can be issued for a selected number of repeated uses before a given expiry date. Tickets issued are specific to a given CE4 Tagger or Commander as determined by the hardware serial number, thus allowing flexible control over protected features. Page 191 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 5. Web Ticket Press required Menu option. Obtain Ticket to continue Page 192 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 16.1. Factory Setup Menu Options Each Factory menu option is described below. Many of the screens are common to several CE4 products and are shared between them. Only Storage Mode will be accessible without a Web Ticket. All other Menu items will need a Web Ticket to be accessed. Clear Logs (Factory) Leakage Calibration (Factory) 1. The clear logs function erases the internal log and will displays a confirmation dialog briefly. 2. The Leakage Calibration menu recalculates the leakage and current offsets by measuring the current and leakage with no detonators connected. It functions in the same fashion as the leakage test screen except that it initially shows a leakage calibrate dialog briefly and then proceeds to the leakage screen. 3. The self-test function starts a factory self-test of the device. 4. The IO Setup function is used to setup experimental IO parameters. 5. This menu option will contain any experimental functions that are required in engineering only. 6. Start Self-Test (Factory) Experimental Menu IO Setup (Factory) Key to select Storage Mode Storage Mode Press When the battery capacity is more than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will discharge the battery by activating additional battery draining functions such as the heating pad, to accelerate the discharge level to the required 50% charge level, and When the battery capacity is less than 50%, it will prompt the user to connect a charger to attain the required 50% charge level. When the CE4 Tagger reaches the required 50% battery storage capacity it will switch off automatically allowing for safe storage Reset Service Date This function will allow the user to reset the service schedule. Migrate NFC Key The Migrate NFC Key function is used to migrate an outdated key to the new structures. 7. 8. Page 193 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 17 ANDROID TABLET GENERAL DESCRIPTION Android Tablet will be incorporated at a later stage of development Page 194 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 18 COMMANDER SYSTEM ON-BENCH DEPLOYMENT OVERVIEW Configure all equipment Prepare for tagging Tag detonators Test detonators View Design LOCAL MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR STATUTORY REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES, OR CODES OF PRACTISE REGARDING SAFETY TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY OF THE TIPS AND HINTS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR LOCAL REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES OR CODES OF PRACTISE MUST BE FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES. 18.1. Blasting Overview The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander can be used for Local Blasting, Remote Blasting and Synchronized blasting. The description below provides a high-level overview of the steps required to operate the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander during each of the blasting processes. 18.1.1. Local blasting Figure 13: Local Blasting a. Connect detonator lead-in wires to the detonator channel(s) on the front panel of the CE4 Commander. Channels are clearly marked 1 4. b. Switch ON both the CE4 Tagger and CE4 Commander. c. Establish a Wi-Fi link between the CE4 Tagger and appropriate CE4 Commander. Both devices will d. confirm connected status on the respective displays. Initiate the necessary tests using the CE4 Tagger as a remote control. All associated results will be displayed in detail on the CE4 Tagger screen while a summarized result will be displayed on the CE4 Commander. Initiate the program functions to ensure all detonators are timed appropriately. e. f. Select ARM and scan the RED BlastCard to the designated NFC Sensor area on the back of the CE4 Commander. Page 195 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 g. ARM/Activate the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander from the CE4 Tagger. h. Enter the associated PIN on the CE4 Tagger. Press and hold the next button for 2 seconds i. j. The DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will initiate a 30-second high-voltage charging period followed by a 90-second blast window. k. Press both FIRE-keys (soft buttons) on the CE4 Tagger to fire. 18.1.2. Remote blasting 3000m 10m Max 300 Detonators per Channel Tagger Base Commander Bench Commander Figure 14: Remote Blasting a. Repeat steps a f as specified for local blasting. Connect detonator lead-in wires to any / each available detonator channel on the front panel. Channels are clearly marked 1 4. Switch both CE4 Tagger and DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ON. Establish a Wi-Fi link between the CE4 Tagger and appropriate Bench Commander. Both devices will confirm connected status on the respective displays. Initiate the necessary tests using the CE4 Tagger as an interface. All associated results will be displayed in detail on the CE4 Tagger screen while a summarized result will be displayed on the Bench Commander. Initiate the program functions to ensure all detonators are timed appropriately. ARM/Activate the Bench Commander from the CE4 Tagger. b. Scan the Yellow BlastCard to the designated NFC Sensor area on the Bench Commander to arm the Bench Commander. c. Press next for 2 seconds d. The Bench Commander will initiate the grace period as specified in the BlastCard. Evacuate the bench. e. Set up a Base Commander at a safe location within RF range from the Bench Commander. f. Establish a Wi-Fi link between CE4 Tagger and Base Commander. Both devices will confirm connected status on displays. Page 196 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 g. Confirm which Bench Commanders to proceed with. h. Apply the RED BlastCard to the designated area on the Base Commander. i. j. Enter the associated PIN on the CE4 Tagger and press next. The Base Commander will instruct the selected Bench Commander(s) to apply high voltage for 30 seconds before allowing a 90-second firing window. In Synchronise mode the firing window will be 60 seconds). k. Press both FIRE-keys (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger to fire. 18.1.3. Synchronized blasting (Multiple Commanders) Tagger 10m 3000m Base Commander 3000m Bench Commanders (x10) Figure 15: Synchronized Blasting via Multiple Commanders a. Repeat steps a d as specified for remote blasting. b. When configuring the base and selecting the bench commanders to be blasted, select the sync option c. A sync-management period will automatically be applied at step l to ensure 1ms synchronization between Commanders. ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE CE4 COMMANDER. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTCARD (RED) AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. Page 197 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 19 DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Low Battery Charge fault Design Changed When Envelope is displayed, Press # to display Error Screen Ensure that the Commander is fully charged before it is deploying in a blast. Should this error trigger, charge the Commander before using or alternatively use another Commander that has been sufficiently charged. The Charge Fault will be displayed to indicate that the Commander is not charging from the connected charger. Ensure that the charging cable is connected securely to the Commander. Also ensure that the charger has sufficient output power to charge the Commander. A charger capable of supplying 2A or greater is preferred. This error will occur when the Commander detects that the design has changed. This indicates that, either a new detonator has been found, or a detonator has gone missing. When this error occurs, the user is encouraged to examine the list to ensure that the total detonator count is correct. Once the list has been examined and the detonator count has been confirmed to be correct, the user must reprogram the Commander. Should there be a missing detonator, it must be found and corrected or Page 198 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Detonator(s) Missing High Leakage Last detonator not set Last detonator error This warning is triggered when the Commander detects that a previously connected detonator is no longer present on the line. When this error occurs the user is encouraged to examine the list to determine which detonator is missing. The user will then need to return to the bench to identify and correct the fault. Leakage is tested during various stages, including testing and programming. Should a high leakage warning be triggered, the user will need to find the source of the leakage this is performed most effectively by using a Tagger. The user is encouraged to disconnect the string from the Commander and divide the string into two equal halves, and test each half with a Tagger. The leakage should be present on only one half and this process can be repeated until the source of the leakage is discovered. Some of the reasons for leakage include: damage to the down-line wire of a detonator unit, moisture in the connector of a detonator unit and also damage to the surface harness wire insulation. It is recommended that the user resolve all leakage sources to have a leakage of 0 mA, however, should it not be possible to eradicate all leakage sources, the system may be able to cope with leakage sources up to 1 mA per channel. Each channel on the Commander needs to discover at least one detonator that has been marked as the last detonator on the string. To ensure that there is connectivity to the last unit on the harness, this last detonator will be searched for just after charging. The Commander will also check the voltage supplied to the last detonator to ensure that sufficient energy has been transferred to allow for successful blasting. Should the Commander not find a detonator marked as the last detonator on a channel, the Last detonator not set notification will be displayed note that the channel affected will also be indicated. This error occurs when communication to the last detonator is unsuccessful after charging and just prior to firing. If the last detonator is not found it indicates a harness break or the last detonator does not have sufficient voltage to initiate. The user is encouraged to disarm and return to safe voltage. After waiting the minimum of 10 minutes re-entry time as per the manufacturer requirement, proceed to the string in question to identify the source of the fault. A Tagger may be used to aid in this process. The first step would be to check if there is a leakage problem on the string. Once this is resolved the user will need to test the string to check if all the expected detonators are present on the line. Page 199 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Wire limit exceeded Misfires Expected limiter has Current activated This warning will trigger when the cumulative detonator wire length for a channel is exceeded. The down-line wire length of each detonator is stored in memory, and the software can thus calculate the total down-wire length per channel. If this total length exceeds the set max wire limit setting the warning will be triggered. It is recommended that the user decrease the down-wire length on the channel in question by moving detonators to another channel. This warning will be displayed during the firing window if the voltage at the last detonator is too low for successful blasting. In such a case the user is encouraged to disarm and return to safe voltage. After waiting the appropriate amount of time the user may proceed to the channel in question to identify the source of the fault. A Tagger may be used to aid in this process. The first step would be to check if there is a leakage problem on the string. Once this is resolved the user will need to test the string to check if all the expected detonators are present on the line firing process. This error may trigger at any point during the testing, programming or to excessively high leakage or a short circuit on the channel. The Tagger may be used to identify the source of leakage using the binary search technique. If this error occurs after programming the user will need to reprogram the channel The error points Page 200 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action When the Commander detects a detonator that still has the internally recorded factory ID, which means that it has not been successfully tagged, it will trigger the untagged warning. The Tagger may be used to find the untagged detonator on a string using the binary search technique. Once the untagged detonator has been found, it must be tagged with a delay or location (or both) as per the blast plan. This error will be displayed either when the user scans a Red BlastCard when a Yellow BlastCard is expected or vice versa. The error will also be displayed if the BlastCard is invalid. The user must scan the correct BlastCard or replace the BlastCard if it is invalid or not working correctly Untagged detonator found Test All Untagged test Test Single det Wrong / Invalid Card Page 201 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Low Battery / Link Down / Check RF Settings Card Not paired Last det not set Missing dets after programming and reconnected The low battery warning will be displayed when the battery has depleted to a point where blasting may be jeopardised. Recharge the battery before continuing with blasting. When the RF link is down at the Base Commander, the link down error will be displayed. The number (B4 in example) refers to the Bench Commander with which communication has been lost. The RF connection warnings will indicate that either the RF channel or the Encryption key does not match. Adjust settings to ensure that these parameters match on the Base Commander and all the Bench Commanders. The Invalid Key / Card not paired error will be displayed if the BlastCard used to arm the Base Commander is from a different group (set) of BlastCards to the BlastCard used to arm the Bench Commander/s. Use only the BlastCards from the same set as shipped together The last det not set error will occur when arming if the last dets were not set on the connected channels. The user may select to select last dets automatically where the system will assume that the last detonator in the last is the last det or the user may manually select the last det. and after programming The system will display a reprogram error should dets be disconnected reconnected afterwards. The user can view the errors on the Bench Commander by pressing the # button. The system will allow the user to continue with arming on the Base Commander but the Commander will display the error message in grace, charging but the fire buttons will be greyed out in the fire menu. Page 202 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action All detonator errors encountered after programming on the Bench Commander will be synced and displayed on the Base Commander with the relevant Bench Commander ID. 19.1. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Troubleshooting: Reprogram required Page 203 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 20 APPENDIX A DIGISHOT PLUS 4G COMMANDER SYSTEM PRACTICAL TIPS AND HINTS This section provides some practical tips and hints based on previous on-bench experience to assist new users with their learning and ensure a successful deployment of the system on the bench. This document must not be regarded as a replacement for Training manuals or Quick Guides but rather as supplementary to other documentation. To ensure that this document remains useful, receiving feedback and suggestions from DetNet Channel partners and end users is important LOCAL MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR STATUTORY REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES, OR CODES OF PRACTISE REGARDING SAFETY TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY OF THE TIPS AND HINTS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MOST STRINGENT SET OF RULES BETWEEN THE MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR LOCAL REGULATIONS/PROCEDURES/CODES OF PRACTISE AND THE MANUFACTURER MUST BE FOLLOWED. Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail on Quick Guides, Channel Leakage and other documents of interest. Page 204 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 20.1. On Bench Delivery of Detonators When boxes of 4G detonators are delivered, ensure to place boxes at a point of safety to prevent on-bench vehicles from driving over the boxes and damaging detonators. IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT ALL DETONATORS ARE IMPACT SENSITIVE AND CAN INITIATE IF EXPOSED TO EXCESSIVE MECHANICAL IMPACT. 20.2. Distributing Detonators on the Bench When distributing detonators on the bench the following points are important:
Before placing detonators at holes to be primed, ensure that all connectors are properly closed to prevent ingress of moisture and/or dirt. Place detonators in line with the direction of drilled holes to minimise people treading or vehicles driving over detonator coils. Place coiled detonators far enough from the hole collar to prevent detonators rolling down drilled holes. If different lengths are used for decking purposes then place coils in the sequence of charging to reduce time and minimise confusion for the charging crew. 20.3. Priming with 4G Detonators During priming (inserting the detonator into a booster) the following points are important:
When removing the detonator from the coil ensure that it is removed from the opposite end of the connector to prevent tangling of the down-hole wire. Pull out sufficient length to thread the detonator through the booster and to be left with approximately 300mm of down-hole wire between booster and coil. Remove helix by gently pulling the cable between thumb and forefinger to prevent inner-cores from taking on different orientations. This could exert unnecessary tension on the crimp area. Thread the detonator through the booster and ensure it is properly seated. Pull on the incoming cable to ensure that the down-hole wire is tightly placed and properly seated in the booster saddle. Check to ensure that it is not kinked or damaged when the booster is lowered down the hole. Place primed detonator in a safe place to minimise the chance of treading on the primer and ensure that the connector is still in the closed position. 20.4. Lowering Detonators into Drilled Holes When lowering booster down the drilled hole it is important to note the following:
Pillow loading is advisable to prevent the down-hole wire being exposed to unnecessary tension when augering explosives down the hole. It also helps to prevent the down-hole wire being damaged when the booster strikes the bottom of the hole. When lowering the booster down the drilled hole, hold coil in one hand and use the thumb and forefinger of the other hand to guide the booster down the hole. At the same time uncoil the helix that is formed in the cable during coiling. When the booster hits the bottom of the hole, raise it off the bottom and tighten the cable to ensure that no kinking or coiling of the down-hole wires has occurred in the hole. Kinking/coiling could cause damage during loading or slumping. There are two schools of thought on how to tie the down-hole wire to the stake that must always be Page 205 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 placed in line with the row of holes as follows:
The first one is to take the down-hole wire protruding from the hole and coil it three or four times around the stake, leaving sufficient slack on the fourth coil to pull the coil through the loop and then carefully tighten the down-hole wire without causing any sharp kinks in the cable. The second one is advisable in areas that are known for slumping of holes. Treat same as above with the exception that instead of using the down-hole wire protruding from the hole, place the remaining coil next to the stake and then coil a sufficient length from the connector side and tie in same manner as above, ensuring that tension is exerted on the down-hole wire and not on the connector interface by allowing sufficient slack between knot and connectors. It is believed that if slumping appears, the down-line wire will have sufficient slack in the coil to compensate for the slumping without the wire pulling directly on the stake. Both methods as described above have been successfully deployed globally. ENSURE THAT CONNECTOR IS PROPERLY CLOSED TO PREVENT INGRESS OF MOISTURE AND DIRT. 20.5. Charging of Drilled Holes When charging drilled holes it is important to keep the following in mind:
Ensure that the connector is properly closed to prevent ingress of explosives which could result in the corrosion of tines inside the connector. Corrosion of the tines will cause increased resistance during blasting. If Pillow loading was not done during auguring, lift the booster an appropriate distance from the drilled hole bottom and keep the down-hole wire tight to prevent it from kinking. Kinks in the wire can lead to pocket loading of the explosives; these pockets will, through time, slide down the hole and cause insufficient explosive charge per hole. Kinks may also lead to damage of the inner cores in the downline if tension is exerted on the downline wire. On completion of charging, ensure that connectors are properly closed and ensure that the down hole lead is still tied to the stake If Pillow loading was done, keep down-line wire tight to prevent kinks from forming inside the hole and keep down-line wire towards middle of the hole to prevent the charging hose from pushing the down-line wire against rock surface of the hole which might result in down-line wire damage. Ensure that the stake is still in place and connector still closed. 20.6. Stemming of Charged Holes When stemming holes with aggregate it is important to do the following:
Position the down-hole wire to mitigate damage as much as possible. Pull down-hole wire away from the side from which stemming material is being poured down the hole. Ensure that all slack is taken-up to prevent kinking inside the stemming column. Kinking will result in the cable snapping if slumping is experienced. 20.7. Tagging of Charged Holes with 4G Detonators Tagging according to a plan and ensuring all Users adhere to this plan is important to reduce errors during blasting:
Always ensure that a proper blast and tagging plan is available and that all personnel partaking have a Page 206 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 clear understanding of the tagging method and channel allocation. Duplicate, missing or extra detonators and/or detonators on the wrong channel will have a negative impact at blasting time if discovered on the Bench Commander. Ensure that CE4 Tagger head is clean and free of water droplets or emulsion especially between the two Pogo-pin connectors. This helps to prevent a conductive path between the connectors that will add leakage during tagging and testing. When tagging using the through holes ensure that the CE4 Tagger head is regularly cleaned and connectors closed and placed properly on the stake. When tagging directly on the tines, inspect the tines for alignment with harness wire guiding groves, that the spade gap is in good repair and ensure that connector is properly closed and placed on the stake Ensure that Tagging is performed according to tagging plan and that all detonators are tagged to prevent the system discovering extra or missing detonators during blasting When the connector is damaged or does not make proper contact and needs to be removed, cut the down-line wires and strip the insulation sufficient in length to fit into the Back-to Back Connector without protruding on either side of the connector as this can result in a short circuit. ALWAYS USE BACK-TO-BACK CONNECTORS AS A CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT KIT. 20.8. Harnessing of the Blast Harnessing according to the blast design will reduce fault diagnostics. Also take note of the following:
Always use the correct harness wire as specified in the UTMs. Test roll of harness wire with CE4 Tagger to ensure it is in good repair and that no short circuits are present inside coil. When uncoiling the harness wire, ensure that it is uncoiled from the inside out to prevent tangling of wire. Where possible, connect harness wire in the same sequence as tagging, keep to the system limits and to the tagging plan. Open detonator connector and ensure it is free of dirt or moisture as well as being in a good condition, separate twisted pair with thumb, place harness wire onto connector aligning it with the guiding grooves and corresponding tines. Next, tighten wire over connector ensuring that harness wires are properly aligned and close connector until it clicks shut. If both wires are pushed into the same tine it will result in a short circuit. If the harness wire is not properly positioned it can become trapped between the closing lid of the connector and the top of the tine which will result in a harness break or intermittent connection, which will be time consuming when doing fault diagnostics When joining of the harness wire is required, always use a Back-to Back Connector to ensure a proper joint. Strip the harness wire insulation a sufficient length to fit into the connector of the Back-to Back Connector without protruding on either side of the connector as this can result in a short circuit Always trim harness wire ends at the end of each channel leaving no bare conductors that could touch or lie in a conducting solution as this will create a leak path and have a negative impact on the leakage measurement. Page 207 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 20.9. Testing of Blast Installation Testing the blast installation with the CE4 Tagger is the last on bench verification that the system deployment is within the required parameters:
When a channel is completely harnessed connect the CE4 Tagger to detonator string and perform a test all comparing the number of detonators with the blast plan to ensure all detonators are accounted for. Check that holes not connected are treated as misfires and marked on the plan. A good rule of thumb is if leakage exceeds 0.2mA, locate the source and fix before proceeding. If the leakage is isolated to a single detonator, remove this detonator from the string and connect this detonator to a separate harness wire and to its own channel. During programming assign the absolute time to detonator. Ensure that all channels are properly tested and within system limits before connecting to lead-in harness wire. Ensure that all detonators are connected to the correct channels. 20.10. Testing lead-in wire and rolling out harness wire to Bench Commander position Key points to note in testing of the Lead-in wire before rolling it out to the Bench Commander:
Test total length of lead-in harness wire for short circuits and leakage before connecting to strings of detonators. Make use of Back-to-Back Connectors when joining harness wires. When rolling out to the Bench Commander position ensure that wires do not cross blasts or harness wires that are connected to detonators deployed to the blast, pre-split or near big rocks that might cut harness wire before the blast signal is sent. Keep away from high wall to prevent rolling rocks severing harness wire during deployment or rocks that may become dislodged by vibration or air blast from other blasts in vicinity. If lead-in harness wire requires extension, always use Back-to-Back Connectors ensuring that ends do not touch, as this could result in leakage or short circuits. 20.11. Connecting Harness wires to Bench Commander Based on errors that have been observed during the connecting of the harness wire to the Bench Commander, the following is important to note:
Ensure that connection points on the Bench Commander are clean and in good condition to ensure a proper connection. Trim Harness wire ends to prevent it from touching the connector face plate to avoid short circuits. Fold copper portion double to have a bigger connection area. Wrap harness wire around large rocks to provide slack on the harness wire connections to prevent these from being pulled out by accidental bumping or people traveling. 20.12. Setting Up RF Communication When deciding on a suitable blast point and setting up multiple Base stations for blasting, the following must be noted:
Ensure that all spare Commanders and CE4 Taggers in the transporting vehicles are switched OFF to prevent RF interference with Commanders used in the blast. If more than one Base Commander is in use, ensure that they are further than 10 metres apart to eliminate RF communication interference. Page 208 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 20.13. Basic causes of leakage Poorly made joints when joining Harness Wire. Re-using Harness Wire. Leakage occurs when a damaged Harness Wire lies in water or emulsion. The water and emulsion are both conductive substances that can result in leakage. The same can occur if a connector is left submerged in water or emulsion indefinitely. It is advisable to raise the connectors off the ground, or at least away from standing water, if the ground conditions are very wet. Detonator down hole wire holes not correctly de-sludged, rubbing of down hole line against hole wall, bent cable when lowering booster into a hole Ingress of water or moisture into connector Detonator cable damaged around the insulation exposing the steel wire Harness wire not properly secured inside connectors Short circuits occur when the harness wires are exposed and touch each other. SHORTS are typically identified by very high leakage errors - >19mA IT IS ADVISED THAT ONCE THE SYSTEM IS TAGGED, TESTED AND FOUND TO BE READY FOR BLASTING THAT THE CONNECTED CONTROL EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF UNTIL BLASTING TIME TO REDUCE THE LIKELIHOOD OF LEAKAGE CAUSED BY CORROSION. These errors can be located and rectified using the Leakage Test in conjunction with a Binary Search. Page 209 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Row 1 Row 2 20.14. Binary Search Untagged Detonators Conduct a binary search by breaking down the blast into manageable sections, to locate untagged detonators. The Binary Search is conducted as follows:
Row 4 Row 3 Row 5 1. Assume Row 1 above has an untagged detonator connected but its location is unknown and it needs to be found. 2. Divide the blast in half and cut the surface harness at mid-point. 3. Connect the Tagger and check the back half for untagged detonators. Should the Tagger display NO UNTAGGGED DETONATORS, proceed with following step. 4. Connect the Tagger and check front half for untagged detonators. Should the Tagger now display UNTAGGGED DETONATORS it can be deduced that the problem is located in the front half of the blast. Repeat the partitioning process there. 5. Divide the front half and test backward and forward from the centre to narrow down the search area. 6. By repeating this process, the fault is narrowed down to a small and manageable area. At this point detonators may be disconnected from the surface harness and tested one at a time using the TEST SINGLE DETONATOR facility to locate the untagged detonator. 7. Once the untagged detonator is found, tag the detonator according to blast plan and ensure all broken wires are correctly reconnected and insulated with tape to prevent leakage problems. 8. Test Harness Wire to ensure all detonators have been identified and detected. Alternative method:
If an existing blast plan is available, use the search function and check the blast summary against the blast plan to determine which row has a problem. The detonator count on that row will be incorrect. Examine the detonator list for that row to determine which detonator in that row is missing. There is a strong possibility that this is the untagged detonator thus checking for the untagged detonator as detailed in this alternative method may be easier than performing the binary search. Page 210 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Row 3 Row 2 Row 1 20.15. High Leakage Conduct a binary search by breaking down the blast into manageable sections to locate high leakage. The Binary Search is conducted as follows:
Assume Row 5 has an exposed wire in surface harness in water causing a high leakage reading on the Tagger. Row 4 Row 5 1. Divide the blast in half and cut the surface harness at mid-point. 2. Connect the Tagger and check back half for leakage. Should the Tagger display high leakage it indicates a fault present. 3. Connect Tagger and check front half for leakage. Should the Tagger display satisfactory leakage it indicates no fault present. 4. Divide the front half and test backward and forward from the centre to narrow down the search area. 5. By repeating this process, the fault is narrowed down to a small and manageable area. 6. Conduct a visual inspection of the surface harness to locate the fault. 7. Fix the problem ensuring all wires are correctly sealed with insulation tape to prevent further leakage problems. 8. Test the surface harness to ensure all faults have been fixed Page 211 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 Exposed cable Exposed cable Exposed cable Electrically conductive leakage path 20.16. Leakage through conductive materials When an individual string of detonators is tested with a Tagger, the leakage reading is within specification, however, when all strings are connect together, the leakage value is outside the acceptable limit indicating that the accumulative leakage value is now outside acceptable parameters. The sum of the leakage on all the strings is greater than the acceptable level. Damaged surface harness wire insulation and/or detonators cables cause resistance between the surface harness wires when lying in an electrically conductive material which results in high leakage. The best way of resolving this problem is by conducting a binary search as follows. Divide the blast in half, cut the surface harness at mid-point. Connect DigiShot Plus Tagger and check the rear half of the installation for leakage, Tagger displays satisfactory leakage. Connect DigiShot Plus Tagger and check front half of the installation for leakage, Tagger displays satisfactory leakage. Reconnect the break in the surface wire / bus and retest surface harness, DigiShot Plus Tagger displays high leakage indicating fault present. Return to mid-point break, remove joint in surface harness. Re-join the surface harness wire by crossing over the wires, yellow wire to green and green wire to yellow. High leakage is reduced because the exposed wires A and B are now on the same line. Ensure all wires are correctly insulated with tape to prevent further leakage problems. Test surface harness wire to ensure leakage is within acceptable limits. If high leakage is still present, split the blast onto separate channels in the middle of the blast. Exposed cable Exposed cable Exposed cable Page 212 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 21 APPENDIX B ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS 21.1. Abbreviations 4G Ah CE4 DC Det(s) GMT in IP LCD LED Long-range Med-range mm ms NFC OTS PC PCB PVC RF RH RTC Short-range UI USB W Fourth Generation Amp-hours 4th Generation Control Equipment Direct Current Detonator(s) Greenwich Mean Time Inch Ingress Protection (IP-67 = totally protected against ingress of dust; and protected against the effects of immersion between 15cm and 1m for 30 minutes) Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Maximum distance: 3km (<3km) Maximum distance: 1km (<1km) millimetre millisecond Near Field Communication Off The Shelf Personal Computer Printed circuit board Polyvinyl chloride Radio Frequency Relative Humidity Real time clock Maximum distance: 10m (<10m) User Interface Universal Serial Bus Watt Page 213 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00339 | Rev 5 21.2. Definitions 4G Detonator Initiation point Initiation time Detonator harness Place-of-safety Equipment safe Blast voltage Inherently safe An electronic detonator that has been designed and developed by DetNet South Africa (4G = Fourth Generation). This is the location where the blast is initiated. The initiation point is always at a place-of-safety (see below). Time delays that are programmed into detonators. The cable that attaches to the detonator that allows detonators to be connected one after another. The harness has two parameters: an inter-hole length and a down-hole length. A location specified by the main blasting authority that guarantees human safety with respect to fly rock, fumes, concussion and fall of ground. This is an area close to the bench, where equipment can be located with reasonable assurance that it will not be damaged during or immediately after blast. The principal requirements for firing a 4G Detonator are a minimum supply voltage and the fire command. The minimum voltage required to fire a 4G Detonator is known as blast voltage. Equipment that is unable to transfer sufficient energy to the detonator to cause it to initiate, even in the event of failure of certain safety interlocks in the detonator and test equipment. Page 214 of 214 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018
| 1 2 3 4 | Intellishot user manual | Users Manual | 5.42 MiB |
IntelliShot Commander System UTM-00338 | Rev 5 | 2018 IntelliShot Commander SVN 36230C CE4 Tagger SVN 36230B IntelliShot Detonator UTM-00338 | Rev 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................................... 2 List of Figures ................................................................................................................................. 9 List of Tables ................................................................................................................................... 9 1 USERS OF THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................. 10 Purpose of this manual ......................................................................................................... 10 End User ................................................................................................................................. 10 Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 10 Training................................................................................................................................... 10 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM PRODUCT SAFETY ..................................... 11 DetNet Safety Philosophy...................................................................................................... 11 User Safety ............................................................................................................................. 11 Product Safety ........................................................................................................................ 11 Maintenance Schedule .......................................................................................................... 11 Information in case of emergency ........................................................................................ 11 Warning, Caution, and Note Statements .............................................................................. 12 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM INTRODUCTION .......................................... 13 IntelliShot Commander Basic System Description ............................................................ 13 Direct Blasting Configuration ........................................................................................................... 14 Remote Blasting Configuration........................................................................................................ 15 Remote Blasting via a Repeater Configuration ............................................................................... 16 IntelliShot Commander General Description ...................................................................... 17 CE4 Tagger General Description .......................................................................................... 17 IntelliShot Detonator General Description .......................................................................... 17 BlastCards General Description ........................................................................................... 18 The Yellow BlastCard ...................................................................................................................... 18 The Red BlastCard .......................................................................................................................... 18 Harness Wire .......................................................................................................................... 19 IntelliShot Commander System Blast Application ............................................................. 19 IntelliShot Commander System User Application .............................................................. 20 Users that deploy simple blast patterns. Basic (B) Tagging Option ............................................... 20 Users that follow a paper plan. Advanced (A) Tagging Option ...................................................... 20 Users that follow a plan. Planned (P) Tagging Option ................................................................... 20 IntelliShot Commander System Limits and Specifications ............................................... 21 CE4 Tagger System Limits .............................................................................................................. 21 IntelliShot Commander System Limits........................................................................................... 22 IntelliShot DETONATOR .............................................................................................. 24 4 Page 2 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Components ........................................................................................................................... 24 Crimp Plug ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ............................................................................................................. 25 Fusehead......................................................................................................................................... 25 Protective H-Plug ............................................................................................................................. 25 Connector ........................................................................................................................................ 25 Down-line wire ................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting Up ........................................................................................................................ 26 Connector ........................................................................................................................................ 26 Application of Detonator ....................................................................................................... 27 Handling Precautions ............................................................................................................. 27 Storage ............................................................................................................................................ 27 IntelliShot Detonator Care ............................................................................................................. 27 Specifications......................................................................................................................... 28 Number of IntelliShot Detonators................................................................................................... 28 Automated detonator capacity check .............................................................................................. 28 Decking ............................................................................................................................................ 28 Maximum delay times and increments............................................................................................. 28 Temperature Limitations .................................................................................................................. 28 Storage Life and Equipment Life ..................................................................................................... 28 Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity ...................................... 28 Safety ...................................................................................................................................... 29 Safety Warnings ..................................................................................................................... 29 User and Safety Tips ....................................................................................................................... 29 Risks ................................................................................................................................................ 29 Destruction of 4G Detonators ........................................................................................................... 29 5 CE4 TAGGER ................................................................................................................. 30 CE4 Tagger General Information .......................................................................................... 30 CE4 Tagger Components ...................................................................................................... 31 Harness wire terminals .................................................................................................................... 32 Pogo pins......................................................................................................................................... 32 LEDs ................................................................................................................................................ 32 LCD Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 32 SoftKeys .......................................................................................................................................... 32 Navigation and Numerical keys ....................................................................................................... 32 Enter key ......................................................................................................................................... 32 Backspace Key ................................................................................................................................ 32 On/Off key ....................................................................................................................................... 33 Esc key ............................................................................................................................................ 33 Function key .................................................................................................................................... 33 USB connector port ......................................................................................................................... 33 Battery ............................................................................................................................................. 33 Audio Tones .................................................................................................................................... 33 Vibration Signals ............................................................................................................................. 34 Visual Signals .................................................................................................................................. 34 Page 3 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Real Time Clock (RTC) Function .................................................................................................... 34 NFC ................................................................................................................................................. 34 Wireless Charging ........................................................................................................................... 34 Power CE4 Tagger ON and OFF ............................................................................................ 35 CE4 Tagger Power-ON ................................................................................................................... 35 CE4 Tagger Power-OFF ................................................................................................................. 36 CE4 Tagger Menu Navigation ................................................................................................ 37 CE4 Tagger Common User Interface Conventions ........................................................................ 37 CE4 Tagger Menu Quick Reference ...................................................................................... 39 CE4 Tagger Accessories ....................................................................................................... 42 External Battery Pack ...................................................................................................................... 42 Replaceable Top Connectors .......................................................................................................... 43 Surface Harness Wire ..................................................................................................................... 44 CE4 Tagger Battery ................................................................................................................ 45 Charging the CE4 Tagger .............................................................................................................. 45 Low Battery...................................................................................................................................... 46 Battery Information .......................................................................................................................... 46 CE4 Tagger Storage Mode ..................................................................................................... 47 6 CE4 TAGGER SYSTEM INFORMATION ....................................................................... 49 System Info ............................................................................................................................ 49 System Info - Battery ....................................................................................................................... 49 System Info - Temperature and the Relative Humidity ................................................................... 49 System Info - Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number ................................................ 49 System Info - GPS Detail ................................................................................................................ 50 System Info User ID ...................................................................................................................... 50 7 CE4 TAGGER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ............................................................... 51 CE4 Tagger 4G Setup Configuration .................................................................................... 51 Tag Option ....................................................................................................................................... 51 Site Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 52 Leakage Trigger .............................................................................................................................. 54 Device Setup .......................................................................................................................... 55 Contrast ........................................................................................................................................... 55 Brightness........................................................................................................................................ 56 Time Zone ....................................................................................................................................... 57 Timeouts .......................................................................................................................................... 58 Language......................................................................................................................................... 59 Units ................................................................................................................................................ 60 8 CE4 TAGGER ADVANCED SETUP ............................................................................... 61 Tagger ID ................................................................................................................................ 61 Connections ........................................................................................................................... 63 Connect Tagger to PC via Wi-Fi...................................................................................................... 64 Connect CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Wi-Fi ............................................................ 65 Connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB .............................................................................................. 67 Page 4 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Remote View .......................................................................................................................... 68 Select Remote View on CE4 Tagger .............................................................................................. 68 Initiate Remote View on PC ............................................................................................................ 69 Clear Tags .............................................................................................................................. 70 Device Password ................................................................................................................... 71 Read All Detonator Data ........................................................................................................ 72 Maximum Wire Length ........................................................................................................... 73 9 CE4 TAGGER FACTORY SETUP .................................................................................. 74 Factory Setup Menu Options ................................................................................................ 76 10 TAGGING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................... 78 COMMANDER SYSTEM TAGGING PRINCIPLE .............................................................. 78 Basic. .............................................................................................................................................. 78 Advanced......................................................................................................................................... 79 Tag by Plan. ................................................................................................................................... 79 BASIC (B) TAGGING OPTION ......................................................................................... 80 Mark Detonators .............................................................................................................................. 82 PLANNED (P) TAGGING OPTION ................................................................................... 84 Connect the CE4 Tagger to the PC ................................................................................................ 85 Download the Plan (via ViewShot 3D) ............................................................................................ 86 View the downloaded design on the CE4 Tagger ........................................................................... 89 Select Start Position ........................................................................................................................ 90 Tag by Plan Screen ......................................................................................................................... 91 Assigning ViewShot ......................................................................................................................... 92 Verify Plan ....................................................................................................................................... 93 Verify Delays ................................................................................................................................... 93 Show results .................................................................................................................................... 93 Merge Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 93 ADVANCED (A) TAGGING OPTION ................................................................................ 94 Advanced Mode .............................................................................................................................. 94 Edit the Hole configuration .............................................................................................................. 96 Delete the Hole Configuration ......................................................................................................... 97 Advanced (A) Tagging Screen Info ................................................................................ 99 Advanced Tagging Screen SoftKey Icons ..................................................................................... 100 Toggle Increment Direction ........................................................................................................... 101 Inter Hole Delay ............................................................................................................................. 102 Absolute Detonator Time ............................................................................................................... 102 Autotag / Manual Mode ................................................................................................................. 103 Tagging Screen Info ...................................................................................................................... 104 Test Single Detonator .................................................................................................................... 105 Tagged Detonators ........................................................................................................................ 106 Mark Detonators ............................................................................................................................ 107 Review Tag Detonator Screen Parameters .................................................................................. 108 Advanced Screen Manual Adjustments ........................................................................................ 109 Page 5 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 11 TEST MENU .................................................................................................................. 110 Test All ........................................................................................................................... 110 Test String ...................................................................................................................... 111 Test Single Detonator .................................................................................................... 112 Leakage Test .................................................................................................................. 113 Untagged Test................................................................................................................ 114 Search Detonators (Binary Search) .............................................................................. 115 Search Function Results ............................................................................................................... 115 12 VIEW Plan ..................................................................................................................... 116 List Detonators .............................................................................................................. 116 Search Filter .................................................................................................................................. 117 Info SoftKey ................................................................................................................................... 118 Sort Detonator list .......................................................................................................................... 119 ViewShot Plan Summary (Heading) .............................................................................................. 121 List Missing detonators ................................................................................................ 122 List New detonators ...................................................................................................... 124 List Bad Status .............................................................................................................. 125 Duplicate Location ........................................................................................................ 126 Blast Summary .............................................................................................................. 127 Tracking Detonators ...................................................................................................... 128 13 COMMANDER ............................................................................................................... 130 General Information....................................................................................................... 130 IntelliShot Commander Components ......................................................................... 130 IntelliShot Commander Body ....................................................................................................... 131 Internal antenna ............................................................................................................................ 131 Detonator Communication Channels (1 - 4) .................................................................................. 131 E-paper display ............................................................................................................................. 131 NEXT (FUNCTION) button ............................................................................................................ 131 POWER button .............................................................................................................................. 131 USB connector port ....................................................................................................................... 132 BlastCard (NFC) Sensor ............................................................................................................... 132 Power IntelliShot Commander ON and OFF ............................................................... 133 Power IntelliShot Commander ON .............................................................................................. 133 Power IntelliShot Commander OFF............................................................................................. 133 IntelliShot Commander Accessories .......................................................................... 134 Battery ........................................................................................................................................... 134 Charging the IntelliShot Commander .......................................................................................... 134 Storage .......................................................................................................................................... 134 IntelliShot Commander Process Description ............................................................. 135 Start-up .......................................................................................................................................... 135 Page 6 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Shutdown....................................................................................................................................... 135 Bootloading.................................................................................................................................... 135 Pairing ........................................................................................................................................... 135 Aborting ......................................................................................................................................... 136 Blasting .......................................................................................................................................... 136 Connecting CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Wi-Fi ................................... 137 IntelliShot Commander System Information .............................................................. 139 IntelliShot Commander LCD Screen Icons ................................................................. 141 IntelliShot Base Commander Mode Icons ................................................................................... 141 IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Icons ................................................................................. 148 IntelliShot Commander Repeater Mode Icons ............................................................................ 156 NEW DESIGN ................................................................................................................. 160 TEST MENU .................................................................................................................... 161 Test All ........................................................................................................................................... 161 Leakage Test ................................................................................................................................. 162 Untagged Test ............................................................................................................................... 163 VIEW DESIGN................................................................................................................. 164 List Detonators .............................................................................................................................. 164 List Missing Detonators ................................................................................................................. 166 List New Detonators ...................................................................................................................... 167 List Bad Status Detonators ............................................................................................................ 168 Channel Summary ......................................................................................................................... 169 Prepare for Blast ............................................................................................................ 170 Local Blast ..................................................................................................................................... 170 Remote Blast ................................................................................................................................. 173 14 IntelliShot Commander Configuration Settings ...................................................... 178 4G Setup ......................................................................................................................... 178 Device Setup .................................................................................................................. 178 Time Zone ..................................................................................................................................... 179 Language....................................................................................................................................... 180 Timeouts ........................................................................................................................................ 181 Units .............................................................................................................................................. 182 Long Range RF .............................................................................................................. 183 Set RF Channel ............................................................................................................................. 183 Set Encryption Key ........................................................................................................................ 185 15 Advanced Setup ........................................................................................................... 186 Device ID ........................................................................................................................ 186 Base Station Mode ........................................................................................................ 187 Base + Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................... 188 Bench Box Mode ........................................................................................................... 189 Repeater Mode ............................................................................................................... 190 Page 7 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Device Password ........................................................................................................... 191 Last Det .......................................................................................................................... 192 Toggle Auto Arm ........................................................................................................... 193 Max Wire Length ............................................................................................................ 194 16 Factory Setup ............................................................................................................... 195 Factory Setup Menu Options ........................................................................................ 197 17 Tablet Blast Application General Description ........................................................... 198 18 Commander System On-Bench Deployment Overview ............................................ 199 Blasting Overview ......................................................................................................... 199 Local blasting ................................................................................................................................ 199 Remote blasting ............................................................................................................................ 200 Synchronized blasting (Multiple Commanders)............................................................................. 201 19 IntelliShot Commander System Troubleshooting ................................................... 202 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Troubleshooting: Reprogram required ...... 207 20 Appendix A IntelliShot Commander System Practical Tips and Hints ............... 208 On Bench Delivery of Detonators ................................................................................. 209 Distributing Detonators on the Bench ......................................................................... 209 Priming with IntelliShot Detonators ............................................................................ 209 Lowering Detonators into Drilled Holes ....................................................................... 209 Charging of Drilled Holes .............................................................................................. 210 Stemming of Charged Holes ......................................................................................... 210 Tagging of Charged Holes with IntelliShot Detonators ............................................. 210 Harnessing of the Blast ................................................................................................. 211 Testing of Blast Installation .......................................................................................... 212 Testing lead-in wire and rolling out harness wire to Bench Commander position ... 212 Connecting Harness wires to Bench Commander ...................................................... 212 Setting Up RF Communication ..................................................................................... 212 Basic causes of leakage ............................................................................................... 213 Binary Search ................................................................................................................ 214 High Leakage ................................................................................................................. 215 Leakage through conductive materials ........................................................................ 216 21 Appendix B Abbreviations and Definitions ............................................................ 217 Abbreviations................................................................................................................. 217 Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 218 Page 8 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List of Figures Figure 1: IntelliShot Commander System Composition ...................................................................................... 13 Figure 2: Direct Blasting ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Figure 3: Remote Blasting of up to 16000 detonators .......................................................................................... 15 Figure 4: Remote Blasting via a Repeater ............................................................................................................ 16 Figure 5: CE4 Tagger Component Identification .................................................................................................. 31 Figure 6: CE4 Tagger External Battery Pack ........................................................................................................ 42 Figure 7: CE4 Tagger Top Connector .................................................................................................................. 43 Figure 8: Surface Harness Wire ............................................................................................................................ 44 Figure 9: IntelliShot Commander Part Identification ......................................................................................... 130 Figure 10: IntelliShot Base Commander Mode Detail Screen .......................................................................... 142 Figure 11: IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Screen ................................................................................... 149 Figure 12: Repeater Detail Screen ..................................................................................................................... 156 Figure 13: Local Blasting..................................................................................................................................... 199 Figure 14: Remote Blasting ................................................................................................................................ 200 Figure 15: Synchronized Blasting via Multiple Commanders ............................................................................. 201 List of Tables Table 1: Component Description .......................................................................................................................... 14 Table 2: CE4 Tagger Icon Shortcut Keys and Commander Icons ........................................................................ 38 Table 3: CE4 Tagger Menu Reference ................................................................................................................. 39 Table 4: CE4 Tagger Main Menu Reference ........................................................................................................ 39 Table 5: CE4 Tagger Configuration Menu Reference .......................................................................................... 40 Table 6: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Select Position ......................................................................................... 90 Table 7: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Tag By Plan Option ................................................................................. 92 Table 8: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Advanced Tagging ................................................................................. 100 Table 9: IntelliShot Commander Base Station Screen Icons ............................................................................ 142 Table 10: IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Screen Icons .......................................................................... 149 Table 11: Repeater Screen Icons ....................................................................................................................... 157 Page 9 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 1 USERS OF THIS MANUAL Purpose of this manual This manual details the operation of the IntelliShot Commander System. This manual is only to be used for the IntelliShot Commander System and the applicable software version as displayed. End User Requirements Only trained personnel, and personnel found competent, are allowed to operate the system. Users of the system shall be aware of the recommended procedures for using the IntelliShot Commander System as per manufacturers recommendations. These recommendations do not supersede the method as required by local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of detonators. In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. Training Training and software upgrades shall only be performed by a DetNet SA subject matter expert. Contact the DetNet head office for additional information. ALL USERS OPERATING THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM SHALL HAVE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED THE SPECIFIC TRAINING BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WORK WITH THE DEVICE(S). Page 10 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM PRODUCT SAFETY 2 DetNet Safety Philosophy DetNet safety philosophy is to design, manufacturer and provide control equipment, detonators and accessories to the highest safety standards. Energy management in control equipment will be regulated by providing two separate circuits managing test voltage and blast voltage, through software and hardware safety interlocks. BlastCards remain in possession of the accountable person, and should only be used to authorize the blast process at such a time as stipulated by the Mine after completion of the required Risk Assessment. All products must conform to local and international standards before it is sold for use. DetNet complies to ISO 9001, SANS 551:2009, CEN/TS 13763-27 which is acceptable to countries we operate in; in countries not subscribing to the above marks, we advise users to engage with DetNet to ensure that all equipment comply to local regulations. User Safety Safety is ensured when the user supplements the products in-built safety systems through adequate training in the safe use of the product:
Induction training Refresher training DetNet continuously upgrades software to make the products more user friendly and to ensure that users stay abreast on latest developments, it is important that users get trained on the relevant changes before their equipment is updated. Product Safety Inherent Safety CE4 Taggers are Inherently Safe because they cannot produce the necessary minimum required firing voltage or encoded Fire command to initiate the electronic IntelliShot Detonator. In addition, the CE4 Tagger firmware does not contain the procedures or commands necessary to calibrate, arm or fire the detonator. Transportation, Storage and Handling IntelliShot Commander System equipment must be transported, stored, handled and used in conformity with all federal, state, provincial and local laws and regulations. Control equipment and accessories should be handled with due care and not dropped, mishandled, subjected to excessive vibration or exposed to any chemical agents. Connectors should be kept clean and the equipment must be kept in a safe environment to avoid misappropriation or misuse. Maintenance Schedule All equipment in the field will need to be returned to DetNet, or its repair centres, for service at the following intervals:
Handheld Equipment (Tagger, etc.) 18 Months. Other equipment (Excluding accessories) 24 Months. Information in case of emergency Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/ http://www.portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail and documentation. Page 11 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Warning, Caution, and Note Statements WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE statements are used throughout this manual to emphasise important and critical information. Observe these statements to ensure safety and to prevent product damage. The statements are defined as follows:
A WARNING MEANS THAT INJURY OR DEATH IS POSSIBLE IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT OBEYED. Warnings draw special attention to anything that could injure or kill the reader/user. Warnings are generally placed before the step in the procedure they relate to. Warning messages are repeated wherever they apply. A CAUTION MEANS THAT DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT IS POSSIBLE. Cautions draw special attention to anything that could damage equipment or cause the loss of data and will normally describe what could happen if the caution is ignored. Cautions are generally placed before the step in the procedure they relate to. Notes are added to provide additional information. Notes are used to emphasise important information by visually distinguishing this from the rest of the text. Notes can contain any type of information except safety information, which is always placed in cautions or warnings. Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/ http://www.portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail and documentation. Page 12 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 3 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM INTRODUCTION IntelliShot Commander Basic System Description The system description details a full system lay-out and also the individual component name, function and interaction between the components. This 4th generation Control Equipment (CE4) that is designed and developed by DetNet South Africa consists of two main devices, namely the IntelliShot Commander and CE4 Tagger. The IntelliShot Commander unit may be set-up either as a Bench Commander (for connection to detonators) or as a Base Commander that is used to remotely communicate with a Bench Commander to initiate the blast (see illustration below). The Commander may also be used as a RF Repeater to increase remote blasting range and maintain line of sight. The CE4 Tagger is an inherently safe device that is used on the bench to test detonators and assign delays to them. The CE4 Tagger has a dual role and may also be used to wirelessly connect to an IntelliShot Commander thereby acting as an interface unit for the IntelliShot Commander. This unique design simplifies the design of the IntelliShot Commander which comprises of a screen and two buttons allowing the user to control the IntelliShot Commander remotely from the comfort of a CE4 Tagger. Peripheral devices such as a Laptop or Tablet will be COTS (Commercial Off-The-Shelf) equipment loaded with DetNet software to interact with the system. Figure 1 (below) depicts a scaled system as would be required to perform a 1600 detonator blast (Using 10 Commanders each connected to 1600 detonators the blast size can be increased to capacity of 16 000 detonators) 3000m 8 3000m 10m 7 6 2 CE4 Tagger 1 Detonator (Max 400 Dets per Channel) 2 3 Harness Wire 4 Bench Commander 5 3 4 1 5 6 7 8 Repeater Base Commander Short Range RF Long range RF Figure 1: IntelliShot Commander System Composition Page 13 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Table 1: Component Description Component Detonator CE4 Tagger Harness Wire Bench Commander Repeater Base Commander Wi-Fi Function Detonator will initiate the blast on command from the Bench Commander Test, Write Location and/or Delay to detonator and remote control Commander Connects the detonator to the Bench Commander Test Detonators / Communicates with Base Commander directly, or via the Repeater to allow remote blasting. Can also enable a local blast Enables 2-way RF communication between a Base and Bench Commander where line of sight is not possible, effectively doubling the RF range Establish communication via all Bench Commanders and enables remote blasting Enable Wi-Fi communication Long range RF Enable RF communication
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The following illustrations depict some of the lesser configurations possible with the system. Direct Blasting Configuration Direct blasting of up to 1600 detonators. The CE4 Tagger can be replaced with a Tablet or PDA. Bench Commander Tagger 10m Max 400 Detonators per Channel Figure 2: Direct Blasting Page 14 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Remote Blasting Configuration Remote blasting of up to 16000 detonators (Total of 10 Bench Commanders with 1600 detonators per Bench Commander) using a CE4 Tagger as user-interface at the blasting point. Max 400 Detonators per Channel Bench Commander Base Commander Tagger 3000m 10 m Figure 3: Remote Blasting of up to 16000 detonators Page 15 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Remote Blasting via a Repeater Configuration Multiple Bench Commanders can be used if they are within the 3000m range of the Repeater (5). Every Bench Commander (4) adds a 1600 detonator capability. A maximum of 10 Bench Commanders may be used for the current iteration of the IntelliShot Commander System. 3000m 8 7 10 m 3000m 6 2 5 1 3 4 1 Detonator (Max 400 Dets per Channel) 2 CE4 Tagger 3 Harness Wire 4 Bench Commander 5 Repeater 6 Base Commander Short Range RF 7 8 Long range RF Figure 4: Remote Blasting via a Repeater Page 16 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander General Description The IntelliShot Commander is a 4-channel multi-functional device intended for use across all surface blasting applications in the DetNet portfolio. DetNet has designed the IntelliShot Commander to incorporate an internal antenna that may be shipped to function in either the 900 MHz, 868MHz or 2.4 GHz RF frequency range. Corresponding with the systems ease-of-use the IntelliShot Commander has a simple user interface, which comprises a screen and two buttons. Allowing for easy inventory control, especially in the way of storing spare equipment, the IntelliShot Commander unit may be configured to function either as:
Base Commander, Bench Commander, or Repeater. CE4 Tagger General Description The CE4 Tagger is an inherently safe device that is used on the bench to test detonators and assign delays to them. The CE4 Tagger has a dual role and may also be used to wirelessly connect to an IntelliShot Commander thereby acting as an interface unit for the IntelliShot Commander. IntelliShot Detonator General Description The IntelliShot Detonator is a programmable detonator that is suitable for all types of blasting operations, especially those requiring precise timing. The IntelliShot Detonator is housed in a copper tube, which protects the circuit board and the base charge. The IntelliShot Detonator is attached to a robust black and green two wire down-line cable that is capped with a gel-filled connector that clips on a surface harness wire. ELECTRONIC DETONATORS ARE TOTALLY DIFFERENT TO CONVENTIONAL ELECTRIC DETONATORS AND ABSOLUTELY NO CONNECTION WITH CONVENTIONAL ELECTRIC DETONATORS OR ANY OTHER ELECTRONIC DETONATORS IS POSSIBLE AS IT CAN LEAD TO UNINTENDED INITIATION. ALL USERS OPERATING THE ELECTRONIC INITIATION SYSTEM SHALL HAVE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED THE SPECIFIC TRAINING BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WORK WITH THE DEVICE(S). DO NOT USE ANY DEVICES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS TYPE OF ELECTRONIC DETONATOR. NEVER CONNECT ANY THIRD PARTY OR OTHER UNAPPROVED DETONATORS TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM Page 17 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 BlastCards General Description For safety purposes, the system is activated through a pre-programmed and unique Password (PIN code) protected Blast card System. The system deploys two types of near field communication (NFC) BlastCards that are identified by a Yellow or Red colour. The Yellow BlastCard The User will scan the Yellow BlastCard on the CE4 Bench Commander after completion of the connecting and testing of the blast installation. This should only be performed after the bench has been cleared of all personnel. Scanning the BlastCard will place the Bench Commander in a waiting to arm state and this should be undertaken in accordance with local legislation and prescribed blasting procedures on site. A quick activation setting on the Commander is also available. If turned ON and the unit has had a good scan and testing cycle with no errors, the user will be allowed to scan the yellow Activation Card and the Bench Commander will proceed to the waiting for arm state without being prompted by the user; connecting the Tagger. This function is known as AutoArm. The Red BlastCard The Red BlastCard, when scanned at the Base Commander during an RF Multi-bench Commander blast, or at the Bench Commander during a local blast, will issue the Arm and Fire Commands. The ARM and FIRE commands for detonators will not initially be known to the IntelliShot Commander. These commands are only available from the Red BlastCard and will be issued to the IntelliShot Commander when the BlastCard is scanned. The ARM and FIRE blasting commands are erased from the IntelliShot Commander memory after use. Always keep the BlastCards and PIN locked away in a secure place when not in use. Always place the BlastCards in direct control of the certified user during the blast. Always inform the supervisor and supplier immediately if a BlastCard is lost or damaged. BlastCards are classified as blast keys and must be handled in accordance with local legislation requirements. NEVER SWIPE THE RED BLASTCARD ONTO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER WHEN IN IDLE MODE, UNLESS IT IS INTENDED TO INITIATE A BLAST AND THE SOFTWARE PROMPTS THE USER TO DO SO. (THE YELLOW BLASTCARD CAN BE SWIPED TO OBTAIN THE RF SETUP INFORMATION AND ALSO TO AUTOARM) NEVER USE A FAULTY OR DAMAGED BLASTCARD. IF BLASTCARD IS FAULTY OR DAMAGED IT MUST BE RETURNED TO THE ORIGINAL SUPPLIER FOR DESTRUCTION. NEVER STORE THE BLASTCARDS AND BLASTING PIN TOGETHER. NEVER DIVULGE THE BLASTING PASSWORD/S TO ANOTHER PERSON. ONLY THE CERTIFIED USER TO WHOM THE BLASTCARDS WAS ALLOCATED SHOULD KNOW THE PASSWORD. A BLAST CANNOT BE INITIATED WITHOUT THE BLASTCARDS. Page 18 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Harness Wire The Surface harness wire consists of a pair of yellow and green individually sheathed copper wire, 0.63mm in diameter. Detonators are connected to the surface harness wire to enable communication with control equipment. The maximum length of 2-wire surface harness per channel, including the lead-in wire used to connect shall not exceed 2500m measured from the Commander to the furthest connected detonator. IntelliShot Commander System Blast Application The IntelliShot Commander System Blast Application is detailed in UTM-00346 DetNet Blast Application Tablet User Manual. Page 19 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander System User Application There are three methods of operation for the IntelliShot Commander System, as detailed below:
Users that deploy simple blast patterns. Basic (B) Tagging Option With the Basic tagging option, the user will only need to concentrate on the Time value, string number and the sequence number assigned to the detonator and it is best suited for small, single-primed hole blasts. It is advised to use only one Tagger per Commander when the Basic Tagging Option is used. If more than one Tagger need to be used then both Taggers can start at a different String number. Users that follow a paper plan. Advanced (A) Tagging Option The Advanced Tagging option is used when there is emphasis on both Time and Location but no ViewShot plan is available for download The Advanced Mode includes more functionality than the BASIC mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and time incremental settings. The user will need to define a hole configuration from the Site Setup screen in 4G Setup menu. Users that follow a plan. Planned (P) Tagging Option With the Planned (P) option, a location and/or the delay is written into the detonator. The source for the data is received from a plan which is downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via the ViewShot 3D blast design software. Page 20 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander System Limits and Specifications System Limits define the design parameters that users must adhere to when designing their blast to be used with IntelliShot Commander System. Maximum harness wire per channel Maximum accumulated down-line wire per channel Maximum Bench Commanders per Base Commander Maximum detonators per Tagger Maximum detonators per Channel Maximum detonators per Bench Commander Maximum detonators RF Maximum detonators standalone Maximum detonators per hole Maximum holes per String Maximum line-of-sight for Remote Firing Maximum delay for any detonator Minimum delay per detonator Minimum delay increment Maximum Wi-Fi connectivity distance Maximum Distance using Repeater Maximum Tagger IDs Maximum Commander IDs 2,500m 12 000m 10 Full Design 400 1600 16000 1600 18 400 3km 20,000ms 0ms 1ms 10m 6km 10 10 CE4 Tagger System Limits 3.9.1.1. Strings User selectable 1 40 Strings. (Only 1 string can be connected to the Tagger at a time) 3.9.1.2. Maximum Dets tagged per Channel 400 Detonators using down-hole wire of 30m or lower. For longer lengths, see Wire calculation table under Product Documents on DetNet Portal of down-hole length versus amount of IntelliShot Detonators. 3.9.1.3. Maximum Dets tagged per CE4 Tagger (1 Channel) 16000 Detonators in storage/memory. Only 400 dets (one String) could physically be tested at a time on a Tagger. 3.9.1.4. Maximum Decking per Hole 18 Detonators per hole with 6 decks and 3 detonators per deck. 3.9.1.5. Maximum Distance in Wi-Fi communicating to IntelliShot Commander 10 meters Page 21 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 3.9.1.6. CE4 Tagger Specifications
-30C to +60C / -22F to +140F. Cold Temperature Battery Pack can be used to extend battery operating life in sub-zero conditions. The CE4 Tagger may be used for approximately 10 hours at 25C / 77F. At temperatures below -15C /
-5F battery life may be reduced significantly. When the battery level of the CE4 Tagger reaches 9%, a warning symbol will appear on the top bar. Should the user choose to continue, the CE4 Tagger will automatically switch off when the battery level reaches 3%. IP 57 Ingress protection: Protected against water and dust ingress and protected against immersion between 15cm and 1m for 30 minutes. 3.9.1.7. CE4 Tagger Storage It is recommended that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 50% when placed into long-term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The CE4 Tagger may be kept on charge for extended periods as the CE4 Tagger will manage the battery. 3.9.1.8. Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity The system is also designed to be immune (within limits) to Radio Frequency interference (RF) but it is advised that cell phones and two-way radios be kept at least 5m away from control equipment (Blasters) during Programming, Arming and Firing as communication between the blaster and 4G detonators may be corrupted. 3.9.1.9. Inherent Safety CE4 Taggers are Inherently Safe because they cannot produce the necessary minimum required firing voltage or coded Fire command to initiate the electronic IntelliShot Detonator. In addition, the CE4 Tagger firmware does not contain the procedures or commands necessary to calibrate, arm or fire the detonator. 3.9.1.10. GPS The GPS location, and also the altitude and number of satellites found, will be displayed on the System Information screen. IntelliShot Commander System Limits 3.9.2.1. Channels Maximum of 4 Channels. 3.9.2.2. Maximum Dets per Channel 400 Detonators. A notification warning will be displayed when channel limits are exceeded. The system will still allow blasting to continue. Page 22 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 3.9.2.3. Maximum Dets per Bench IntelliShot Commander (4 Channels) 1600 Detonators. 3.9.2.4. Maximum Distance in Wi-Fi communicating to IntelliShot Commander 10m 3.9.2.5. Maximum Distance in RF mode between Base IntelliShot Commander and Bench IntelliShot Commander 3000m. 3.9.2.6. Maximum Harness wire between furthest IntelliShot Detonator and IntelliShot Bench Commander 2500m. 3.9.2.7. Maximum Distance in RF mode between IntelliShot Base Commander and Repeater/ Bench Commander and Repeater 6000m between the Base and Bench Commanders via Repeater placed between Commanders. IntelliShot Commander Specifications IntelliShot Commander is operated by 3.7V 7.2Ah single cell Lithium Polymer battery. 3.9.2.8.
-30C to +60C / -22F to +140F. The IntelliShot Commander can be used for approximately 8 hours at 25C. At temperatures below -
15C / -5F battery life may be reduced significantly. Operating time is influenced by detonator load, backlight settings and operational temperature. When the battery level of the IntelliShot Commander reaches 15%, a warning symbol will appear. Should the user choose to continue, the IntelliShot Commander will automatically switch off when the battery level reaches 3%. IntelliShot Commander Storage 3.9.2.9. It is recommended that the IntelliShot Commander be charged to 50% when placed into long-term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The IntelliShot Commander may be kept on charge for extended periods of time - the IntelliShot Commander will manage battery charging accordingly. The IntelliShot Commander may draw current up to 2 Amperes during charging, and an appropriately specified charger is therefore required it is recommended that the charger supplied with the IntelliShot Commander be used for charging the unit. 3.9.2.10. GPS GPS information displayed on System Information screen. Page 23 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 INTELLISHOT DETONATOR from 0 increments 4 The IntelliShot Detonator is a programmable detonator that is suitable for all types of blasting operations, especially those requiring precise and flexible timing and is programmable in 1ms to 20 000ms The IntelliShot Detonator is housed in a copper tube, which protects the circuit board and base charge. is The IntelliShot Detonator attached to a robust black and green two wire down-line cable filled which ends connector that clips on a surface harness wire. in a gel Down-Line wire coil Connector filled with waterproof gel IntelliShot Detonator Components Base charge H-Plug Copper tube Crimp plug Populated PCB Fuse Head Crimp Plug The crimp plug is a seal that is moulded onto the down-line wire preventing ingress of moisture and contaminantsinto the detonator tube between the down-line wire and crimp plug. Page 24 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) The PCB is an electronic module that houses components such as ASIC, resistors and a capacitor. ASIC:
The ASIC (Aplication Specific Integrated Circuitry) controls the functions of the detonator:
Resistors:
The resistors protect the detonator circuitry against external influences such as:
Over voltage, Over current, Electrostatic Discharge, Electromagnetic Pulse. Capacitor:
The capacitor is an energy storage device that stores the required energy for the detonator to function independently after the blast signal has been sent and the connection between the control equipment and detonator has been destroyed. Fusehead The Fusehead is an incendiary explosive device that acts as the interface between the electronics and the explosives base charge of the detonator. Protective H-Plug An anti-static H-plug that is used to centralise the PCB separates the base charge from the circuitry and prevent powder migration into the circuitry. It also protects the PCB from dynamic shock and static discharge. The second crimp is situated around the H-Plug and provides the seal which separates the explosive powders from the circuit board. Connector The Connector is used to connect the detonator down-line onto the surface harness-wire bus of the installation. The Connector has two spade connectors that ensures a secure connection on each harness-wire and has two grooves enabling the user to align each wire with these connectors and also facilitates ease of use. These connections are not polarity sensitive and can be connected in any configuration. The transparent polycarbonate connectors allow for improved visual inspection of the wires inside the connector to ensure correct connection. The connector is filled with a transparent gel to facilitate water resistance during use. It is advisable not to submerge connectors in water. Down-line wire The down-line wire is a cable comprising 2 steel, copper or Bi-metal wire conductors which are individually sheathed and an outer black and green insulation. The down-line wire is manufactured in various lengths and can be supplied to the users requirements. Page 25 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connecting Up Connector 1. Using one hand, hold the down-line wire with the connector facing away from your body. 2. With the other hand, pinch the locking clips together to release the connector and release the top lid. 3. Flip the connector lid open. 4. Ensure that there are no small stones and grit inside the connector. Locking Clip 5. Align the harness wire with the spade connectors inside the connector and pull the wires down. Guiding grooves on either side of the connector housing will facilitate the ease of this operation. 6. When closing the connector, ensure the connector clicks home to ensure a secure and proper connection and prevent the connector from opening Place connectors away from normal operational movement of vehicles and users. Walking or driving over these connectors will result in damaged connectors, requiring the replacement of detonators. Avoid contamination inside the connector by keeping the connector closed at all times before final connection to the harness-wire. Do not remove the gel because it assists with preventing moisture accumulating inside the connector that will lead to corrosion of the connectors and leakage. In addition, small stones and grit can cause damage to contacts causing loss of communication to the detonator. A connector that is not closed correctly could result in a poor connection which may cause communication problems with the detonator and ultimate misfire. Avoid contamination inside the connector by keeping the connector closed at all times. A connector that is not closed correctly could result in a poor connection which may cause communication problems with the detonator. Page 26 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Application of Detonator Refer to Application document OPI-00390 for guidelines. The guideline does not supersede those required by the local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of IntelliShot Detonators. In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. Handling Precautions Refer to the Electronic Detonator Material Data Sheet for detailed information on Precautions for safe handling, Conditions for safe storage, Disposal methods and Regulatory information. Storage Store IntelliShot Detonators in accordance with relevant regulatory/legal requirements. . Ensure no smoking or open flames near IntelliShot Detonators. Always keep storage facilities clean and dry. Ensure rotation of stock to use product with the specified shelf life. IntelliShot Detonator Care Avoid dropping or applying any physical shock to IntelliShot Detonators because all detonators are impact sensitive. The connector is splash proof; water inside the connector could cause leakage that could result in IntelliShot Detonators malfunctioning. Keep detonators a minimum of 0.1m from cellular phones and 2m away from handheld radios while priming and loading blastholes Keep detonators a minimum of 2m from cellular phones and 2 way radios when preparing for blasting as interference could cause the 4G Detonator to malfunction. Never attempt to open the IntelliShot Detonator as it could initiate. Keep the connectors closed when not in use to prevent corrosion of the connectors pins. Grit and dirt inside the connector could damage the connector pins and result in poor connection Explosives inside the connector may cause corrosion on the connector pins that could result in poor connection and leakage. 4G DETONATORS MAY ONLY BE CONNECTED TO THE THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL LEGISLATION AND PRESCRIBED BLASTING PRACTICES ON SITE WHICH MAY REQUIRE THE BENCH TO BE CLEARED FOR BLASTING BEFORE CONNECTION TO A BLAST DEVICE IS ALLOWED. Page 27 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Specifications Number of IntelliShot Detonators A maximum of 400 IntelliShot Detonators (dependent on down-hole wire length) can be accommodated per channel. Automated detonator capacity check Due to the expanded non-volatile memory capacity of the new IntelliShot Detonator, the cable length is now stored in the detonator during assembly. With this information stored in the detonator, the software on the Control Equipment will automatically verify the cumulative detonator down-hole length and warn the user should the installation limits be exceeded. Decking The system can accommodate decking applications with up to six decks and three 4G detonators per deck while using the Advanced and Planned Tagging Options. Maximum delay times and increments IntelliShot detonators can be programmed from 0ms to a maximum delay of 20 000ms in 1ms increments. Temperature Limitations The following temperature limitations apply to the IntelliShot Detonator:
-40C to +80C
-40F to +176F Storage Life and Equipment Life Store in a well-ventilated magazine suitably licensed for IMCO Class 1.1B or 1.4S (specified on packaging) and in accordance to specifications of the relevant Acts on the storage of explosives. The product has a 5 year shelf life from date of manufacture when stored in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements. Electrostatic Discharge, Over Voltage, Over Current and EMP Immunity LIKE ALL OTHER DETONATORS, INTELLISHOT DETONATORS ARE SENSITIVE TO SHOCK AND TEMPERATURE AND USERS MUST REFRAIN FROM EXPOSING THEM TO EXCESSIVE SHOCK AND HEAT. The IntelliShot Detonators have resistors which provide the following safety features:
Over voltage protection - Over current protection, Static - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP), As per SANS 1717-1 and CEN 13763-27 requirements. Page 28 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Safety The IntelliShot Detonator cannot be initiated by the CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger is incapable of producing the required firing voltage and cannot produce the required Fire command to initiate an IntelliShot Detonator. NEVER CONNECT ANY THIRD PARTY OR OTHER UNAPPROVED DETONATORS TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM. Safety Warnings User and Safety Tips Always keep connectors closed when not in use to avoid damage and/or contamination. Always ensure all the IntelliShot Detonators are connected to the system via the harness wire before leaving the bench. IntelliShot Detonators are impact sensitive and should always be handled with care. Risks HANDLE MECHANICALLY DAMAGED 4G DETONATOR AS PER APPROVED PROCEDURES. NEVER CONNECT THE 4G DETONATOR TO ANY UNAPPROVED VOLTAGE SOURCE. NEVER CONNECT THE 4G DETONATOR TO ANY EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN A CE4 TAGGER WHILE ON THE BENCH. THE 4G DETONATOR MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE COMMANDER AS PER LOCAL LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS AND PRESCRIBED BLASTING PRACTICES ON SITE WHICH MAY REQUIRE THE BENCH TO BE CLEARED FOR BLASTING BEFORE CONNECTION TO A BLAST DEVICE IS ALLOWED Destruction of 4G Detonators Refer to Destruction of Shot Detonators document OPI-202 for guidelines. The guideline does not supersede those required by local mine, explosives or statutory regulations/procedures/codes of practise regarding the use of 4G detonators In such cases, the MOST STRINGENT set of rules between the mine, explosives or local regulations/procedures/codes of practise and the manufacturer must be followed. Page 29 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5 CE4 TAGGER CE4 Tagger General Information The CE4 Tagger is a lightweight device that is powered by an internal rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer cell and equipped with a backlit screen and a keypad. The CE4 Tagger is used on the bench to test and configure the detonators by tagging the location of the detonators and assigning appropriate delays. The device is also used to establish a Wi-Fi link with an appropriate IntelliShot Commander in order to interface with the IntelliShot Commander. The CE4 Tagger features various user-interface elements including separate LEDs located above the LCD screen, a buzzer and a vibration motor to draw the users attention to the systems current state. The CE4 Tagger is incapable of producing sufficient voltage and the coded signal required to fire any detonators, thus rendering the CE4 Tagger inherently safe. Page 30 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Components Harness wire terminals Pogo Pin Connector Blue Status LED White Charge LED Red Error LED LCD Screen SoftKeys Navigation keys (yellow arrows) Enter key Backspace key Escape key On/Off key Numerical keys Figure 5: CE4 Tagger Component Identification USB connector Page 31 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Harness wire terminals The harness wire terminals are used to connect to detonator / surface harness wires. Pogo pins The Pogo pins are used to connect a single detonator, while testing and tagging holes. LEDs STATUS LED A Blue circular LED (
CHARGE LED A White DetNet Swirl shaped LED (
) which indicates the status of the CE4 Tagger.
) which indicates that the CE4 Tagger is charging. ERROR LED A Red triangular LED (
LCD Screen
) which indicates when an error is present. The LCD screen displays 128x128 pixels. If the device is used in environments where the temperature drops below -15C, heating of the LCD will be necessary and the internal heater pad will automatically switch on to heat the display. SoftKeys The SoftKeys will activate functions that appear at the bottom of the LCD screen, above the corresponding SoftKey, as an option in a menu. Navigation and Numerical keys The Yellow arrows ( ) on the keypad are the Navigation keys. The Up and Down Navigation Keys are also used to increase and decrease values in certain screens. The Numerical keys are used to enter numerical values and to select a function from the list of commands or menus. The top bar displayed on each screen will indicate the keyboard mapping mode designed for that screen. Enter key The Enter key is used to accept an on-screen activity/option. Backspace Key The Backspace key is used to delete the character to the left of the cursor. Page 32 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 On/Off key key to switch ON the CE4 Tagger. key while holding the Press Press To save battery power, the CE4 Tagger turns off automatically after a set period of idle operation. The auto power-
off time may be adjusted, within limits, by the user. key to switch the CE4 Tagger OFF. Esc key The Esc key is used to cancel and escape out of selected options. Function key key is a function key that is used in conjunction with other keys to perform specific functions. The USB connector port NO DETONATOR SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CE4 TAGGER WHILST THE TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO A CHARGER. The USB connector port will allow for charging of the battery and also for software upgrades and communication with a PC. To perform a software upgrade, plug a flash drive containing the new software version into the USB connector while the CE4 Tagger is switched off. Hold down any key
(Except the key) and then press the power ON button This will place the CE4 Tagger in bootloader mode and start the download of the new software. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software upgrade. Battery The CE4 Tagger uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer battery. Consult Section 5.7 for more details on the CE4 Tagger battery, charging and maintenance procedure. Audio Tones Audible feedback operates as follows:
A specific audio sample is played during the boot-up process A positive acknowledgement sound accompanies successful tasks An error acknowledgement sound accompanies errors or automatic power-off after a software timeout An informational sound accompanies other noteworthy events to draw the users attention to the screen Page 33 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Vibration Signals Error events are accompanied by a CE4 Tagger vibration sequence. Visual Signals LEDs will illuminate to visually signal a change to the user. A round blue LED (
) and a triangular red LED (
) will illuminate under the following conditions:
Successful tests or operations result in the blue led illuminating until a new operation is performed or until the screen is exited. Unsuccessful tests or operations result in the red LED flashing until a new operation is performed or until the screen is exited. When an error is accepted by the User, the red LED will switch off, and only if a test fails will the red LED flash. The red and blue LEDs will illuminate simultaneously only if the operation has completed but some error conditions (acknowledged by the user) have been encountered (example: tagging a det with a bad fuse). The DetNet Swirl shaped white LED will illuminate to indicate that the CE4 Tagger is charging. Real Time Clock (RTC) Function The CE4 Tagger contains an internal Real Time Clock (RTC), which is required for its operation and log keeping. The user should manually confirm/set the time-zone on the CE4 Tagger. The time is automatically updated via the internal GPS. NFC The CE4 Tagger (version 4 and later) is equipped with a Near Field Communication (NFC) reader located on the rear of the Tagger. NFC functionality will be activated in a future software release. Wireless Charging Wireless charging has been incorporated into the CE4 Tagger (version 4 and later) to allow the unit to be charged using a commercially available off-the-shelf Qi wireless charging pad. This will allow the user to charge the Tagger without the need for USB cables, and also ensures that the protective cover on the USB connector remains closed and sealed in harsh environments. The wireless charging receiver is situated on the rear of the Tagger. The receiver supports a power transfer of 5W and can charge the Tagger with a current of 500mA. Note that at the supported power transfer rate the Tagger will take longer to charge wirelessly than when connected to a USB cable / charger, where a charging current of up to 1A is supported Page 34 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Power CE4 Tagger ON and OFF CE4 Tagger Power-ON 1. 2. 3. 4. key. Press the ON The splash screen will display for approximately 1.5 seconds during the CE4 Tagger boot sequence. The system name will be displayed. The software release and hardware version number will be displayed similar to example shown. Release 36230B Hardware ver.3 ONLY TRAINED USERS SHALL BE ALLOWED TO USE THIS EQUIPMENT. 5. Warning will be displayed to indicate that the Tagger is due for service
(If applicable) Press the SoftKey to acknowledge and continue. 6. 7. Warning will be displayed indicating that Tagger must have a unique number which the user must acknowledge before proceeding Press the SoftKey to acknowledge and continue. Disclaimer will be displayed which the user must acknowledge before proceeding. SoftKey to acknowledge the Disclaimer. 8. 9. 10. Press the The charging screen will only be displayed when the CE4 Tagger is plugged into a USB, or external battery pack charging source. Pressing ESCAPE returns the user to the original screen and prevents this screen being shown again until the next power-on sequence. Page 35 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 to continue. Device password 11. Enter the Device password using the numerical keypad. 12. Press To prevent unauthorised use, the CE4 Tagger is assigned a default password by the manufacturer. The default password may be changed by the user and can be configured from the Settings menu. The user may reset the password with a ticket retrieved from DetNet Portal, should the password be previously set and the user does not recall the password. Entering value 0 as a password will remove the password-required step when starting the device. 13. Main Menu screen will be displayed. The main menu screen will vary dependant on the mode of operation. CE4 Tagger Power-OFF 14. Press and hold key and then press the key to power OFF CE4 Tagger. IN THE EVENT OF THE SOFTWARE NOT RESPONDING TO THE KEY, IT IS POSSIBLE TO FORCE THE CE4 TAGGER TO POWER OFF BY PRESSING AND HOLDING THE KEY FOR AT LEAST 10 SECONDS TO FORCIBLY POWER OFF THE CE4 TAGGER. NOTE THAT THIS ACTION MAY RESULT IN SETTINGS OR BLAST INFORMATION BEING LOST AND SHOULD NOT BE USED IN NORMAL PRACTICE AS HARD POWER DOWNS CAN LEAD TO DATA CORRUPTION OR LOSS. KEY IN COMBINATION WITH THE Page 36 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Menu Navigation Menu navigation is performed by directly pressing the associated menu item number key. This is indicated to the user by the 123 keyboard mode displayed in the top bar. Pressing escape will normally navigate to the previous menu. In some screens, such as Tagging, other keyboard modes may be appropriate e.g. an arrow notation may be displayed to indicate that options on the screen may be incremented or decremented using up and down arrow keys. The charging Icon power. will only be displayed while the CE4 Tagger is plugged into a Keyboard Mapping Mode Menu Title / List Heading Instructions and Information Interactive window SoftKey Menus Press the Numerical keys to enter numerical values or to select a function from the list of menus. The Yellow arrows are Navigation keys and are used to navigate during actions where it is required to move left, right, up or down in an active screen. The Up and Down Navigation Keys are also used to increase and decrease values in certain screens. Use the SoftKeys to select soft menu options. Soft menu options will appear as icons at the bottom of the LCD screen directly above the corresponding SoftKey, as an option in a menu. Press the corresponding SoftKey to perform the indicated function. Press the Press the key to confirm an instruction. key to cancel an instruction. CE4 Tagger Common User Interface Conventions The CE4 Tagger screens support standard conventions of interaction as detailed below:
5.4.1.1. Box Numeric input When a default number is displayed on the screen, any numeric keyboard input will replace the existing number entirely. Pressing Enter will move to the next field, if any Pressing Escape will exit the numeric field and consequently also the active screen if it cannot continue without the required input. The Backspace key will delete the rightmost character, including that of a default number if present. Escape will not return a changed numeric input field to the original value. Pressing escape will exit the menu. Page 37 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Scrolled Numeric input 5.4.1.2. Fixed range numeric input may be scrolled if indicated by up/down arrows associated with the field:
Pressing the Up key (2) increments the number, if possible. Pressing the Down key (8) decrements the number, if possible. 5.4.1.3. Navigation Navigation follows the conventions of DigiShot to ease migration as detailed below:
Menus are selected by pressing the appropriate numeric key directly. Soft-keys perform the indicated function. Escape exits the current field or screen, as appropriate. Arrow keys may be used to move in selected lists or scroll selected lists e.g. the detonator list. Arrow keys may also jump between selected fields in specific screens, typically those involving configuration settings. Table 2: CE4 Tagger Icon Shortcut Keys and Commander Icons ICON / KEYSTROKES DESCRIPTION
&
&
Press both the Function & Escape keys to disconnect the Tagger from the Commander Press both Function and Enter keys while in the main menu to connect Tagger to the Commander Press Hash to display errors / View Notifications screen Number of commanders connected Amount of detonators (Per Commander)
&
Errors exist. Press hash (#) key. Wait Not ready yet Info Return to SAFE (Abort) Fire Button(s) Force fire buttons (Should the last det check fail, the User can force the blast with blast override password) Fire keys Disabled Busy with background tasks Page 38 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Menu Quick Reference Info Screen Battery/Current/Temp/Humidity HW serial no/SW release GPS data/Satellites/Altitude User ID Table 3: CE4 Tagger Menu Reference Main Menu 1. New design 2. Tag detonators 3. Test menu 4. View design 5. Mark detonators 6. Assign ViewShot - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only 7. Verify Plan - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only Configuration 1. 4G Setup 2. Device Setup 3. Advanced Setup 4. Factory Setup Table 4: CE4 Tagger Main Menu Reference 1-New Design 2 -Tag detonators 3-Test Menu 4-View Design/Plan 5-Mark Detonators Warning Displayed: Do you want to clear the list? Y/N Main Menu is presented. This will clear the tagged detonator list and not the ViewShot design Warning Displayed:
Connect one det at a time If No plan available. Use ViewShot 3D to download a plan!
Tagging detail settings 3.1. Test All 3.2. Test String 3.3. Test Single Det 3.4. Leakage Test 3.5. Untagged Test 3.6. Search Dets 4.1. List Detonators 4.2. List Missing Dets 4.3. List New Dets 4.4. List Bad Status 4.5. Duplicate Location 4.6- Blast Summary 5.1. End of Line 5.2. Start of Row 5.3. End of Row 5.4. Inflection Pt. 5.5. Remove Mark Page 39 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 6- Assign ViewShot - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only 7- Verify Plan - Available in Planned (P) tagging option only No detonators message is displayed if the detonator list (tagged) is empty 6.1. List Detonators Message displayed: Verification Complete 7.1. Verify Plan 7.2. Verify Delays 7.3. Show Results 7.4. Merge Plan Table 5: CE4 Tagger Configuration Menu Reference
.1: 4G Setup
.1.1. Tag Option Select:
Basic (B) Advanced (A) Planned (P)
.1.2. Site Setup Use Markers (B/A/P) Multi-Commander (A/B/P) Autotag (A/P) Multi Primed (A) Assign Locations (A) List Hole Config (A/ P) Det Label (A/ P) Delete ViewShot (P)
.1.3. Leakage Trigger Select leakage warning trigger (Between 0.1 and 1mA)
.2: Device Setup
.3: Advanced Setup 2.1. Contrast 2.2. Brightness 2.3. Time Zone 2.4. Timeouts 2.5. Language 2.6. Units 3.1. Tagger ID 3.2. Connections 3.3. Remote View 3.4. Clear Tags 3.5. Device Password 3.6. Read All Det Data 3.7. Max Wire length Page 40 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5
.4: Factory Setup 1. Clear Tags 2. Clear Logs 3. Leakage Calibrate 4. Start Self-Test 5. Experimental Menu 6. Storage Mode 7. Connector Type 8. Reset Service Date 9. SD Card Dump The Factory Setup Menu is password protected and not for normal use. It is required to access the Factory Setup only. Page 41 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Accessories External Battery Pack The External Battery Pack is an optional accessory used to increase the capacity of the internal battery when operating in sub-zero temperatures or other environments that demand extended operating times. The Internal Heater Pad can operate with the internal polymer battery, independently of the external battery pack, and will switch ON when the temperature drops below -15C. External Battery Pack enclosure is attached to the back of the CE4 Tagger by four retaining screws. Six batteries are fitted in the bottom of the External Battery Pack. A cover closes the battery bay. Replace using 6 x 1.5V AA Alkaline or 6 x 1.2V Ni-MH / Ni-Cd batteries only. Closed External Battery Pack fitted to the CE4 Tagger. Figure 6: CE4 Tagger External Battery Pack Page 42 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Replaceable Top Connectors The Top Connector contains the pogo pins, used for tagging the detonators (one detonator at a time) It also consists of the Harness wire terminals, used to connect to the detonator harness wire (multiple detonators on the same wire bus). THIS PART SHOULD BE REPLACED IN A CLEAN ENVIRONMENT. Figure 7: CE4 Tagger Top Connector Always keep the contacts clean and free of contamination. The Top Connector may be ordered separately and is easily replaceable should the contacts become worn and/or damaged, through prolonged use. Page 43 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Surface Harness Wire The Surface harness wire consists of a pair of yellow and green individually sheathed copper wire, 0.63mm in diameter. Figure 8: Surface Harness Wire IntelliShot Detonators are connected to the surface harness wire to enable communication with control equipment. The maximum length of 2-wire surface harness per channel, including the lead-in wire used to connect shall not exceed 2500m. BY EXCEEDING THIS LIMIT THE INHERENT RESISTANCE ON THE HARNESS WIRE WILL INCREASE RESULTING IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SECURELY TWISTED AND INSULATED TO PREVENT INTERMITTENT CONNECTIONS, SHORT CIRCUITS AND EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE. THESE CAN BE A MAJOR SOURCE OF TROUBLE CAUSING POTENTIAL MISFIRES. Page 44 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Battery The CE4 Tagger uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer cell battery. The CE4 Tagger battery compartment is sealed to prevent moisture ingression and condensation which could cause corrosion and or short circuits within the CE4 Tagger resulting in a possible malfunction or an unreliable CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger is tested to an IP 57 rating. NO DETONATOR SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE CE4 TAGGER WHILST CONNECTED TO A CHARGER. The battery is not replaceable in the field and should only be replaced by a DetNet qualified technician. Charging the CE4 Tagger Connect the USB cable between the mini USB port on the CE4 Tagger and a Personal Computer or use a DetNet Universal charger to charge the CE4 Tagger. The CE4 Tagger will automatically start charging as soon as the USB connector port is plugged into a USB socket. A battery level indication will be displayed during charging. The CE4 Tagger may not charge sufficiently if the CE4 Tagger is connected to a weak charger or damaged USB port. The charging circuit of the CE4 Tagger may require as much as 1A for charging. It is recommended that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 100% before use, to allow for maximum operating time . IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CE4 TAGGER BE CHARGED TO 50% WHEN PLACED INTO STORAGE, AND THEREAFTER THE UNIT SHOULD BE CHARGED AT LEAST EVERY SIX MONTHS TO 50%, TO MAINTAIN THE EXPECTED LIFETIME OF THE BATTERY. REFER TO CE4 TAGGER STORAGE MODE UNDER ADVANCED SETUP FOR MORE DETAIL. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 45 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Low Battery Once the battery has discharged to 9%, the CE4 Tagger will display the message icon in the top bar indicating a possible low battery condition. (The message Icon is active for any fault condition). The CE4 Tagger will automatically switch off when the battery capacity drops below 3%. button to view Notifications screen. Press Screen will display Low Battery!
Press Exit SoftKey to return to previous screen. Battery Information The user may navigate to the System information screen (detailed in paragraph 6.1.1) to check that the CE4 Tagger is being charged and to verify the state of health of the battery. Page 46 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger Storage Mode The CE4 Tagger storage process is to be followed when the CE4 Tagger will be stored for an extended period of time. It is recommend that the CE4 Tagger be charged to 50% when put into storage and thereafter the unit should be charged at least every six months to 50%, to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. Store the CE4 Tagger in a cool, dry place when not in use. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey below to select Configuration Settings Menu. 2. From Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Factory Setup. 3. 4. Factory Password Enter Factory Password Press to select Factory Setup Menu Factory Setup Menu Press key to select Storage Mode DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 47 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Storage Mode When the battery capacity is more than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will discharge the battery by activating various battery consuming functions such as the heating pad, to accelerate the discharge level to the required 50% charge level. When the battery capacity is less than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will prompt the user to connect a charger to attain the required 50% charge level. When the CE4 Tagger reaches the 50% battery storage capacity as required, it will switch off automatically allowing for safe storage. Page 48 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 6 CE4 TAGGER SYSTEM INFORMATION This function enables the user to view battery charge information, current consumption, state-of-health of the battery, temperature information, hardware and software serial numbers, GPS detail and User ID. SoftKey to view the CE4 Tagger System Information System Info From the Main Menu, press System Info - Battery 95%: Battery charge information (USB = the charging source). Should the charger not be able to supply enough power to charge the CE4 Tagger, Weak Charger will be indicated as the charging status, instead of Charging (USB). Current Consumption: By convention a negative value indicates that current is being drawn from the battery. Cell Status: (Good) indicates the state of health of the battery. Should the status indicate Low the unit should be serviced to have the battery replaced. The CE4 Tagger will switch OFF automatically when the battery capacity drops below 3%.
(The CE4 Tagger will display a warning at 9% and switch OFF at 3%). System Info - Temperature and the Relative Humidity The Temperature and the Relative Humidity as measured inside the CE4 Tagger are displayed as follows:
Temperature: The Temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit (Dependant on Units Setting under Device Setup). Humidity: The Relative Humidity is displayed as a percentage. System Info - Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number Hardware Serial Number will be displayed, and Software Release Number will be displayed. Press to select next page. 36230B Page 49 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Hardware Serial number is required when Challenge Response tickets are required from the DetNet Portal. System Info - GPS Detail The GPS location will be displayed. Altitude and the number of satellites found will also be displayed. Press to select next page. System Info User ID Press Use alphanumeric characters to enter a User ID. Press SoftKey to enter or edit User ID. to select next page. The User ID may be used to identify ownership of the CE4 Tagger such as the User name or Site name/code where used. Page 50 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 7 CE4 TAGGER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS CE4 Tagger 4G Setup Configuration Tag Option The Tag Option will allow the User to select one of the following three tagging options:
Basic (B) Advanced (A) Planned (P) A corresponding symbol (B, A or P) will be displayed in the top bar once the tag option is set. 1. 2. 3. 4. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Tag Option Tag Option Use navigational keys to scroll up/down and display the required selection as follows:
Press SoftKey to save option as required. Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 51 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Site Setup Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Site Setup 1. 2. 3. The Site Setup is dependent on the Tagging Option and in this menu, the user may allow certain functions to be active when tagging. Advanced mode has more advanced features and can be used with multi-primed or decked holes. Detail about decking and hole configuration can be found further in this document where Advanced mode is detailed Site Setup 4. Site Setup screen for each (Basic, Advanced and Planned) tagging mode are depicted below. Use Markers: When the Use Markers option is enabled (Black filled rectangle) the tagging screen will contain a SoftKey to allow the simultaneous marking and tagging of a detonator. Mark detonators menu includes more types of markers besides End of Line which typically is assigned to the detonator connected last on a wire harness. Multi-Commander: When this option is selected, the user may tag more than 4 channels and up to 16000 detonators on a single Tagger. If not selected it will stop and provide a warning when more than 4 channels are allocated and more than 1600 detonators are being tagged. Page 52 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Autotag: If the Autotag option is disabled (White filled rectangle), tagging can only be performed on the pogo pins, and not by connecting a detonator onto the harness wire. (It is not practical to connect and then remove the detonator from the harness wires). Multi-Primed: When this item is enabled one can load more than one detonator per hole and tagging can also be restricted to a deck only if necessary. . Assign Locations: With large blast designs, the plan may not be complete at the time of tagging and to speed up the process, tagging can be conducted in parallel with drilling. If this item is checked, the Tag Detonators menu will only write the locations in the detonator. When the plan is available later, the tagging must be completed using the tagger to Assign Delays (as the commander does not have the option to time dets) in order to prepare the detonators for the blast. List Hole Configuration: Allows users to define a hole configuration. A hole configuration consists of the number of decks in a hole, the number of detonators in each deck and the time offset of each deck. The system allows more than one hole configuration to be defined but only one can be employed at the time of tagging. Det Label: The label defines how the hole (det) is referred to throughout the system. The following choices are available:
1. Row number, hole number, det number 2. Literal row, hole number, det number 3. Hole Number, det number 4. Numeric sequence (used internally in basic mode)*
Delete ViewShot: This option allows for the previously saved ViewShot plan to be deleted from the Tagger memory. Refer to individual Tag Options in the Tagging Operation section (Chapter 10) of this manual where detail is provided regarding the Site Setup. This will differ according to the type of Tagging Option selected. Page 53 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Leakage Trigger The user could set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered. This limit could be set from 0.1 mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press to select Leakage Trigger Use navigational keys to scroll up/down and display the required selection Set warning trigger between 0.1 and 1mA Press SoftKey to save. Page 54 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Device Setup This menu will allow the user to adjust device specific settings. The following options are available:
1. Contrast 2. Brightness 3. Time Zone 4. Time Outs 5. Language 6. Units Contrast This function enables the user to adjust the LCD screen contrast. The contrast adjusts as the value changes but the setting will only be saved permanently when the SoftKey is pressed. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. 3. Device Setup Press to select Contrast. 4. Contrast Use the arrow key Adjust to ensure the displayed contrast blocks are distinguishable to allow to adjust contrast. viewing greyed out versus bold items. If the contrast is either too high or too low, these font differences will not be notable. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 55 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Brightness The Brightness menu allows the LCD screen display brightness to be adjusted using the arrow keys. The Brightness adjusts as the value changes but the setting will only be saved permanently when the SoftKey is pressed. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Brightness. Adjusting the Brightness Use the arrow Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. keys to adjust brightness. 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 56 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Time Zone This function enables the user to define the time zone. Date/time settings are controlled by GPS GMT data but, since the time zone is not configured automatically, it should always be set by the user in order to ensure the correct time display. The time zones may be adjusted in 0.5 hour increments. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Time Zone. Set Time Zone Use the arrow key to navigate the Time Zone options (Time zone can be adjusted in 0.5h increments). Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 57 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Timeouts This function enables the user to set a time period of inactivity before the CE4 Tagger will automatically power off to conserve battery power. The user can set the idle time between 2 to 120 minutes. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Timeouts. Auto Shutdown Use navigational keys to navigate selection. o Minimum of 2 minutes. o Maximum of 120 minutes. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 58 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Language This function enables the user to select a language preference for the CE4 Tagger menus. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Language. Language Press Press Press Press on the keypad to select English. on the keypad to select Espaol. on the keypad to select Franais. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 59 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Units This function enables the user to select either the Imperial or Metric Units of Measure as preferred. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Device Setup. Device Setup Press to select Units. Units Use Press Press navigational keys to toggle selection. to select either Imperial or Metric. SoftKey to save. Page 60 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 8 CE4 TAGGER ADVANCED SETUP The Advanced Setup Menu displays the following options:
1. Tagger ID 2. Connections 3. Remote View 4. Clear Tags 5. Device Password 6. Read all det data (trouble shooting option) 7. Max Wire Length Tagger ID This function enables the user to set a unique Tagger ID that is used for device identification and RF communication. The Tagger ID should be unique amongst all Taggers at a site. IDs from 1 to 10 are supported. The current CE4 Tagger ID is displayed on the right side of the top bar on the screen (#1 in the screen depicted below). WHEN USING MULTIPLE TAGGERS ON THE SAME BLAST, ENSURE THAT TAGGER IDS ARE UNIQUE AS TAGGERS USING THE SAME ID WILL CAUSE ERRORS ON THE BLAST. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. 1. 2. Page 61 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 3. 4. Advanced Setup Press to select Tagger ID Tagger ID Use numerical keypad to enter Unique Tagger ID between 1 and 10. Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 62 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connections This function enables the user to activate the Wi-Fi and/or USB module allowing the Tagger to communicate with other equipment. Additional software for a PC may be required from the manufacturer to support this feature. USB cable or Wi-Fi must be connected, and the PC software must be configured and activated before this function can be used. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press Press Press on the keypad to connect Tagger to PC via Wi-Fi. on the keypad to connect Tagger to Commander via Wi-Fi on the keypad to connect Tagger to PC via USB During initial connection with a PC, the device will be displayed on the PC Wi-Fi List and will require a Password to connect. Use Generic Password: 145634235. Subsequent connections will connect automatically. 1. 2. 3. 4. Page 63 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connect Tagger to PC via Wi-Fi To establish Wi-Fi connectivity between the CE4 Tagger and a PC, the PC must be equipped with the required Wi-Fi functionality and corresponding software. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via Wi-Fi. PC via Wi-Fi CE4 Tagger will search for access point on PC CE4 Tagger will connect to the PC Follow on-screen prompts to connect to CE4 Tagger Access point Wi-Fi 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 64 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connect CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Wi-Fi Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connect to Press via Wi-Fi. on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander Commander via Wi-Fi Enter the Commanders ID using the keypad to connect Press Enter Commanders ID will also be displayed if Commander is not found to continue while attempting to connect. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Only one Commander with selected ID must be active when connected. When connectivity is established between the CE4 Tagger and the Commander an audible Bling and subsequent Tock sound should be heard for every button press. Page 65 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 CE4 Tagger will connect to the selected IntelliShot Commander Shortcut key combination is available from the Tagger main menu to connect the CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Wi-Fi menu as follows:
Press and hold key and then press the key to connect. Press and hold key and then press the key to disconnect. Page 66 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB. USB Link with PC The CE4 Tagger will wait for the connection to be established and the following messages will appear:
Ready for PC Connect USB cable between PC and CE4 Tagger Connected to PC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Page 67 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Remote View This function enables the user to demonstrate the CE4 Tagger in action by replicating the screen on a PC. It may be used by trainers, product presenters and document writers. Additional PC software may be required from the manufacturer to support this feature. USB cable or Wi-Fi must be connected, and the PC software must be configured and activated before the Remote View function can be used. Select Remote View on CE4 Tagger Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Remote View. Screen Capture to Enable on USB when prompted Press CE4 Tagger actions will be replicated on the PC screen Press to disable remote view. 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 68 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Initiate Remote View on PC 1. Open the Remote View software application on the PC 2. Click on Connect tab 3. Select either Serial Port or Wi-Fi as required from option 4. Ensure CE4 Tagger is switched ON Connect USB cable between CE4 Tagger and PC Click OK to continue Connect Device Select Serial (COM) Port from dropdown list Click OK to continue 5. Navigate to Advanced Setup/ Remote View on CE4 Tagger to select Remote View 6. Press 7. Press 8. Remote View will be displayed on PC to enable Remote View on PC via USB Page 69 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Clear Tags This function enables the user to clear the detonator memory and remove the tag that was assigned. After the process completes the detonators will contain the factory ID that they were shipped with. Connect the harness wire to the Harness wire terminals of the CE4 Tagger. The detonators should remain connected to the Harness wire during the process. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Clear Tags Clear Tags An information screen will be displayed. Press Press SoftKey to erase all detonators tags for connected detonators. SoftKey to exit without clearing detonators. 5. When SoftKey was selected, Det tags cleared message will be displayed to indicate that Tags have been cleared. Press SoftKey to return to Advanced Setup Menu. 6. Use this feature with caution. Once all det tags are cleared, the detonators will need to be re-tagged from the start, which will be time consuming. Page 70 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Device Password The CE4 Tagger is protected from unauthorised use by assigning a password. This function enables the user to change the default password by assigning a new unique password that is known only to the user. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Device Password Passwords Use the numerical keypad to enter Current Password. Press Use the numerical keypad to enter New Password. to confirm. Leave blank and press requirement during start-up of the Tagger for NO password Information message confirming password changed will be displayed briefly. to confirm. Press Passwords CE4 Tagger will display Passwords Screen. Press Press to return to Advanced Menu. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. The Password should be changed regularly to maintain security. Unlike conventional password entry, the chosen password is visible to the user (rather than ****) to enable the user to see if any typing errors are being made. Page 71 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Read All Detonator Data This function was designed for debug purposes and it captures the data from a single detonator in the Tagger logs. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Read All Det Data Read All Det Data Connect a single detonator to the pogo pins or spring terminals Tagger will indicate the test progress. Detonator information will be recorded in the Tagger logs Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 72 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Maximum Wire Length This function enables the user to set the maximum detonator wire length on a particular string. When the total detonator wire length on a particular string exceeds the set maximum wire limit, a system notification warning will be triggered. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. 3. 4. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Max Wire length Max Wire length Use numerical keypad to enter maximum wire length. Default is 10000m Page 73 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 9 CE4 TAGGER FACTORY SETUP 1. 2. 3. 4. The Factory Setup is password protected and may only be accessed by designated maintenance teams. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Factory Setup. Use numerical keypad Password. Press ENTER to continue. to enter Unique Tagger Factory Setup Menu Factory Setup will be displayed. Press Press to go to next page. to return to previous page. Page 74 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Web Ticket Press required Menu option. Obtain Ticket to continue. With the exception of the storage mode function, each option is protected by its own web-based ticket system. If no active ticket is available for the chosen option (as stored on the tagger), the user is prompted for a ticket issued by portal.detnet.com. The ticket is comprised of two 10-digit numbers that need to be entered before continuing. If the ticket is valid, access will be granted to the given function. Tickets can be issued for a selected number of repeated uses before a given expiry date. Tickets issued are specific to a given CE4 Tagger as determined by the hardware serial number, thus allowing flexible control over protected features. Page 75 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 1. 2. 3. 4. Factory Setup Menu Options Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Factory Setup. Use numerical keypad to enter Unique Tagger Password. Press ENTER to continue. Factory Setup Menu Factory Setup will be displayed. Press Press to go to next page. to return to previous page. Page 76 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Each Factory menu option is described below:
Clear Tags (Factory) The factory clear tags option allows any connected detonators to be rewritten to the factory untagged ID. Clear Logs (Factory) The clear logs option erases the internal log and will display a confirmation dialog briefly. Leakage Calibrate (Factory) The Leakage Calibration option recalculates the leakage and current offsets by measuring the current and leakage with no detonators connected. It functions in the same fashion as the leakage test screen, except that it initially shows a leakage calibrate dialog briefly and then proceeds to the leakage screen. Start Self-Test (Factory) The self-test function starts a factory self-test of the device. Experimental Menu (Factory) The Experimental Menu option will contain any experimental functions that are required by the engineering team only. Storage Mode This item is not web-ticket protected. Please refer to Chapter 5.8 for detail. Connector Type (Factory) This option will allow the user to select the replaceable Top Connector Type as fitted to the CE4 Tagger. Reset Service Date (Factory) The option will reset the maintenance schedule warning. SD Card Dump (Factory) This option will dump all content on the SD card via the USB. 5. Page 77 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 10 TAGGING OPERATIONS Always clear the tagged detonator list whenever a new tagging process is started. From the Main Menu, select NEW DESIGN and confirm that the list needs to be cleared. From the Main Menu, select NEW DESIGN and confirm that the list needs to be cleared Tagging allows the User to tag detonators in various configurations. To cater for specific user requirements, refer to Chapter 7.1.1 - CE4 Tagger Setup Configuration to configure the required Tag Option as some features displayed on-screen may not be applicable to a particular tagging option. COMMANDER SYSTEM TAGGING PRINCIPLE The main principle of tagging in the IntelliShot Commander System is to assign a delay for each detonator tagged. To make the detonator uniquely identifiable in the blast, the CE4 Tagger writes an ID in the detonator. A part of the ID written in the detonator reveals the CE4 Tagger ID involved in the assignment. The tagging process for the entire blast may be shared by multiple CE4 Taggers. Each CE4 Tagger MUST be uniquely identified, i.e. no two CE4 Taggers may have the same Device ID. Each CE4 Tagger can contain a maximum of 16000 Detonators in storage/memory. Only 400 dets (one String) could physically be tested at a time on a Tagger. For tracking and troubleshooting purposes, the CE4 Tagger can also write a location in the detonator memory. This location can be a number only (referred to as sequence) or may be a fully descriptive position of a detonator in the blast as Row (number), Hole (number) and Det (number) in a hole. When tagging a detonator, the record is automatically appended to an internal list and saved on the persistent data storage card. Basic. The BASIC tagging option (B) is offered to make the tagging simpler and also suitable for smaller applications. Page 78 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Advanced The Advanced Mode option is more complex than the Basic Mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and the user will need to control several parameters within this mode. To define a hole configuration the Site Setup screen will need to be accessed. The Advanced (A) Tagging option also allows the user to tag detonators using Detonator Label methods as follows:
Method 1: {NNNNN} {N}, a hole number and det number is assigned Method 2: {NNN} {NNN} {N} a group number depicted as Row number, hole number and det number is used. Method 3: {AA} {NNN} {N}, a user configurable 2 letter group number, hole number and det number is assigned. Method 4: {A} {NNNNN} {N}, a user configurable single letter group number, hole number and det number is assigned. Tag by Plan. With the Planned (P) tagging option, both the location and a delay must be written into the detonator. The data written into the detonator is taken from a plan downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via ViewShot 3D. When exporting the design from ViewShot 3D as Send Plan Locations Only (4G Only), only the connection sequence and blasthole numbers will be exported to the tagger. Manual locations can also be deployed separately from delays by using Advanced mode with Assign Location setting checked. This feature can be used when the delays are not yet known. Delays can be deployed to the tagged detonators later in Planned mode, using the available plan based on location matching. Page 79 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 BASIC (B) TAGGING OPTION With the BASIC tagging option, the user needs to only concentrate on the Delay value assigned to the detonator. The BASIC option is best suited for single primed hole blasts. It is advised to use only one Tagger per Commander when the Basic Tagging Option is used. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators Tag Detonators Warning Press OK SoftKey to acknowledge warning This detonator warning message will only be displayed when the user opens the tagging screen on the initial start-up of the device. From the Tag Detonators Option 2. The user will be prompted to configure the Tagger with the desired String ID and new starting Sequence Number when tagging Observe String ID (1 depicted on screen) Enter new String ID (2 depicted on next screen) Press Press Enter new starting Sequence # as required to save new starting Sequence #
to save new String ID The User may bypass the above procedure if required and Press the display the following Enter Delay screen. SoftKey to Page 80 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 3. Enter desired delay Use the keypad to enter the delay in ms to continue String Number 2 Total Count of detonators tagged Connect detonator and press ST2
#1 100m Total down wire length Detonator number and delay entered will be displayed Tagger will be ready state to enter next detonator delay 4. Enter desired delay for following detonators Use the keypad to enter the delay in ms Connect next detonator and press Detonator number and delay entered will be displayed Tagger will be ready state to enter next detonator delay to continue 5. Enter the required delay values for all detonators to be tagged and press each entry to save and move to next field. after Page 81 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Mark Detonators With the IntelliShot Commander System it is recommended that the user mark the detonator that will be placed at the end of the harness wire, as the Bench Commander will verify the voltage level of this detonator just before presenting firing buttons. Each String should have 1 detonator marked as End of Line. The other types of marking are not explicitly used in this version of the system although it is planned to use it in a future release of the software. They would typically indicate that specific points of the blast have been captured and also indicate if a change of plan (delays and increments) is required. 1. 2. From the Main Menu Press to select Mark Detonators From Mark Detonators Menu Press Press Press Press Press Press Cancel SoftKey to return to Main Menu Press Apply SoftKey to apply the setting. to select/deselect End of Line to select/deselect Start of Row to select/deselect End of Row to select/deselect Inflection Point to Remove Mark from previously marked Detonator Page 82 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 10.2.1.1. Multiple Last-Det assignment From List Detonators Menu Select detonators to be assigned as Last Det Press Enter Press Set as Last Det Multiple last detonator will be set and displayed SoftKey Page 83 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 PLANNED (P) TAGGING OPTION With the Planned (P) tagging option, both the location and a delay must be written into the detonator. The data written into the detonator is taken from a plan downloaded into the CE4 Tagger via ViewShot 3D. If the delay plan is not yet known, but the holes are drilled at known locations one can tag the blast in 2 steps. The first step is to deploy the known locations by exporting the pattern from ViewShot 3D as Plan Location Only Delays can be deployed or updated to the tagged dets later using an updated ViewShot plan. To assign/update the delays, one must enter Assign ViewShot menu which is on the main menu. The user needs to ensure that he/she is at the correct location before tagging the detonator. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators If the CE4 Tagger does not detect a downloaded ViewShot plan, the user will be prompted to download a plan. Page 84 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connect the CE4 Tagger to the PC 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. 2. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. 3. Advanced Setup Menu Press to select Connections. 4. Connections Press on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to PC via USB. 5. USB Link with PC Ready for PC Connect USB cable between PC and CE4 Tagger Connected to PC Page 85 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Download the Plan (via ViewShot 3D) Download the Plan (via ViewShot 3D on the PC) onto the CE4 Tagger to enable the use of the Tag by Plan option. Refer to the ViewShot 3D User Manual for detail 1. Open ViewShot 3D on the PC 2. Press NEW DESIGN to start the application Select 4G System 3. Design Plan Import the .CSV file Page 86 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Create the timing design Create the tag path for each string 4. Send design to the (Tagger) Click on FILE Click Device Communication Select either Send Plan Locations Only or Send to Device Enter YES to continue Page 87 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Select the required rows
(For individual taggers) or rows Include all rows by clicking on the >> button when a single Tagger is used 6. Select 4G System Tagger and press CONNECT 7. Press the SEND Button 8. The CE4 Tagger will receive the Plan via ViewShot 3D and the user will be able to tag by plan. Page 88 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 View the downloaded design on the CE4 Tagger 1. From the Main Menu Press to select View Design. 2. View Plan The ViewShot 3D plan will be displayed as a list. 3. Users may exercise the functions on the Soft-Keys such as Plan Summary to check that all the detonators are captured in the plan. 4. Plan Summery screen will be displayed Page 89 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Select Start Position When tagging by following a plan, the user is expected to follow the path determined by a row or a tagging path (ViewShot 3D). To allow the user to select a starting position / Row, Hole and Det number, the planned list is displayed. Only the remaining (untagged) positions will be displayed in this list. The screen presented here can also be recalled in the Tagging screen / configuration SoftKey. The user will be prompted to select the starting position from the list. Only the detonator situated at the top position in the list can be selected. Selection in a list is displayed as white text on black background The keyboard mapping mode at the top of the screen indicates navigation by arrows. Use Use keys Press keys to navigate by one up/down. and to navigate to previous/next page (6 locations displayed per page). or key once the selected position is made to return to tagging screen. Table 6: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Select Position Filter the list:
The list may be filtered by Row, String, Channel or Hole Search the list:
Search for the number within the parameter as set by the Filter #
Sort in Tag order:
Unsorted (according to Tag path), Reversed order (starting at the end of the string), Acending (starting at the highest hole number and tagging backwards in sequencial hole numbers) or Decending (starting at the lowest hole number and tagging forward in sequencial hole numbers). Amend the plan. If required to adjust the time for a particular hole/detonator or delete a detonator from the list. The deleted detonators will be skipped when tagging. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 90 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Tag by Plan Screen 1. Connect the detonator and press the 2. key to tag The screen will confirm the tagged detonator and display details as tagged. Observe Autotag status Screen Instruction : Enter From this screen, the user will have two options:
to tag next detonator Return to the list, or Stay in the current screen (Waiting for user to connect the next detonator). Observe that the current implementation remains in the tagging screen and adjusts the parameters according to the next position in the list which can be verified by pressing on tag configuration SoftKey. SoftKey from the tagging screen to return to the list. 3. Press tag configuration 4. To skip a position (mark as deleted) while tagging, the user must navigate to the panel of SoftKeys that contains the Add/Delete + and - Icons. 5. Press the indicated SoftKey to mark the current location as deleted in the tagging list, the tagging screen will be updated with the next location as illustrated in this example 6. To skip over the current location without deleting it, scroll up or down the lagging list by using the buttons Page 91 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Table 7: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Tag By Plan Option Tag Configuration Toggle Autotag *
Tagging Screen Information Test Single Det with harness connected Display the current tagged list Undo the last detonator tagged Skip or add det and or shothole Next Page String Statistics Assigning ViewShot 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Assign ViewShot.
?
Undo
+ -
>>
When the locations have been tagged separately, the detonators will not be ready to be connected to the Commander. To deploy the delays, the Tagger needs a plan (with updated delays) that matches the actual locations already deployed. By executing Assign ViewShot from the main menu, the Tagger will check every detonator recorded in the tagged list against the ViewShot plan (loaded on the Tagger). If the delay in the detonator does not match the plan, the new delay will be tagged in the detonator and the ViewShot plan will be updated with a checked mark against the matching record. Page 92 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Verify Plan This menu option is only available for the Planned mode context. 2. From the Main Menu Press to select Verify Plan. The list of tagged detonators is compared with the actual plan. The user can view the updates in the View Plan menu. All detonators that do not match the plan are flagged in the list (Listed as new and indicated by asterisk). Matching positions are also marked off as completed, (a checked sign) if location and delay are matched and just a tag symbol if only location is matched but not the delay. Verify Delays Times as in the Plan correspond to detlist Show results Actioned Delay results are displayed Merge Plan The Merge Plan option will merge all deleted/added detonators to the plan. Page 93 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 ADVANCED (A) TAGGING OPTION The Advanced Tagging option is used in situations where there is only a paper plan available and when holes are decked or multi-primed. Always clear the list when starting a new tagging process. From the Main Menu, select New Design and confirm that list needs to be cleared. Advanced Mode The Advanced Mode option, as the name suggests, includes more features than the Basic Mode as it allows for multi-primed holes and the user will need to control several parameters within this mode. To define a hole configuration the Site Setup screen needs to be accessed. The Advanced Mode option is NOT recommended if the user does NOT have a paper plan. The emphasis with this tagging option is on DELAY, since location is used for tracking purposes. 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) Page 94 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Press + SoftKey to add to the list of hole templates Note that the Default hole type cannot be edited 6. Press up/down arrows to select the required List Press ENTER key to continue 7. Press up/down arrows to select the number of Decks per Hole (Maximum of 6 allowed) Press Press key to continue to save Press Use Keypad to enter Time per deck to continue to next Time Press to save The detonators should be counted from the bottom of the hole up i.e. Detonator 1 is located at the bottom of the hole or in the bottom deck by convention. Page 95 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Edit the Hole configuration 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) 5. List Hole Config screen will be displayed (after creation) Use up/down arrow keys to select the required option Press Enter to select. Selection in a list will be displayed as white text on black background Page 96 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 6. Edit Configuration screen will be displayed Edit as required. Press SoftKey to save Delete the Hole Configuration 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 2. From Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press 3. From 4G Setup Menu Press Site Setup 4. From Site Setup Menu Press to select List Hole Config (Configuration) Page 97 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. From List Hole Config screen Use up/down keys to select the required option. Delete the Hole configuration by selecting the required option Press the dustbin SoftKey to delete Default hole type can NOT be edited and a message will be displayed if attempted Page 98 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Advanced (A) Tagging Screen Info 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen, press Press ? to select Tagging Screen Info until the screen alongside is displayed 3. Press or SoftKeys to navigate to Next / Previous Screens to display the following Information screens:
Location Timing Settings Tools Page 99 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Advanced Tagging Screen SoftKey Icons The following table contains a detailed list of SoftKey icons that are used in the Advanced Tagging Screens. Table 8: CE4 Tagger SoftKey Icons Advanced Tagging Advanced Screen Icon
>>
>>
>>
?
>>
Description Toggle Increment Direction Inter-hole increment Absolute Time Next Page Tag Configuration Test Single Det Tagged List Next Page Change Tagging order Toggle Autotag
* Tagged List Next Page Statistics Tagging Screen Information Next Page Items marked with an asterisk * are subject to Site Setup selected options. Page 100 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Toggle Increment Direction 1. Press SoftKey to toggle between Time Increment, Decrement and Manual modes. 2. Auto Incrementing Mode displayed Increasing time - arrow displayed next to time value points upwards 3. Auto-Decrementing Mode displayed Decreasing arrow displayed next to time value points downwards 4. User (Manual) Input Mode displayed User is prompted to enter the absolute time with each tag Page 101 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Inter Hole Delay From Advanced Tagging Screen Press to select Inter Hole delay From Time Increment Screen Use numeric keypad to enter Inter-Hole delay Press Enter to return Absolute Detonator Time From Advanced Tagging Screen Press to select Inter Hole delay From Detonator Time Screen Use numeric keypad to enter value Press Enter to return 1. 2. 1. 2. Page 102 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Autotag / Manual Mode From Advanced Tagging Screen Press either the AutoX (Auto OFF) or Auto (Auto ON) SoftKey as displayed to toggle the Autotag Mode Press AutoX SoftKey to toggle between Autotag and Manual Mode Auto indicates Autotag ON AutoX indicates Manual Mode (Autotag OFF) When using Autotag ON mode, the detonators may be directly connected to the wire bus and only untagged detonators will be searched for. When Autotag is OFF, connect the detonator to the pogo pins to tag. In Autotag OFF mode, any detonator can be re-tagged (i.e. any detonator can be detected). Retagging is not possible if Autotag is turned ON. 1. Page 103 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Tagging Screen Info The User may check the Tagging Screen Info to browse through a brief description of the active keys in the tagging screen. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press ? SoftKey to select Tagging Screen Info Press or SoftKeys to navigate to Previous/Next screens to display the following Information:
Location The sequence tracked as location may be adjusted in real time by using the first set of arrow keys. up/down Timing The time can be adjusted with the increment value in real time by using the last set of up/down The row increment may be applied to the absolute time using the second set of up/down arrow keys. arrow keys Settings The user can navigate to the configuration from the tagging screen. Should Autotag be allowed, this function may be switched off when a detonator has to be re-tagged Tools Users can test any detonator without leaving the tagging screen The tagged detonators list may be checked from the tagging screen Statistical data is accumulated as tagging is performed. Page 104 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Test Single Detonator At times it is useful to allow testing of detonators from the tagging screen, and to check if a detonator has previously been tagged or if it is untagged, without disturbing the setup of the current tagging context. The information displayed with this test contains the location, the time the detonator was tagged to, the length of the detonator and also the mark allocated to the detonator. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators 2. 3. From Advanced Tagging Screen Connect a detonator to the Tagger Press SoftKey to select Test Single Det From Test Single Det screen Press or to toggle between options indicates single test indicates continuous test Press or SoftKey to toggle between testing a single detonator as follows:
indicates testing on POGO Pins or Wire Connectors indicates testing on POGO Pins Only Page 105 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Tagged Detonators From the Main Menu Press to select Tag Detonators From Advanced Tagging Screen Press SoftKey to select Row Statistics Row Statistics screen will display:
Row Detonators (Total) Holes Start hole/det Wire Length (Metric or Imperial as set) 1. 2. 3. Page 106 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Mark Detonators With the IntelliShot Commander System it is recommended that the user mark the detonator that will be placed at the end of the harness wire, as the Bench Commander will verify the voltage level of this detonator just before firing. Each String should have 1 detonator marked as End of Line. The other types of marking are not explicitly used in this version of the system although it is planned to use it in a future release of the software. They would typically indicate that specific points of the blast have been captured and also indicate if a change of plan (delays and increments) is required. 1. From the Main Menu Press to select Mark Detonators 6. From Mark Detonators Menu to select/deselect End of Line to select/deselect Start of Row to select/deselect End of Row to select/deselect Inflection Point to Remove Mark from previously marked Detonator Press Press Press Press Press Press Cancel SoftKey to return to Main Menu Press Apply SoftKey to apply the setting. Page 107 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Review Tag Detonator Screen Parameters The user may review the parameters at any time in the tagging screen. 1. From Advanced Tagging Screen Press Tag Configuration SoftKey to select Tag Detonators Screen 2. Should the value be correct, press a) String From Tag Detonators Screen, check the following:
key to move to the next field. Check that the correct Row is being tagged; if not, adjust it as follows:
Use numeric keypad to enter new Row number, and Press to continue b) Initial Time Ability to modify the Initial time Use numeric keypad to set the initial time Press to continue c) Inter-hole Increment Ability to modify the Dealy time from one hole to the next. Use numeric keypad to set the inter-hole increment Press to continue d) Hole Conf(iguration) Ability to switch to a user defined hole configuration Use setup) Press to toggle (Available options as configured during the initial to continue e) Loading mode Set the Loading mode. Use Press to toggle between available options. to continue DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 108 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Advanced Screen Manual Adjustments 1. The user may set:
Absolute time (at any time) Hole number but not counting direction Det number (if multiple primed and not loading per deck) Increment values and if increments are to be factored in for the next hole (Incrementing /Decrementing /
Manual) 2. The Up/Down arrow keys may be used as follows:
Middle UP/DOWN arrow functions:
Used to increment/decrement the delay with 1ms offset value. Right UP/DOWN arrow functions:
Used to increment/decrement the delay with inter-hole offset value. Side Arrow keys Only available when tagging group/row hole and det. This key will change the det number. or Adjust the hole number and corresponding delay of that hole. Page 109 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 11 TEST MENU The Test Menu will allow the user to perform the following tests:
1. Test All, 2. Test String 3. Test Single Det 4. Leakage Test, 5. Untagged Test 6. Search Dets Test All From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the tagged detonators. Although the tagger detonator list capacity is equal to a Full Blast Design which can be a maximum of 16000 detonators, the Tagger will only test one string at a time with large blast designs. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select Test Menu. 2. 3. 4. Test Menu Press Key to select Test All. Test All CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test After Testing press the Press the Key to return to the Test Menu SoftKey to View the design or, Press the Key to return to the Main Menu. Page 110 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Test String From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the detonators connected to a String 1. SoftKey to select Test Menu. SoftKey to select Test String. Main Menu Press 2. Test Menu Press 3. Test String Enter required String number Press Press to clear and re-enter required string number to continue CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators in the selected String. Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test to View Design After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 111 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Test Single Detonator From the test menu, the user will have the option to test a single detonators connected either to the POGO Pins Only or to the POGO Pins and Harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Single Det. Test Single Det Connect Detonator to CE4 Tagger Press Connect the required single detonator to be tested Press to toggle selection to test or Detonator will be tested Results will be displayed Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test Press SoftKey to untag the detonator Page 112 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Leakage Test This function enables the user to perform a current measurement and a leakage measurement test. Leakage is measured in milli-amps (mA) and low leakage is considered to be below 0.5mA. Leakage higher than 1mA is considered high leakage and may result in blasting problems (potential misfires) and should therefore be addressed and resolved prior to arming. The user can set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered from 0.1mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA. A warning will be displayed when the leakage level exceeds the leakage warning trigger level as set by the user. HIGH LEAKAGE LEVELS CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES OF THE INTELLISHOT DETONATORS. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Leakage Test. LeakageTest CE4 Tagger will Test Leakage on all Channels Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating CE4 Tagger will display leakage test results Press After Testing, press the to test for leakage again. Key to return to the Test Menu 1. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 113 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Untagged Test This function enables the user to test for Untagged Detonators connected to the harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press 3. Untagged Test SoftKey to select Untagged Test OK message will be displayed when no untagged detonators are found. Error message will displayed when untagged detonators are found and the number of untagged detonators found will be displayed at the bottom right of the screen. 4. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Use a binary search to locate untagged detonator(s) Page 114 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Search Detonators (Binary Search) This function enables the user to search for detonators connected to the harness wire. It can be conducted with any CE4 Tagger and no prior tagged list is necessary. This same function will be performed by the Bench Commander to discover detonators. The detonators found will be compared with the detonators in the tagged list and the tagged list will be amended with new detonators if any are found. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Search Dets Search Dets Enter required String ID Press to continue CE4 Tagger will search for detonators and display Done when complete Press Press to return to the Test Menu to View Design Search Function Results Press the SoftKey to check the Search results The View Design Menu will be displayed Refer to Chaper 12 - VIEW in this manual for more information. Page 115 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 12 VIEW PLAN The View Plan Menu will display the planned ViewShot List when the tag option is set to Tag by Plan. The Basic and Advanced options will allow the user to view the list of tagged detonators filtered by various important characteristics. List Detonators From Main Menu Press to select View Plan View design screen will be displayed Highlighted detonators position in String Plan Search Filter Search Number Info Toggle Next soft keys Detonator position in String Plan will be displayed in the page header. A tick mark will be displayed under Stat when the plan contains tagged detonators 1. 2. Page 116 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Search Filter Press the Search Filter Hole Number, SoftKey to toggle between options as detailed below:
Row number, String Number, Channel number. Press Search SoftKey and insert the Channel, String, Row or Hole number to be searched (Channel number shown in example) Press Enter to search Page 117 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Info SoftKey Press the Information . SoftKey to display options as detailed below. Detonator Timing and Status Allocation to Commander and String Channel and String Press the Next page SoftKey and observe the follow set of SoftKeys displayed Filter Detonator list order Search soft key Cancel all filter settings and revert to default Page 118 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Sort Detonator list Press Sort Detonator List SoftKey to display the detonator list in the order as required:
Unsorted Order Ascending Order Descending Order Reversed Order 1. Unsorted Order (Tag Path) 2. Ascending Order 3. Descending order 4. Reversed order (Tag Path) Page 119 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 SoftKey (criteria based on previous filter settings will be selected) 5. Press Search 6. Press the Cancel Search Criteria filters SoftKey to cancel previous search Filter reset message will be displayed Press the Next page SoftKey and observe the follow set of SoftKeys displayed. Tagged detonator list (Highlighted if available ViewShot plan Summaries Page 120 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 ViewShot Plan Summary (Heading) SoftKey to page to the following Press the Next page set of SoftKeys. Press the String Summary Back to ViewShot Plan String Summary Commander Summary ViewShot plan Summary SoftKey to display the string statistics as follows:
String number, Number of Detonators per string Number of Detonators tagged on that string. Press SoftKey to return to ViewShot Plan Press the Commander Summary follows:
SoftKey to display the Commander statistics as Commander number, Channel number per Commander, Number of detonators in plan per channel, Number of detonators tagged per channel. Press SoftKey to return to ViewShot Plan Press the ViewShot plan summary SoftKey to display the summary Press SoftKey to return to ViewShot Plan Page 121 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List Missing detonators This screen lists the detonators that were not found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. View Design Menu Press to select List Missing Detonators 3. The List Missing Detonators screen will be displayed. List Missing Dets Soft keys will be available as displayed o Search Filter, o Search Number, o ViewShot Plan Summaries o Next Page Press Next Page o List order, o Information Toggle SoftKey to display Toggle Information to view o Wire m - Wire length information Search Filter Search no ViewShot Plan summaries List order Info Toggle Page 122 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 o String number, o Channel number, o Commander number o Det position in ViewShot Plan Info o Detonator ID o GPS information
(if available) of highlighted detonator Page 123 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List New detonators This screen will list the new detonators found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. View Design Menu Press to select List New Detonators List New Dets The List New Detonators screen will be displayed Press SoftKey to un-mark the detonators as new (*). Page 124 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List Bad Status This screen will list the detonators that were found to have an error status during the test. (A bad status indicates the detonator may have a bad fuse or another internal problem). This List does NOT include untagged detonators. Main Menu Press to select View Design View Design Menu Press SoftKey to select List Bad Status Detonators List Bad Status The List Bad Status screen will be displayed Use SoftKeys to sort/filter or display other information as required. 1. 2. 3. Page 125 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Duplicate Location This screen will list the detonators that were found to be tagged with the same location. The system does not rely on the location data to communicate with the dets and provided that the detonator has been tagged with a delay, all detonators can be fired. However, a duplicate location means that either the user has assigned the same location when tagging, or another user with another CE4 Tagger has assigned this same location to a detonator. Note that this error is flagged when the user attempts to assign the same location on the same Tagger. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. View Design Menu Press The duplicated location will be displayed Key to select Duplicate Location List Duplicate Location The Duplicate Location screen will be displayed Original det found in detlist Duplicate det found added after first hence asterisk Page 126 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Blast Summary The Blast Summary function enables the user to view a blast summary per channel. 1. Main Menu Press to select View Design 2. 3. 4. 5. View Design Menu Press SoftKey to select Blast Summary to page back to previous The Blast Summary screen will be displayed Press the Back SoftKey screen Press the Info SoftKey . to toggle display a summary as indicated as follows:
New - New Detonators Mis - Missing Detonators EOL - End of Line Detonators Bad - Bad Detonators Page 127 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Tracking Detonators This option will allow the user to track detonators that have been tagged, the user will be directed to the location of the tagged detonator. The detonators can only be tracked using the same Tagger that it was tagged with and a GPS signal was available during the initial tagging, and is available to track the detonator. From Main Menu Press to select View Design From View Design Menu Press to select List Detonators Detonator list will be displayed Hold the tagger in upright position Highlight the Detonator to be tracked from the list. (Selected detonator will be displayed as highlighted in the top position of the screen). Press SoftKey 4 Scroll until the location Press the location to scroll to next page SoftKey is displayed. SoftKey to select 1. 2. 3. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 128 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Start walking towards the bench Tagger will detect the direction and distance to the selected detonator. The distance and direction to the detonator will be displayed Proceed indicated. in the direction as When the Tagger is within 3 meters of the selected detonator, Near Location will be displayed The user will now have tracked the selected detonator to be within 3 meters of the current vicinity. Page 129 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 13 COMMANDER General Information The IntelliShot Commander is a 4-channel blasting device intended for use across all surface blasting platforms in the DetNet portfolio. These devices are controlled from a CE4 Tagger or an optional tablet device / PC loaded with the DetNet Android Application. The IntelliShot Commander can be configured to operate in different modes as follows:
The Base Commander, Bench Commander, or Repeater. IntelliShot Commander Components The following illustration depicts a front and rear view of the IntelliShot Commander indicating the major components. Figure 9: IntelliShot Commander Part Identification Page 130 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander Body The IntelliShot Commander housing body contains all the electronic components in a durable environment equipped with a carry handle. Internal antenna RF long range:
RF short range:
3000m (900MHz data radio, internal antenna) 10m (Wi-Fi, internal antenna) The IntelliShot Commander must be placed on a tripod or otherwise elevated during use; elevating it to approximately 1.5m above ground level ensures that the internal antenna will operate at optimum levels. Future versions of the IntelliShot Commander will also include a connection to accommodate external antennae which should also be at least 1.5m above ground level. Detonator Communication Channels (1 - 4) The four detonator communication channels on the front panel are clearly marked 1 4. Harness wire terminals on each channel are used to connect to detonator / surface harness lead-in wires. E-paper display The e-paper display reflects light unlike conventional backlit flat panel displays that emit light. This makes it more comfortable to read, and provide a wider viewing angle than most light-emitting displays The display remains visible even if the device is off thus the last screen that was visible before shut-down will be displayed while in off mode until the commander is booted-up again.The e-paper display should never be exposed to direct sunlight for long periods. NEXT (FUNCTION) button The NEXT (FUNCTION) button is used in conjunction with other keys to perform specific functions. POWER button The POWER button is used to switch the IntelliShot Commander ON and OFF. It is also used, in conjunction with the NEXT (FUNCTION) button, to enter the bootloading mode from where software updates can be performed. While the Commander is plugged in and charging the Power button can be used to toggle between low and high charge rates. This function is useful when charging from a less powerful charger. Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, waiting a few seconds and then pressing the Power button. Page 131 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 USB connector port The USB connector port allows charging of the rechargeable battery and is also used to upgrade software and downloading logs. Plug in a flash drive containing the new version and then hold in the NEXT button and press the power ON button. This will place the IntelliShot Commander in bootloader-mode and start the download of the software. BlastCard (NFC) Sensor A Near Field Communication (NFC) Sensor located inside the back of the IntelliShot Commander makes use of technology that enables the NFC BlastCard to establish communication with the IntelliShot Commander by touching the devices together or bringing them into proximity to a distance of typically 5cm (2in) or less. Page 132 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Power IntelliShot Commander ON and OFF Power IntelliShot Commander ON 1. While the IntelliShot Commander is in an OFF state, it will display the following information:
IntelliShot Commander ID (4) Mode (BASE) Hardware version (HW Ver. 4) Software version (SW Ver.36230C) Press the POWER ON Button. POWER Button A two-part splash screen will be displayed. The first part will request the user to WAIT during power-on. Battery Percentage will be displayed Power On Self-Test (P.O.S.T.) will be displayed Shortly after the previous screen, the second-part splash screen will be displayed requesting user to press the NEXT button. Battery Percentage will be displayed Press the NEXT Button to continue. NEXT Button Power IntelliShot Commander OFF 4. Press the POWER Button to power OFF the IntelliShot Commander. The IntelliShot Commander will power off after a second or two. POWER Button 2. 3. Page 133 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander Accessories Battery The IntelliShot Commander uses a rechargeable 3.7V Lithium Polymer battery. Battery life is influenced by the conditions in which the IntelliShot Commander operates. When the battery capacity drops below 15%, a warning will be displayed. The low battery error will clear once Commander is charged to 35%. When the battery capacity drops below 3%, the IntelliShot Commander will shut down. The battery should only be replaced by a DetNet qualified technician and is not field replaceable. THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE INTELLISHOT DETONATORS OR THE LEAD-IN HARNESS WIRE WHILST THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER IS CONNECTED TO A CHARGER. Charging the IntelliShot Commander Connect charger to IntelliShot Commander. Connect charger to correct power supply. Detonators should never be connected while charging. The IntelliShot Commander should be charged for at least six hours prior to a blast. While the Commander is plugged in and charging, the Power button can be used to toggle between low (500mA) and high (2A) charge rates. The low option (500mA)is the default charging rate. Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, wait a few seconds and then press the Power button. Storage Store the IntelliShot Commander in a cool, dry place, with an ambient temperature of approximately 21 C. It is recommend that the IntelliShot Commander be charged to 50% when placed into long-term storage, and thereafter the unit should be charged to 50%, at least every six months to maintain the expected lifetime of the battery. The IntelliShot Commander may be kept on charge for extended periods as the IntelliShot Commander will manage the battery. The IntelliShot Commander can draw current of up to 2 Amperes during charging. Page 134 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander Process Description The following paragraphs contain a detailed description of User-interaction and safety features designed into the IntelliShot Commander. Start-up Press the POWER button briefly to switch ON the device. Shutdown Press-and-hold the POWER button for 2 seconds to switch the device OFF. In case of malfunction, press-and-hold the POWER button for 10 seconds to force the device OFF. While the Commander is plugged in and charging, the Power button can also be used to toggle between low and high (2A)
(500mA) Turn Off by disconnecting the charge cable, waiting a few seconds and then pressing the Power button. charge rates. Bootloading Ensure that the device is switched OFF. Press-and-hold the NEXT button, then press the POWER button to switch ON. The device will now enter bootloading mode. To load new software, connect a flash drive containing the new software version into the IntelliShot Commander. Place the IntelliShot Commander in boot loader-mode to start the download of the software. Pairing After the start-up sequence the identification number (1-10) will be displayed. Remote control of the IntelliShot Commander is now possible from a CE4 Tagger within range (or a tablet loaded with the required software). Press and hold the from the Main Menu on the CE4 Tagger to start the pairing function. Select the appropriate IntelliShot Commander ID (1-10). The CE4 Tagger will establish a communication link with one IntelliShot Commander at a time. Commanders will clearly indicate their pairing status on the E-paper display. button and press All IntelliShot Commanders have a default ID of 1. Users will have to change these IDs if intending to use multiple Commanders in a single setup. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 135 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Aborting Choosing the ABORT option will return all devices in the setup to a safe state. No further activities can be initiated remotely before cycling the power ON, on all said devices. Aborting is typically accomplished by pressing escape and confirming the abort action when in an active blasting screen. Pressing the ESC button after arming will display a warning with three options:
Yes this will return to the main menu Abort the blast will be aborted and the user is then forced to turn off Commander No this will return to the blast menu Blasting Refer to the Blasting Overview contained in Chapter 18 of this document. Page 136 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Connecting CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Wi-Fi 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. ENSURE THAT THE BENCH IS CLEARED BEFORE THE DETONATORS OR CE4 TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO THE BENCH COMMANDER. Switch both the IntelliShot Commander and the CE4 Tagger ON Press and hold Wi-Fi key and then press the key to connect CE4 Tagger to IntelliShot Commander via Observe the Commander ID Enter the IntelliShot Commander ID Press key to connect to IntelliShot Commander CE4 Tagger will connect to Commander Enter device password when prompted Press key to continue Device password will be required only during first connection to the IntelliShot Commander. The default password may be changed by the user and can be configured from the Settings menu. The user may reset the password with a ticket retrieved from DetNet Portal, should the password be previously set and the user does not recall the password. IntelliShot Commander Main Menu will be displayed for the Bench Commanders and the Select Benchs Page 137 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Menu will be displayed for Base Commander. Page 138 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander System Information This function enables the user to view the IntelliShot Commanders: battery charge information, current consumption, state-of-health of the battery, temperature information, hardware and software serial numbers, GPS detail and User ID. Main Menu 1. Press SoftKey to view System Info System Info - Battery 54%: Battery charge Information Current Consumption: By convention a negative value indicates that current is being drawn from the battery. Cell Status: (Good) indicates the state of health of the battery. Should the status indicate Low the unit should be serviced to have the battery replaced. The IntelliShot Commander will display a warning at 15% and switch OFF at 3%. Temperature and the Relative Humidity as measured inside the IntelliShot Commander are displayed as follows:
Temp: The Temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius and Fahrenheit. Humidity: The Relative Humidity is displayed as a percentage. to select page right. System Info Hardware Serial Number and SW Release Number Press Hardware Serial Number will be displayed. Software Release Number will be displayed Hardware Serial number is required when tickets are required from the DetNet 36230C Portal. Hardware Serial number is required when Web tickets are required from the DetNet Portal. Web tickets are not needed in normal use. 2. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 139 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. 6. 7. System Info GPS Detail Press The GPS location will be displayed. The number of satellites found and Altitude and will also be displayed. to select page right. User ID Press Use alphanumeric characters to enter a User ID. Press SoftKey to enter or edit User ID. to select next page. System Info Serial Number Serial numbers of the internal circuit boards will be displayed. Page 140 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander LCD Screen Icons The Icons as displayed on the IntelliShot Commander will differ according to the selected mode. Each of the following modes will display icons that are applicable to the selected mode:
Base Mode, Base with Repeater Mode Bench Mode, and Repeater Mode. Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. IntelliShot Base Commander Mode Icons When the IntelliShot Commander is connected to a CE4 Tagger /
Laptop / Tablet via Wi-Fi, it will display only the Wi-Fi symbol on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the IntelliShot Commander is connected via USB rather than will be displayed Wi-Fi, the USB symbol When the Base Commander is connected via RF, it will display the RF in the main screen symbol Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. Page 141 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item
#
1 The Detail screen is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Figure 10: IntelliShot Base Commander Mode Detail Screen Table 9: IntelliShot Commander Base Station Screen Icons Description Detail Indication Icon Wi-Fi/USB connectivity indication area (CE4 Tagger or PC) 1.1 Connection type Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected via Wi-Fi USB or Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G is Commander connected to CE4 Tagger or PC Indicates the connection type and will also show the last active connection type when disconnected Connected something to Connected via Wi-Fi Connected via USB Options / Variants /
Description As simultaneous Wi-Fi and USB connections are allowed
(one of each), this section can indicate a combination of connections. Refer to 1.4 below for possible combinations. Page 142 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Description Detail Indication Icon UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item
#
1.2 of Type connected to device 1.3 ID CE4 Tagger to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to 1.4 Possible connection combinations Indicates the type of device / driving unit that DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. Connected Tagger to CE4 Connected to PC Indicates the CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected. Tagger CE4 connections to DigiShot Plus 4G is Commander always via Wi-Fi. Whenever a non-zero value indicated, that value represents active Wi-Fi an connection the relevant CE4 Tagger. USB Wi-Fi and connections, and combinations thereof. to is Tagger CE4 connected to ID 110 CE4 Tagger connected via Wi-Fi ID 1 PC connected via USB PC connected via Wi-
Fi PC connected via AND CE4 USB Tagger 1 connected via Wi-Fi ID Options / Variants /
Description Page 143 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item
#
2 Description Detail Indication Icon connectivity RF indication area Connected to Bench
(In this case depicted, connected to 1 Bench Refer to section 2.3 below) is Indicates whether the RF module on this active Base Indicates whether Base Commander is connected to one or more Benches via RF Indicates the signal quality of the RF connection 2.1 RF active and waiting for Base connection 2.2 RF signal quality 2.3 3 4 5 Number of Bench Commanders connected Base Total detonator count this to Battery percentage indicator DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID RF active Signal low Signal medium Signal high RF-connected Bench Commander count 110 the includes all Indicates total number of detonators that this Base can detect. It the detonators found on all Bench Commanders connected Base. Indicates the remaining battery life as a percentage this the to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID used to connect to over Wi-
Fi. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID 110 Options / Variants /
Description Page 144 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item
#
Description 6 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander system state Detail Indication Icon Base directly connects to Benches Only Base Base set up to use Repeater Base + Repeater State = UNKNOWN the that state Indicates the current system the DigiShot Plus 4G is Commander in. Will also indicate some of the lagging Bench Commander where states, This applicable. means it will show the Bench state with lowest system state. This first section of states are states that will be indicated as a result of Base Commander system. 6.1 indicates states the relevant connected Bench Commanders. This description is terrible. The state shown on the base is simply the least advanced of all the benches that are involved in the blast. the to State = IDLE
=
State BLASTCARD SCAN Options / Variants /
Description Undefined DigiShot Plus 4G Commander state processes Idle state, DigiShot Plus 4G Commander waiting for to commence, start-up to finish Waiting for user to scan NFC BlastCard at the back (NFC area) of the CE4 Commander. Page 145 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item
#
Description Detail Indication Icon
=
State BLASTCARD PIN ENTER 6.1 last Indicating
(lagging) connected Bench Commander state State
= PRESS NEXT WITHIN 2sec Lagging Bench state
= Grace
"Ready and Indicates the system state of the lagging Bench Commander. If all other connected Benches are in e.g. to state Charge"
the lagging Bench is still
"Awaiting in state Grace", that state will be indicated along with the icon identifying Bench state. See previous comments re clarity of description. then Lagging Bench state
= Charging Bench-state-on-base icon 7 Error notification area DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will indicate any error condition it has by printing the exclamation triangle. errors Holds reported the connected Bench Commanders as well. for on Options / Variants /
Description Waiting for user to enter the scanned BlastCard's PIN on the connected CE4 Tagger / PC. to Waiting the depress Commander's NEXT button for at least 2 sec. for user Page 146 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Description Detail Indication Icon display images If Base is in ? state after Function button was pressed to ARM the Wi-Fi/USB and connection is severed/lost/discon-
nected, then drop to this that indicates the Bench with the first occurring shutdown time. If we already have mentioned that the Wi-Fi signal takes precedence over the other then repeating stuff about Wi-Fi elsewhere is just overly verbose. If Base is ready to blast and Wi-Fi/USB connection is severed/lost/discon-
nected, then drop to this that indicates the Base is in READY_TO_BLAST state. See comment above. When blasted, to request user to turn off power, when Wi-
Fi/USB connection lost Ditto when in ABORTED state, to also turn off power, when Wi-
Fi/USB connection lost display Item
#
Options / Variants /
Description Page 147 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Icons When the IntelliShot Commander, in Bench Mode, is connected to a CE4 Tagger / Laptop / Tablet via Wi-Fi, it will display only the Wi-Fi symbol on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the Bench Commander is connected via USB rather than Wi-Fi, the will be displayed USB symbol When the Bench Commander is connected via RF, it will display the RF in the main screen symbol When the Bench Commander NOT is connected via RF, it will display the following main screen Swipe SmartKey for AutoArm Bench Commander will perform programming and then go to the waiting for next key press state. Programming screen Waiting for next button press screen Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. Page 148 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 The Detail screen below is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Figure 11: IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Screen Table 10: IntelliShot Commander Bench Mode Screen Icons Indication Detcount Icon Options / Variants /
Description Det count; Min = 000, Max = 400 Item # Description Detail 1 Detonator count of each of the Bench Commander's channels decremented Indicates the total det count of dets found per channel. Will be reset every time a new scan is demanded. It is of an upwards-counting nature, incrementing as dets are detected, but not
/
if dets are decreased These missing. descriptions are just terrible, The number shown total number of dets known to the commander for this channel. Not all of the dets are necessarily good. the is Page 149 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon 2
/
Wi-Fi USB connectivity indication area (CE4 Tagger or PC) 2.1 Connection type 2.2 Type of connected to device 2.3 CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to 2.4 connection Possible combinations Connected something to Plus whether Indicates 4G DigiShot Commander is connected via Wi-Fi or USB Indicates DigiShot Commander connected Tagger or PC whether 4G is CE4 Plus to Indicates the connection type and will also show the active connection type when disconnected last Indicates the type of device / driving unit the DigiShot 4G Commander is connected to. Plus Connected via Wi-Fi Connected via USB Connected Tagger to CE4 Connected to PC Indicates the CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. CE4 Tagger connections to DigiShot Plus 4G is always Commander via Wi-Fi. Whenever a non-zero value is indicated here, that value represents an active Wi-Fi connection to relevant CE4 the Tagger. Wi-Fi connections, combinations thereof. USB and and Tagger CE4 connected to ID 110 Tagger CE4 connected via Wi-Fi ID 1 Options / Variants /
Description As simultaneous Wi-Fi and USB connections are allowed (one of each), this section can indicate a combination of connections. As this is all the space available to us for the connections, connections will be printed over one-
another. See point 2.4 for possible combinations. screen Page 150 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon Options / Variants /
Description PC connected via USB PC connected via Wi-Fi PC connected via USB AND CE4 connected via Wi-Fi Connected to Base Tagger ID 1 3 connectivity RF indication area Indicates whether the RF module on this Bench active is whether Indicates Bench Commander is connected to Base via RF signal Indicates quality of the RF connection the 3.1 RF active and waiting for Base connection 3.2 RF signal quality 3.3 ID of the RF-connected Base Commander 4 5 DigiShot Plus Commander ID 4G Plus 4G system DigiShot Commander state RF active Signal low Signal medium Signal high Plus DigiShot 4G Commander ID used to connect to over Wi-Fi. the current Indicates the state system DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is in Base Commander ID 110 DigiShot Plus Commander ID 4G 110 State = UNKNOWN State = IDLE Undefined DigiShot Plus 4G Commander state Idle state, DigiShot Plus 4G Commander waiting for to commence, start-up to finish processes Page 151 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon State = ABORTED State = SEARCHING State = TESTING State PROGRAMMING
=
State = PROGRAMMED State
=
BLASTCARD SCAN
=
State BLASTCARD PIN ENTER State = PRESS NEXT WITHIN 2sec State = AWAITING GRACE TIMEOUT state. User blast abort Options / Variants /
Description Aborted issued command. STATE IS LATCHED and requires DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Power Cycle. Communication channels and testing functions still active, blasting cannot be performed anymore. Searching detonators new but for Testing detonators found during previous search. Testing detonators as a user request. Programming detonators Detonator programming finished of the Waiting for user to scan NFC BLAST / ACTIVATE card at the back (NFC area) CE4 Commander. Waiting for user to enter scanned BlastCard's PIN on the connected CE4 Tagger/PC. Not applicable to BlastCard with no PIN Waiting to depress the NEXT button for at least 2 sec. for user Plus DigiShot 4G Commander waiting for GRACE timer to expire Page 152 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon State = READY TO CHARGE State = CHARGING State = LAST DET TEST State = READY TO BLAST State = BLASTED Timer inactive 6 Error notification area 7 8 percentage Battery indicator Blast shutdown timer indicator Plus 4G DigiShot will Commander error any indicate condition it has by printing the exclamation triangle Indicates the remaining battery a percentage life as As soon as DigiShot Plus 4G Commander has been past state "PRESS NEXT"
the shutdown timer started. is As soon as timer expires, DigiShot 4G Commander will be turned off. Timer indicated in terms of hours and minutes Plus Plus Options / Variants /
Description DigiShot 4G Commander waiting for the CHARGING command to be received DigiShot 4G Commander blast voltage charging Plus transmit Plus ready Testing the detonators specified as end-of-line /
end-of-row in the blast layout 4G DigiShot Commander to receive blast instruction and blast command to detonators. Blast Blasted command sent. STATE IS LATCHED and requires DigiShot Plus 4G Commander Power Cycle. Communication channels still active. state. timer shutdown Blast inactive. DigiShot 4G Plus be Commander will if Auto turned Shutdown timer
(inactivity timer) expires. off Page 153 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon Timer active this down terrible indicates grace If Bench is in GRACE after Function button was pressed to ARM and the Wi-Fi/USB connection is severed /
lost / disconnected, this the display time Bench counting See earlier comments about the Wi-Fi/usb verbiage. As a further example of how is, nothing has properly explained what grace is. The same thing applies to all the stuff below. If Bench is in state after GRACE is timed out and the Wi-Fi/USB connection is severed /
lost
/ disconnected, then drop to this display that indicates the Bench a potentially is dangerous state, awaiting ARM command either from CE4 Tagger or from Base in timer shutdown Options / Variants /
Description Blast active. Auto Shutdown timer deactivated as soon as Blast shutdown timer is started, and DigiShot Plus 4G Commander will turn off after Blast shutdown timer expires -
in this instance after 2hrs 51 minutes. Its totally inappropriate to put this information here . This is the MAIN SCREEN AND THE MAIN SCREENS NEED TO BE DEALT WITH FIRST AND SEPARATELY FROM THE DETAIL SCREEN. Same issue applies below cover the main screens first. big, beautiful and tons less confusing than the detail screens which can be covered later. Theyre The top figure indicates a local blast, where RF is not used or for remote, is when not RF connected. Bottom figure indicates RF signal Page 154 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item # Description Detail Indication Icon If Base is ready to blast and Wi-Fi/USB connection is severed /
lost
/ disconnected, then drop to this display that indicates the Base is in READY_TO_BLAST state blasted, When to request user to turn off power, when Wi-Fi/USB connection lost when in ABORTED state, to also turn off power, when Wi-Fi/USB connection lost Options / Variants /
Description The top figure indicates a local blast, where RF is not used or for remote, when RF is not connected. Bottom figure indicates RF signal Page 155 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 IntelliShot Commander Repeater Mode Icons When the Repeater is connected via Wi-Fi, it will display only the Wi-Fi symbol on the screen. This icon will replace all other screens. When the Repeater is connected via USB rather than Wi-Fi, the USB symbol will be displayed When the Bench Commander is connected via RF, it will display the RF in the main screen symbol Repeater will display the following main screen Press the NEXT button to display a detail screen that will be displayed for 30 seconds before reverting back to the main screen. The Detail screen is displayed as a black layout on a white background. The illustration below has a black background only to improve the visibility of the icons in this manual. Figure 12: Repeater Detail Screen Page 156 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Options / Variants
/ Description As simultaneous Wi-
Fi and USB connections are allowed (one of each), this section can indicate a combination of connections. As this is all the screen space available to us for the connections, connections will be printed over one-
another. See point 1.4 for possible combinations. Item #
Description Detail Indication Icon Table 11: Repeater Screen Icons 1 Wi-Fi / USB connectivity indication area (CE4 Tagger or PC) Connected to something Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected via Wi-Fi or USB Indicates whether DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to CE4 Tagger or PC Connected via Wi-Fi Connected via USB Connected to CE4 Tagger Connected to PC CE4 Tagger ID connected to 1.1 Connection type Indicates the connection type and will also show the last active connection type when disconnected 1.2 Type of device connected to Indicates the type of device / driving unit the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. 1.3 CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to Indicates the CE4 Tagger ID to which the DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is connected to. CE4 Tagger connections to DigiShot Plus 4G Commander is always via Wi-Fi. Whenever a non-zero value is indicated here, that value represents an active Wi-Fi connection to the relevant CE4 Tagger. 110 Page 157 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item #
Description Detail Indication Icon 1.4 Possible connection combinations Wi-Fi and USB connections, and combinations thereof. CE4 Tagger ID 1 connected via Wi-Fi 2 RF connectivity indication area 2.1 RF active 2.2 RF signal quality Indicates whether the RF module on this Repeater is active. On Repeater the RF module is permanently engaged. Indicates whether Base Commander is connected to one or more Benches via RF Indicates the signal quality of the RF connection as reported by the Base. PC connected via USB PC connected via Wi-Fi PC connected via USB AND CE4 Tagger ID 1 connected via Wi-Fi Connected to Bench
(In this case connected to 1 Bench - section 2.3) RF active Signal low Signal medium Signal high No connection to Benches Blank space Options / Variants
/ Description Page 158 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Item #
Description 2.3 ID of the RF-connected Base Commander Detail Indication Icon Base Commander ID Options / Variants
/ Description Repeater indicates the Base Commander ID that is in charge of the remote setup. 110 110 3 4 DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID used to connect to over Wi-Fi. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander ID Battery percentage indicator Indicates the remaining battery life as a percentage Page 159 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 NEW DESIGN It is a good practice to clear the list when starting a new blasting process as the Commander retains original detonator details from the previous blast. From the Main Menu, select new design and confirm that list needs to be cleared. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select New Design. 2. Clear Memory Menu Press SoftKey to Clear Memory. Det List Cleared will be displayed briefly Page 160 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 TEST MENU The Test Menu will allow the user to perform the following tests:
1. Test All, 2. Leakage Test, 3. Untagged Test. Test All From the test menu, the user will have the option to test all the detonators known to the IntelliShot Commander to check if they are still connected to the Harness wire 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. 3. 4. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test All. Test All Done will be displayed when test all is complete. IntelliShot Commander will test all known detonators User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test to View Design Failures are detonators that are known to the Commander but have not responded to the test command. These detonators might not be connected to the harness for example. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 161 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Leakage Test This function enables the user to perform a current measurement and a leakage measurement test. Leakage is measured in milli-amps (mA) and low leakage is considered to be below 0.5mA. Leakage higher than 1mA is considered high leakage and may result in blasting problems (potential misfires) and should therefore be addressed and resolved prior to arming. The user can set the maximum limit where the leakage warning is triggered from 0.1mA to 1mA in increments of 0.1mA. Note that the default leakage limit is 0.5 mA. A warning will be displayed when the leakage level exceeds the leakage warning trigger level as set by the user. HIGH LEAKAGE LEVELS CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL MISFIRES OF THE INTELLISHOT DETONATORS. 1. Main Menu Press 2. Test Menu Press 3. Leakage Test SoftKey to select Test Menu. SoftKey to select Leakage Test. Press Press IntelliShot Commander will Test Leakage on all Channels SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 4. CE4 Tagger will display leakage test results 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Refer to basic causes of leakage as detailed in the CE4 Tagger section Page 162 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Untagged Test This function enables the user to test for Untagged Detonators connected to the harness wire. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press 3. Untagged Test SoftKey to select Untagged Test. The Channel and Result will be displayed OK message will be displayed when no untagged detonators are found. Error message will displayed when untagged detonators are found. 4. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating test 5. After Testing press the Key to return to the Test Menu Use a binary search to locate untagged detonator(s). Refer to Appendix A for details to perform binary search. Page 163 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 VIEW DESIGN The View Design Menu will allow the user to view detonator lists sorted or filtered as desired. The following menu options are available:
1. List Detonators, 2. List Missing Detonators, 3. List New Detonators, 4. List Bad Status Detonators, 5. Channel Summary. List Detonators The Lists do NOT include untagged detonators. Key to select View Design. 1. Main Menu Press 2. View Design Press Key to select List Detonators. 3. Detonator list will be displayed Press >> SoftKey to cycle between various views as required Press SoftKey to filter Press SoftKey to search Sequence o Enter Sequence number o Press ENTER to filter the list and place the required detonator at the top of the list Page 164 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Press SoftKey to view Plan Summary Press SoftKey to select:
o Sort By Channel o Sort by Location o Sort by Time view. o Sort in Tag order. to view the selected detonators details. The following icons may be keys to navigate up or down, and In the List Detonator screens, make use of the press displayed under the Status column:
* indicates a New Det indicates a Last Det
? indicates a Missing Det X Bad Status det D Duplicate dets Start row marker End row marker Inflection point 4. Press the Key to return to the View Design Menu Page 165 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List Missing Detonators This screen will list the detonators that were not found during testing. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. 3. 4. View Design Press Key to select List Missing Detonators. List Missing Dets The List Missing Detonators screen will be displayed Press the applicable SoftKey as required. Press the Key to return to the View Design Menu Page 166 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List New Detonators New detonators are detonators that were not found when the Commander completed the original search but were found when it repeated the search later (i.e. the detonators are new). Once programming is done, the detonators are considered to be accepted as part of the design and will not be shown as new anymore. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select List New Detonators. 3. List New Detonators New detonator(s) found will be displayed Page 167 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 List Bad Status Detonators This screen lists the detonators that were found to be bad during the test. (A bad status indicates the detonator may have a bad fuse or other internal problem). This List does NOT include untagged detonators. Key to select View Design. 1. Main Menu Press 2. View Design Press Key to select List Bad Status Detonators. 3. List Bad Status The List Bad Status screen will be displayed Use SoftKeys to navigate pages and sort/filter the view as required. Page 168 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Channel Summary The Channel Summary menu allows the user to view summaries of the number of detonators on each Channel. 1. Main Menu Press Key to select View Design. 2. View Design Press Key to select Channel Summary. 3. Channel Summary screen Press the following SoftKeys to toggle display as follows:
o EOL = End of Line o Bad = Bad Detonators o New = New Detonators o Mis = Bad Detonators Page 169 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Prepare for Blast This function prepares for either a Local Blast or a Remote Blast Local Blast SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. 1. Main Menu Press 2. Warning for last det not set User is enforced to select last dets on all channels. A warning will appear where the user may:
Press to automatically select last det, which is the last det on the list for each channel Press manually to have the list of detonators displayed and select the last dets Press to return to main menu If the user selects the last det automatically, a warning will appear to ensure that all dets are connected before proceeding to programming. 3. Prepare for Blast Press Key to select Program Detonators. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press Press button to return to Prepare for Blast Menu to continue. 4. Page 170 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Check Blast Design Press from main Menu to view Design to view 6. 7. 8. Prepare for Blast Press button to select Arm. Arm Press button to select Local Blast ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER AT POWER ON. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTING (RED) BLASTCARD AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE RED BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. Local Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan the Red BlastCard at the back of the IntelliShot Commander Enter the associated PIN Press to continue. BLAST CARD NFC SENSOR The screen will alternate between displaying awaiting high voltage and prompting the User to press next. The time displayed indicates the time remaining to press next before it disarms. Page 171 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 9. 10. 11. Local Blast Press and hold the NEXT button on the front of the IntelliShot Commander for 2 seconds NEXT Local Blast The IntelliShot Commander will initiate a 30-second high-voltage charging period followed by a 90-second blast window. Should there be detonators marked as last det, the last det test will be performed between the charge and blast window Local Blast Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger simultaneously to fire 12. Local Blast Blast Command sent Switch Off Commander and Tagger Page 172 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Remote Blast The following Remote Blast description details the manual process to arm the system. The user is also provided with an option to Arm the Commander without the need to connect the Tagger via an AutoArm function. The AutoArm function will allow the user to scan a no-PIN yellow BlastCard and if there are no errors present; program and move to the waiting for next press state. The user will then have to press next for 2 seconds and the unit will then be ready to arm. 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. 2. Prepare for Blast Press SoftKey to select Program Detonators. 3. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press or button to return to Prepare for Blast Menu. 4. Prepare for Blast Press button to select Arm. Page 173 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 5. Arm Press button to select Remote Blast ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER AT POWER ON. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTING (RED) BLASTCARD AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE RED BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. 6. Remote Blast Press SoftKey to initialise RF communication 7. Remote Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan the Yellow BlastCard at the back of the IntelliShot Commander 8. Remote Blast BLAST CARD NFC SENSOR Yellow NFC card must be from the same group as Red NFC card for RF communication to take place. Press and hold the NEXT button on the front of the IntelliShot Commander for 2 seconds The IntelliShot Commander will initiate a Grace period of 2 minutes. NEXT Page 174 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Disconnect the CE4 Tagger from the Bench Commander. CE4 Tagger will automatically disconnect from the Bench Commander during charging. 9. Remote Blast The Bench Commander will await a command from the Base Commander Connect the CE4 Tagger via Wi-Fi to the Base Commander. Select the applicable Bench Commander by pressing corresponding number on the keypad. Select Bench 10 by pressing 0 on the keypad. (Bench 1 is selected as indicated by the tick mark in example shown). Applicable Bench Commander will be Indicated by Press to continue 10. To remove a Commander from the blast:
Press Highlight Commander button to be removed Press Then press remove Soft button to 11. To add a removed Commander Press + Button Page 175 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 12. Remote Blast Wait if message Not ready yet is displayed User will be prompted to Scan Key once all the bench commanders are out of grace period and ready to blast. The user is also provided with an option to Arm the commander without the need to connect the tagger via an AutoArm function. The AutoArm function will allow the user to scan a no PIN yellow BlastCard and if there are no errors present; program and move to the waiting for next press state. The user will then have to press next for 2 seconds and the unit will then be ready to arm. 13. Scan Key Scan the RED BlastCard at the back of the IntelliShot Commander Enter the corresponding PIN Press to continue Press and Hold the NEXT button on the front of the IntelliShot Commander for 2 seconds NEXT The IntelliShot Commander will initiate arming and a 30-
second high-voltage charging period followed by Testing Line and the 90-second blast window. 14. To end the blast process or abort the blast From the Base Commander press the button If you select No it will continue with blast process Page 176 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 If you select Yes the Base will return to Scan Key If ABORT is selected, the Base will abort the Benches connected to it The Bench Commander will display Aborted and Request to be reset Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger simultaneously to fire BLASTING WILL TAKE PLACE Blast Command sent message will be displayed Page 177 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 14 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS The configuration menu presents a variety of informational screens and configurable options for the following:
1. 4G Setup 2. Device Setup 3. Long Range RF 4. Advanced Setup 5. Factory Setup. 4G Setup The 4G Setup menu will allow the user to set the det labelling that was used when tagging to ensure that the Commander is able to interpret the locations tagged on the detonators. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. 3. Configuration Menu Press to select 4G Setup 4G Setup Press 1 to select Det Label Select correct Det label used when tagging Press 2 to select Leakage Trigger Select leakage warning trigger level using numerical keys 2 and 8 to move up or down Device Setup The Device Setup menu will allow the user to adjust device specific settings. The following options are available:
1. Time Zone 2. Language 3. Time Outs 4. Units Page 178 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Time Zone This function enables the user to define the time zone. Date/time settings are controlled by GPS GMT time data but since the time zone cannot be configured automatically, it should always be set by the user in order to ensure the correct local time display. The time zones may be adjusted in 0.5 hour increments. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. 3. 4. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup Press to select Time Zone Set Time Zone Use the arrow key Press Press SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu. to navigate the TIME ZONE options. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 179 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Language This function enables the user to select a language preference for the IntelliShot Commander menus. This version of software does not have complete translations of all languages other than English. The addtional languages will be included in a later software release. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. 3. 1. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup Press to select Language Language Press Press on the keypad to select English. on the keypad to select Espaol
(Spanish). Press on the keypad to select Franais
(French). A confirmation screen will be displayed when the language is changed. Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu. Page 180 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Timeouts This function enables the user to set a time-period of inactivity before the Commander will automatically power off to conserve battery power. The user can set the idle time between 2 and 120 minutes. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. 3. 4. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup Press to select Timeouts Auto Shutdown navigational keys to navigate selection. Use Minimum of 2 minutes. Maximum of 120 minutes. SoftKey to save. Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu Press DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 181 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Units This function enables the user to select either the Imperial or Metric Units of Measure as preferred. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. 3. 4. Configuration Menu Press to select Device Setup Device Setup Press to select Unit Units Use Press Press navigational keys to toggle selection. to select either Imperial or Metric. SoftKey to save. Page 182 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Long Range RF This function enables the user to manually select the region where the IntelliShot Commander will be deployed, set the region specific RF Channel and set the Encryption Key. Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel, encryption key settings and firmware version are the same on Base and Bench commanders. This will be automated when the RF settings from NFC card is enabled, and the onus will thus not be on the user to ensure matching settings, unless it needs to be altered. When the option to obtain RF settings from card is enabled, simply swipe a yellow blast card in idle state and the system will obtain the RF settings Set RF Channel 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF 3. RF Setup Menu Press Press to toggle SET RF CHANNEL to toggle Set Encryption Key Press to select Set RF Channel Use Press navigational keys to navigate selection. to select Region and open RF Channel selection. Page 183 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Use numerical keypad to enter Unique RF Channel within the range as follows:
Between 16 and 47 for Americas Between 48 and 55 for Australia. Press Press to continue SoftKey to return to Main Menu Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel and encryption key settings are the same on Base and Bench commanders. The channel range will also change to reflect the available allocated RF channels for each specific region Page 184 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Set Encryption Key 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF 3. RF Setup Press to select Set Encryption Key 4. Set Encryption Key Key will be displayed Press Use numerical keypad to enter desired 6 digit to edit encryption key Press to continue Press SoftKey to save the change Communication will NOT be possible unless the channel and encryption key settings are the same on Base and Bench commanders. Note that this function is automated, and the onus is not on the user to ensure matching settings, unless they need to alter them. We should emphasize in this section and the previous that this is now automated, so the onus is not on the user to ensure matching settings, unless they need to alter them. Page 185 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 15 ADVANCED SETUP The Advanced Setup menu presents configurable options for the following:
1. Device ID 2. Base Station Mode 3. Bench Box Mode 4. Repeater Mode 5. Device Password. 6. Last Det 7. Toggle Auto Arm 8. Max Wire Length Device ID 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup to select Device ID Press 4. Device ID Use numerical keypad to enter desired Device ID Press Press Press Power cycle the Commander for the change to take to continue SoftKey to save. SoftKey to return to Main Menu effect. All devices must have unique IDs. The Commanders may be set to IDs ranging from 1 to 10. Page 186 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Base Station Mode The Base Station Mode menu allows the User to configure the Commander to be utilised in either Base Station or Base Station + Repeater Mode. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. to select Configuration 1. Main Menu Press 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode 4. Base Station Mode Press Base Station Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off to select Base Station Mode automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 187 of 218 3. UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Base + Repeat Mode The Base and Repeat mode will allow the Base Commander to communicate through a repeater. The User should use this mode of operation when a repeater is used in the blast. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. to select Configuration 1. Main Menu Press 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode Base Station Mode Press Base + Repeat Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off to select Base + Repeat Mode automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 188 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Bench Box Mode The Bench Box Mode menu allows the User to configure the IntelliShot Commander to be utilised as a Bench Box. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. to select Configuration 1. Main Menu Press 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup to select Bench Box Mode Press Bench Box Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect 3. Page 189 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Repeater Mode The Repeater Mode menu allows the User to configure the IntelliShot Commander to be utilised as a Repeater. The Commander unit will turn off automatically when the mode change is selected. to select Configuration 1. Main Menu Press 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup to select Repeater Mode Press Repeater Mode will be activated and Commander will switch off automatically Power On the Commander for the change to take effect 3. Page 190 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Device Password This function enables the user to change the device password by assigning a new unique password that is known only to the user. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Press to select Device Password Passwords Use the numerical keypad to enter Current Password. Press to confirm. Unlike conventional password entry, the chosen password is visible to the user (rather than ****) to enable the user to see if any typing errors are being made. Leaving the new password blank disables the password request when the Commander is switched on. Use the numerical keypad to enter New Password. Press Information message confirming password changed will be displayed briefly. to confirm. Advanced Menu will be displayed. Page 191 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 3. 4. UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Last Det This function enables the user to enable or disable the last det test. to select Configuration 1. Main Menu Press 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup Advanced Setup Press to select Last Det Last Det Press key to toggle between Last Det Enabled and select Last Det Preferred Last det preferred indicates that the last det test will be used in preference to the normal current measurement checks in blasting Press to select and save the setting. 3. 4. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 Page 192 of 218 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Toggle Auto Arm This function enables the user to enable arming automatically or manually. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. 4. Advanced Setup Press to select Toggle Auto Arm Toggle Auto Arm User may select to:
Enable this will allow user to read the information (RF encryption key and RF channel) stored on the NFC cards when in idle mode and arming the Bench Commander when it is ready to blast. Disable this will only allow the user to arm the Bench Commander manually. Page 193 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Max Wire Length 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Press right soft key to display next screen 4. 5. Advanced Setup Press to select Max Wire Length Insert the max wire length between 5000 and 12000m. Page 194 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 16 FACTORY SETUP The Factory Setup is password protected and may only be accessed by designated maintenance teams. 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Factory Setup 3. 4. Factory Password The factory setup menu will prompt for a password, after which the factory options will be displayed. Use numerical keypad to enter Unique CE4 Tagger Password. Press to continue. Factory Setup Factory Setup will be displayed. Page 195 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Each option is further protected by its own web-based ticket system. If no active ticket is available for the chosen option (as stored on the CE4 Tagger), the user is prompted for a ticket issued by portal.detnet.com. The ticket is comprised of two 10-digit numbers that need to be entered before continuing. If the ticket is valid, access will be granted to the given function. Tickets can be issued for a selected number of repeated uses before a given expiry date. Tickets issued are specific to a given CE4 Tagger or Commander as determined by the hardware serial number, thus allowing flexible control over protected features. 5. Web Ticket Press required Menu option. Obtain Ticket to continue Page 196 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Factory Setup Menu Options Each Factory menu option is described below. Many of the screens are common to several CE4 products and are shared between them. Only Storage Mode will be accessible without a Web Ticket. All other Menu items will need a Web Ticket to be accessed. Clear Logs (Factory) Leakage Calibration (Factory) 1. The clear logs function erases the internal log and will displays a confirmation dialog briefly. 2. The Leakage Calibration menu recalculates the leakage and current offsets by measuring the current and leakage with no detonators connected. It functions in the same fashion as the leakage test screen except that it initially shows a leakage calibrate dialog briefly and then proceeds to the leakage screen. 3. The self-test function starts a factory self-test of the device. 4. The IO Setup function is used to setup experimental IO parameters. 5. This menu option will contain any experimental functions that are required in engineering only. 6. Start Self-Test (Factory) Experimental Menu IO Setup (Factory) Key to select Storage Mode Storage Mode Press When the battery capacity is more than 50%, the CE4 Tagger will discharge the battery by activating additional battery draining functions such as the heating pad, to accelerate the discharge level to the required 50% charge level, and When the battery capacity is less than 50%, it will prompt the user to connect a charger to attain the required 50% charge level. When the CE4 Tagger reaches the required 50% battery storage capacity it will switch off automatically allowing for safe storage Reset Service Date This function will allow the user to reset the service schedule. Migrate NFC Key The Migrate NFC Key function is used to migrate an outdated key to the new structures. 7. 8. Page 197 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 17 TABLET BLAST APPLICATION GENERAL DESCRIPTION Please refer to UTM-00346 for the Commander System Tablet Blast Application details Page 198 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 18 COMMANDER SYSTEM ON-BENCH DEPLOYMENT OVERVIEW Configure all equipment Prepare for tagging Tag detonators Test detonators View Design LOCAL MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR STATUTORY REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES, OR CODES OF PRACTISE REGARDING SAFETY TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY OF THE TIPS AND HINTS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR LOCAL REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES OR CODES OF PRACTISE MUST BE FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES. Blasting Overview The IntelliShot Commander can be used for Local Blasting, Remote Blasting and Synchronized blasting. The description below provides a high-level overview of the steps required to operate the IntelliShot Commander during each of the blasting processes. Local blasting Figure 13: Local Blasting a. Connect detonator lead-in wires to the detonator channel(s) on the front panel of the IntelliShot Commander. Channels are clearly marked 1 4. b. Switch ON both the CE4 Tagger and IntelliShot Commander. c. Establish a Wi-Fi link between the CE4 Tagger and appropriate IntelliShot Commander. Both devices will d. confirm connected status on the respective displays. Initiate the necessary tests using the CE4 Tagger as a remote control. All associated results will be displayed in detail on the CE4 Tagger screen while a summarized result will be displayed on the IntelliShot Commander. Initiate the program functions to ensure all detonators are timed appropriately. e. f. Select ARM and scan the RED BlastCard to the designated NFC Sensor area on the back of the IntelliShot Commander. g. ARM/Activate the IntelliShot Commander from the CE4 Tagger. Page 199 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 h. Enter the associated PIN on the CE4 Tagger. Press and hold the next button for 2 seconds i. The IntelliShot Commander will initiate a 30-second high-voltage charging period followed by a 90-second j. blast window. k. Press both FIRE-keys (soft buttons) on the CE4 Tagger to fire. Remote blasting 3000m 10m Max 400 Detonators per Channel Tagger Base Commander Bench Commander Figure 14: Remote Blasting a. Repeat steps a f as specified for local blasting. Connect detonator lead-in wires to any / each available detonator channel on the front panel. Channels are clearly marked 1 4. Switch both CE4 Tagger and IntelliShot Commander ON. Establish a Wi-Fi link between the CE4 Tagger and appropriate Bench Commander. Both devices will confirm connected status on the respective displays. Initiate the necessary tests using the CE4 Tagger as an interface unit. All associated results will be displayed in detail on the CE4 Tagger screen while a summarized result will be displayed on the Bench Commander. Initiate the program functions to ensure all detonators are timed appropriately. ARM/Activate the Bench Commander from the CE4 Tagger. b. Scan the Yellow BlastCard to the designated NFC Sensor area on the Bench Commander and to Arm the Bench Commander. c. Press next for 2 seconds. d. The Bench Commander will initiate the grace period as specified in the BlastCard. Evacuate the bench. e. Set up a Base Commander at a safe location within RF range from the Bench Commander. f. Establish a Wi-Fi link between CE4 Tagger and Base Commander. Both devices will confirm connected status on displays. g. Confirm which Bench Commanders to proceed with. h. Apply the RED BlastCard to the designated area on the Base Commander. Page 200 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 i. j. Enter the associated PIN on the CE4 Tagger and press next. The Base Commander will instruct the selected Bench Commander(s) to apply high voltage for 30 seconds before allowing a 90-second firing window. In Synchronise mode the firing window will be 60 seconds). k. Press both FIRE-keys (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger to fire. Tagger Synchronized blasting (Multiple Commanders) 10m 3000m Base Commander 3000m Bench Commanders (x10) Figure 15: Synchronized Blasting via Multiple Commanders a. Repeat steps a d as specified for remote blasting. b. When configuring the base and selecting the bench commanders to be blasted, select the sync option c. A sync-management period will automatically be applied at step l to ensure 1ms synchronization between Commanders. ARM AND FIRE COMMANDS FOR DETONATORS WILL NOT INITIALLY BE KNOWN TO THE INTELLISHOT COMMANDER. THESE COMMANDS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE FROM THE BLASTCARD
(RED) AND WILL BE ISSUED TO THE COMMANDER WHEN NECESSARY, EITHER DIRECTLY FROM THE BLASTCARD (IN CASE OF A LOCAL BLAST) OR REMOTELY FROM THE BASE COMMANDER. ARM AND FIRE BLASTING COMMANDS WILL BE ERASED FROM THE COMMANDER MEMORY AFTER USE. Page 201 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 19 INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Low Battery Charge fault Design Changed When Envelope is displayed, Press # to display Error Screen Ensure that the Commander is fully charged before it is deploying in a blast. Should this error trigger, charge the Commander before using or alternatively use another Commander that has been sufficiently charged. The Charge Fault will be displayed to indicate that the Commander is not charging from the connected charger. Ensure that the charging cable is connected securely to the Commander. Also ensure that the charger has sufficient output power to charge the Commander. A charger capable of supplying 2A or greater is preferred. This error will occur when the Commander detects that the design has changed. This indicates that, either a new detonator has been found, or a detonator has gone missing. When this error occurs, the user is encouraged to examine the list to ensure that the total detonator count is correct. Once the list has been examined and the detonator count has been confirmed to be correct, the user must reprogram the Commander. Should there be a missing detonator, it must be found and corrected or Page 202 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Detonator(s) Missing High Leakage Last detonator not set Last detonator error Page 203 of 218 This warning is triggered when the Commander detects that a previously connected detonator is no longer present on the line. When this error occurs the user is encouraged to examine the list to determine which detonator is missing. The user will then need to return to the bench to identify and correct the fault. Leakage is tested during various stages, including testing and programming. Should a high leakage warning be triggered, the user will need to find the source of the leakage this is performed most effectively by using a Tagger. The user is encouraged to disconnect the string from the Commander and divide the string into two equal halves, and test each half with a Tagger. The leakage should be present on only one half and this process can be repeated until the source of the leakage is discovered. Some of the reasons for leakage include: damage to the down-line wire of a detonator unit, moisture in the connector of a detonator unit and also damage to the surface harness wire insulation. It is recommended that the user resolve all leakage sources to have a leakage of 0 mA, however, should it not be possible to eradicate all leakage sources, the system may be able to cope with leakage sources up to 1 mA per channel. Each channel on the Commander needs to discover at least one detonator that has been marked as the last detonator on the string. To ensure that there is connectivity to the last unit on the harness, this last detonator will be searched for just after charging. The Commander will also check the voltage supplied to the last detonator to ensure that sufficient energy has been transferred to allow for successful blasting. Should the Commander not find a detonator marked as the last detonator on a channel, the Last detonator not set notification will be displayed note that the channel affected will also be indicated. This error occurs when communication to the last detonator is unsuccessful after charging and just prior to firing. If the last detonator is not found it indicates a harness break or the last detonator does not have sufficient voltage to initiate. The user is encouraged to disarm and return to safe voltage. After waiting the minimum of 10 minutes re-entry time as per the manufacturer requirement, proceed to the string in question to identify the source of the fault. A Tagger may be used to aid in this process. The first step would be to check if there is a leakage problem on the string. Once this is resolved the user will need to test the string to check if all the expected detonators are present on the line. DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Wire limit exceeded Misfires Expected limiter has Current activated This warning will trigger when the cumulative detonator wire length for a channel is exceeded. The down-line wire length of each detonator is stored in memory, and the software can thus calculate the total down-wire length per channel. If this total length exceeds the set max wire limit setting the warning will be triggered. It is recommended that the user decrease the down-wire length on the channel in question by moving detonators to another channel. This warning will be displayed during the firing window if the voltage at the last detonator is too low for successful blasting. In such a case the user is encouraged to disarm and return to safe voltage. After waiting the appropriate amount of time the user may proceed to the channel in question to identify the source of the fault. A Tagger may be used to aid in this process. The first step would be to check if there is a leakage problem on the string. Once this is resolved the user will need to test the string to check if all the expected detonators are present on the line firing process. This error may trigger at any point during the testing, programming or to excessively high leakage or a short circuit on the channel. The Tagger may be used to identify the source of leakage using the binary search technique. If this error occurs after programming the user will need to reprogram the channel The error points Page 204 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action When the Commander detects a detonator that still has the internally recorded factory ID, which means that it has not been successfully tagged, it will trigger the untagged warning. The Tagger may be used to find the untagged detonator on a string using the binary search technique. Once the untagged detonator has been found, it must be tagged with a delay or location (or both) as per the blast plan. This error will be displayed either when the user scans a Red BlastCard when a Yellow BlastCard is expected or vice versa. The error will also be displayed if the BlastCard is invalid. The user must scan the correct BlastCard or replace the BlastCard if it is invalid or not working correctly Untagged detonator found Test All Untagged test Test Single det Wrong / Invalid Card Page 205 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action Low Battery / Link Down / Check RF Settings Card Not paired Last det not set Missing dets after programming and reconnected The low battery warning will be displayed when the battery has depleted to a point where blasting may be jeopardised. Recharge the battery before continuing with blasting. When the RF link is down at the Base Commander, the link down error will be displayed. The number (B4 in example) refers to the Bench Commander with which communication has been lost. The RF connection warnings will indicate that either the RF channel or the Encryption key does not match. Adjust settings to ensure that these parameters match on the Base Commander and all the Bench Commanders. The Invalid Key / Card not paired error will be displayed if the BlastCard used to arm the Base Commander is from a different group (set) of BlastCards to the BlastCard used to arm the Bench Commander/s. Use only the BlastCards from the same set as shipped together The last det not set error will occur when arming if the last dets were not set on the connected channels. The user may select to select last dets automatically where the system will assume that the last detonator in the last is the last det or the user may manually select the last det. and after programming The system will display a reprogram error should dets be disconnected reconnected afterwards. The user can view the errors on the Bench Commander by pressing the # button. The system will allow the user to continue with arming on the Base Commander but the Commander will display the error message in grace, charging but the fire buttons will be greyed out in the fire menu. Page 206 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Fault Condition Error Screen Trouble-shooting / Remedial Action All detonator errors encountered after programming on the Bench Commander will be synced and displayed on the Base Commander with the relevant Bench Commander ID. DigiShot Plus 4G Commander System Troubleshooting: Reprogram required Page 207 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 20 APPENDIX A INTELLISHOT COMMANDER SYSTEM PRACTICAL TIPS AND HINTS This section provides some practical tips and hints based on previous on-bench experience to assist new users with their learning and ensure a successful deployment of the system on the bench. This document must not be regarded as a replacement for Training manuals or Quick Guides but rather as supplementary to other documentation. To ensure that this document remains useful, receiving feedback and suggestions from DetNet Channel partners and end users is important LOCAL MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR STATUTORY REGULATIONS, PROCEDURES, OR CODES OF PRACTISE REGARDING SAFETY TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY OF THE TIPS AND HINTS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MOST STRINGENT SET OF RULES BETWEEN THE MINE, EXPLOSIVES OR LOCAL REGULATIONS/PROCEDURES/CODES OF PRACTISE AND THE MANUFACTURER MUST BE FOLLOWED. Refer to https://portal.detnet.com/http://www.portal.detnet.com/ for additional detail on Quick Guides, Channel Leakage and other documents of interest. Page 208 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 On Bench Delivery of Detonators When boxes of IntelliShot Detonators are delivered, ensure to place boxes at a point of safety to prevent on-
bench vehicles from driving over the boxes and damaging detonators. IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT ALL DETONATORS ARE IMPACT SENSITIVE AND CAN INITIATE IF EXPOSED TO EXCESSIVE MECHANICAL IMPACT. Distributing Detonators on the Bench When distributing detonators on the bench the following points are important:
Before placing detonators at holes to be primed, ensure that all connectors are properly closed to prevent ingress of moisture and/or dirt. Place detonators in line with the direction of drilled holes to minimise people treading or vehicles driving over detonator coils. Place coiled detonators far enough from the hole collar to prevent detonators rolling down drilled holes. If different lengths are used for decking purposes then place coils in the sequence of charging to reduce time and minimise confusion for the charging crew. Priming with IntelliShot Detonators During priming (inserting the detonator into a booster) the following points are important:
When removing the detonator from the coil ensure that it is removed from the opposite end of the connector to prevent tangling of the down-hole wire. Pull out sufficient length to thread the detonator through the booster and to be left with approximately 300mm of down-hole wire between booster and coil. Remove helix by gently pulling the cable between thumb and forefinger to prevent inner-cores from taking on different orientations. This could exert unnecessary tension on the crimp area. Thread the detonator through the booster and ensure it is properly seated. Pull on the incoming cable to ensure that the down-hole wire is tightly placed and properly seated in the booster saddle. Check to ensure that it is not kinked or damaged when the booster is lowered down the hole. Place primed detonator in a safe place to minimise the chance of treading on the primer and ensure that the connector is still in the closed position. Lowering Detonators into Drilled Holes When lowering booster down the drilled hole it is important to note the following:
Pillow loading is advisable to prevent the down-hole wire being exposed to unnecessary tension when augering explosives down the hole. It also helps to prevent the down-hole wire being damaged when the booster strikes the bottom of the hole. When lowering the booster down the drilled hole, hold coil in one hand and use the thumb and forefinger of the other hand to guide the booster down the hole. At the same time uncoil the helix that is formed in the cable during coiling. When the booster hits the bottom of the hole, raise it off the bottom and tighten the cable to ensure that no kinking or coiling of the down-hole wires has occurred in the hole. Kinking/coiling could cause damage during loading or slumping. There are two schools of thought on how to tie the down-hole wire to the stake that must always be placed in line with the row of holes as follows:
Page 209 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 The first one is to take the down-hole wire protruding from the hole and coil it three or four times around the stake, leaving sufficient slack on the fourth coil to pull the coil through the loop and then carefully tighten the down-hole wire without causing any sharp kinks in the cable. The second one is advisable in areas that are known for slumping of holes. Treat same as above with the exception that instead of using the down-hole wire protruding from the hole, place the remaining coil next to the stake and then coil a sufficient length from the connector side and tie in same manner as above, ensuring that tension is exerted on the down-hole wire and not on the connector interface by allowing sufficient slack between knot and connectors. It is believed that if slumping appears, the down-line wire will have sufficient slack in the coil to compensate for the slumping without the wire pulling directly on the stake. Both methods as described above have been successfully deployed globally. ENSURE THAT CONNECTOR IS PROPERLY CLOSED TO PREVENT INGRESS OF MOISTURE AND DIRT. Charging of Drilled Holes When charging drilled holes it is important to keep the following in mind:
Ensure that the connector is properly closed to prevent ingress of explosives which could result in the corrosion of tines inside the connector. Corrosion of the tines will cause increased resistance during blasting. If Pillow loading was not done during auguring, lift the booster an appropriate distance from the drilled hole bottom and keep the down-hole wire tight to prevent it from kinking. Kinks in the wire can lead to pocket loading of the explosives; these pockets will, through time, slide down the hole and cause insufficient explosive charge per hole. Kinks may also lead to damage of the inner cores in the downline if tension is exerted on the downline wire. On completion of charging, ensure that connectors are properly closed and ensure that the down hole lead is still tied to the stake If Pillow loading was done, keep down-line wire tight to prevent kinks from forming inside the hole and keep down-line wire towards middle of the hole to prevent the charging hose from pushing the down-line wire against rock surface of the hole which might result in down-line wire damage. Ensure that the stake is still in place and connector still closed. Stemming of Charged Holes When stemming holes with aggregate it is important to do the following:
Position the down-hole wire to mitigate damage as much as possible. Pull down-hole wire away from the side from which stemming material is being poured down the hole. Ensure that all slack is taken-up to prevent kinking inside the stemming column. Kinking will result in the cable snapping if slumping is experienced. Tagging of Charged Holes with IntelliShot Detonators Tagging according to a plan and ensuring all Users adhere to this plan is important to reduce errors during blasting:
Always ensure that a proper blast and tagging plan is available and that all personnel partaking have a clear understanding of the tagging method and channel allocation. Duplicate, missing or extra detonators and/or detonators on the wrong channel will have a negative impact at blasting time if discovered on the Bench Commander. Ensure that CE4 Tagger head is clean and free of water droplets or emulsion especially between the two Pogo-pin connectors. This helps to prevent a conductive path between the connectors that will add Page 210 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 leakage during tagging and testing. When tagging using the through holes ensure that the CE4 Tagger head is regularly cleaned and connectors closed and placed properly on the stake. When tagging directly on the tines, inspect the tines for alignment with harness wire guiding groves, that the spade gap is in good repair and ensure that connector is properly closed and placed on the stake Ensure that Tagging is performed according to tagging plan and that all detonators are tagged to prevent the system discovering extra or missing detonators during blasting When the connector is damaged or does not make proper contact and needs to be removed, cut the down-
line wires and strip the insulation sufficient in length to fit into the Back-to Back Connector without protruding on either side of the connector as this can result in a short circuit. ALWAYS USE BACK-TO-BACK CONNECTORS AS A CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT KIT. Harnessing of the Blast Harnessing according to the blast design will reduce fault diagnostics. Also take note of the following:
Always use the correct harness wire as specified in the UTMs. Test roll of harness wire with CE4 Tagger to ensure it is in good repair and that no short circuits are present inside coil. When uncoiling the harness wire, ensure that it is uncoiled from the inside out to prevent tangling of wire. Where possible, connect harness wire in the same sequence as tagging, keep to the system limits and to the tagging plan. Open detonator connector and ensure it is free of dirt or moisture as well as being in a good condition, separate twisted pair with thumb, place harness wire onto connector aligning it with the guiding grooves and corresponding tines. Next, tighten wire over connector ensuring that harness wires are properly aligned and close connector until it clicks shut. If both wires are pushed into the same tine it will result in a short circuit. If the harness wire is not properly positioned it can become trapped between the closing lid of the connector and the top of the tine which will result in a harness break or intermittent connection, which will be time consuming when doing fault diagnostics When joining of the harness wire is required, always use a Back-to Back Connector to ensure a proper joint. Strip the harness wire insulation a sufficient length to fit into the connector of the Back-to Back Connector without protruding on either side of the connector as this can result in a short circuit Always trim harness wire ends at the end of each channel leaving no bare conductors that could touch or lie in a conducting solution as this will create a leak path and have a negative impact on the leakage measurement. Page 211 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Testing of Blast Installation Testing the blast installation with the CE4 Tagger is the last on bench verification that the system deployment is within the required parameters:
When a channel is completely harnessed connect the CE4 Tagger to detonator string and perform a test all comparing the number of detonators with the blast plan to ensure all detonators are accounted for. Check that holes not connected are treated as misfires and marked on the plan. A good rule of thumb is if leakage exceeds 0.2mA, locate the source and fix before proceeding. If the leakage is isolated to a single detonator, remove this detonator from the string and connect this detonator to a separate harness wire and to its own channel. During programming assign the absolute time to detonator. Ensure that all channels are properly tested and within system limits before connecting to lead-in harness wire. Ensure that all detonators are connected to the correct channels. Testing lead-in wire and rolling out harness wire to Bench Commander position Key points to note in testing of the Lead-in wire before rolling it out to the Bench Commander:
Test total length of lead-in harness wire for short circuits and leakage before connecting to strings of detonators. Make use of Back-to-Back Connectors when joining harness wires. When rolling out to the Bench Commander position ensure that wires do not cross blasts or harness wires that are connected to detonators deployed to the blast, pre-split or near big rocks that might cut harness wire before the blast signal is sent. Keep away from high wall to prevent rolling rocks severing harness wire during deployment or rocks that may become dislodged by vibration or air blast from other blasts in vicinity. If lead-in harness wire requires extension, always use Back-to-Back Connectors ensuring that ends do not touch, as this could result in leakage or short circuits. Connecting Harness wires to Bench Commander Based on errors that have been observed during the connecting of the harness wire to the Bench Commander, the following is important to note:
Ensure that connection points on the Bench Commander are clean and in good condition to ensure a proper connection. Trim Harness wire ends to prevent it from touching the connector face plate to avoid short circuits. Fold copper portion double to have a bigger connection area. Wrap harness wire around large rocks to provide slack on the harness wire connections to prevent these from being pulled out by accidental bumping or people traveling. Setting Up RF Communication When deciding on a suitable blast point and setting up multiple Base stations for blasting, the following must be noted:
Ensure that all spare Commanders and CE4 Taggers in the transporting vehicles are switched OFF to prevent RF interference with Commanders used in the blast. If more than one Base Commander is in use, ensure that they are further than 10 metres apart to eliminate RF communication interference. Page 212 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Basic causes of leakage Poorly made joints when joining Harness Wire. Re-using Harness Wire. Leakage occurs when a damaged Harness Wire lies in water or emulsion. The water and emulsion are both conductive substances that can result in leakage. The same can occur if a connector is left submerged in water or emulsion indefinitely. It is advisable to raise the connectors off the ground, or at least away from standing water, if the ground conditions are very wet. Detonator down hole wire holes not correctly de-sludged, rubbing of down hole line against hole wall, bent cable when lowering booster into a hole Ingress of water or moisture into connector Detonator cable damaged around the insulation exposing the steel wire Harness wire not properly secured inside connectors Short circuits occur when the harness wires are exposed and touch each other. SHORTS are typically identified by very high leakage errors - >19mA It is advised that once the system is tagged, tested and found to be ready for blasting that the connected control equipment is switched off until blasting time to reduce the likelihood of leakage caused by corrosion. These errors can be located and rectified using the Leakage Test in conjunction with a Binary Search. Page 213 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Binary Search Row 2 Row 3 Row 1 Untagged Detonators Conduct a binary search by breaking down the blast into manageable sections, to locate untagged detonators. The Binary Search is conducted as follows:
Row 4 Row 5 1. Assume Row 1 above has an untagged detonator connected but its location is unknown and it needs to be found. 2. Divide the blast in half and cut the surface harness at mid-point. 3. Connect the Tagger and check the back half for untagged detonators. Should the Tagger display NO UNTAGGGED DETONATORS, proceed with following step. 4. Connect the Tagger and check front half for untagged detonators. Should the Tagger now display UNTAGGGED DETONATORS it can be deduced that the problem is located in the front half of the blast. Repeat the partitioning process there. 5. Divide the front half and test backward and forward from the centre to narrow down the search area. 6. By repeating this process, the fault is narrowed down to a small and manageable area. At this point detonators may be disconnected from the surface harness and tested one at a time using the TEST SINGLE DETONATOR facility to locate the untagged detonator. 7. Once the untagged detonator is found, tag the detonator according to blast plan and ensure all broken wires are correctly reconnected and insulated with tape to prevent leakage problems. 8. Test Harness Wire to ensure all detonators have been identified and detected. Alternative method:
If an existing blast plan is available, use the search function and check the blast summary against the blast plan to determine which row has a problem. The detonator count on that row will be incorrect. Examine the detonator list for that row to determine which detonator in that row is missing. There is a strong possibility that this is the untagged detonator thus checking for the untagged detonator as detailed in this alternative method may be easier than performing the binary search. Page 214 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 High Leakage Row 3 Row 2 Row 1 Conduct a binary search by breaking down the blast into manageable sections to locate high leakage. The Binary Search is conducted as follows:
Assume Row 5 has an exposed wire in surface harness in water causing a high leakage reading on the Tagger. Row 4 Row 5 1. Divide the blast in half and cut the surface harness at mid-point. 2. Connect the Tagger and check back half for leakage. Should the Tagger display high leakage it indicates a fault present. 3. Connect Tagger and check front half for leakage. Should the Tagger display satisfactory leakage it indicates no fault present. 4. Divide the front half and test backward and forward from the centre to narrow down the search area. 5. By repeating this process, the fault is narrowed down to a small and manageable area. 6. Conduct a visual inspection of the surface harness to locate the fault. 7. Fix the problem ensuring all wires are correctly sealed with insulation tape to prevent further leakage problems. 8. Test the surface harness to ensure all faults have been fixed Page 215 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 Leakage through conductive materials Exposed cable Exposed cable Exposed cable Electrically conductive leakage path When an individual string of detonators is tested with a Tagger, the leakage reading is within specification, however, when all strings are connect together, the leakage value is outside the acceptable limit indicating that the accumulative leakage value is now outside acceptable parameters. The sum of the leakage on all the strings is greater than the acceptable level. Damaged surface harness wire insulation and/or detonators cables cause resistance between the surface harness wires when lying in an electrically conductive material which results in high leakage. The best way of resolving this problem is by conducting a binary search as follows. Divide the blast in half, cut the surface harness at mid-point. Connect DigiShot Plus Tagger and check the rear half of the installation for leakage, Tagger displays satisfactory leakage. Connect DigiShot Plus Tagger and check front half of the installation for leakage, Tagger displays satisfactory leakage. Reconnect the break in the surface wire / bus and retest surface harness, DigiShot Plus Tagger displays high leakage indicating fault present. Return to mid-point break, remove joint in surface harness. Re-join the surface harness wire by crossing over the wires, yellow wire to green and green wire to yellow. High leakage is reduced because the exposed wires A and B are now on the same line. Ensure all wires are correctly insulated with tape to prevent further leakage problems. Test surface harness wire to ensure leakage is within acceptable limits. If high leakage is still present, split the blast onto separate channels in the middle of the blast. Exposed cable Exposed cable Exposed cable Page 216 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 21 APPENDIX B ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Abbreviations Ah CE4 DC Det(s) GMT in IP LCD LED Long-range Med-range mm ms NFC OTS PC PCB PVC RF RH RTC Short-range UI USB W Amp-hours 4th Generation Control Equipment Direct Current Detonator(s) Greenwich Mean Time Inch Ingress Protection (IP-67 = totally protected against ingress of dust; and protected against the effects of immersion between 15cm and 1m for 30 minutes) Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Maximum distance: 3km (<3km) Maximum distance: 1km (<1km) millimetre millisecond Near Field Communication Off The Shelf Personal Computer Printed circuit board Polyvinyl chloride Radio Frequency Relative Humidity Real time clock Maximum distance: 10m (<10m) User Interface Universal Serial Bus Watt Page 217 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018 UTM-00338 | Rev 5 An electronic detonator that has been designed and developed by DetNet South Africa This is the location where the blast is initiated. The initiation point is always at a place-of-safety (see below). Time delays that are programmed into detonators. The cable that attaches to the detonator that allows detonators to be connected one after another. The harness has two parameters: an inter-hole length and a down-hole length. A location specified by the main blasting authority that guarantees human safety with respect to fly rock, fumes, concussion and fall of ground. This is an area close to the bench, where equipment can be located with reasonable assurance that it will not be damaged during or immediately after blast. The principal requirements for firing an IntelliShot Detonator are a minimum supply voltage and the fire command. The minimum voltage required to fire an IntelliShot Detonator is known as blast voltage. Equipment that is unable to transfer sufficient energy to the detonator to cause it to initiate, even in the event of failure of certain safety interlocks in the detonator and test equipment. Definitions IntelliShot Detonator Initiation point Initiation time Detonator harness Place-of-safety Equipment safe Blast voltage Inherently safe Page 218 of 218 DetNet South Africa Copyright 2018
| 1 2 3 4 | QSG | Users Manual | 1.26 MiB |
COMMANDER SYSTEM QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE UTM-00343 | Rev 1 | 2017 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 INDEX SYSTEM LIMITS .................................. 4 PRE-USE CHECKLIST ........................ 5 CE4 TAGGER ...................................... 6 SETTING UP TAGGER .............................. 7 TAGGING ............................................... 8 COMMANDER ................................... 10 SET UP BENCH COMMANDER ................ 11 SET UP BASE COMMANDER ................... 15 SYSTEM DEPLOYMENT .................. 18 TAG DETONATORS ................................ 20 TEST DETONATORS .............................. 27 VIEW DESIGN ....................................... 32 PREPARE FOR BLAST ............................ 33 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 38 CE4 TAGGER .................................... 38 COMMANDER ....................................... 43 EMERGENCY CONTACT DETAILS ............. 48 Page | 2 1 2 3 3.1. 3.2. 4 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. 5 5.1. 5.2. 6 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 1. Think through the task 2. Identify the hazards 3. Eliminate or manage the hazards 4. Assess the remaining risk 5. Do the job safely Page | 3 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 The 4G system limits must be adhered to at all times to ensure that blasts are successfully initiated. Maximum harness wire per channel Maximum downline per channel Maximum Bench Commanders per Base Commander Maximum detonators per Tagger Maximum detonators per Channel Maximum detonators per Bench Commander Maximum detonators RF Maximum detonators standalone Maximum detonators per hole Maximum holes per string Maximum strings per blast design Maximum line-of-sight for Remote Firing Maximum delay for any detonator Minimum delay per detonator Minimum delay increment Maximum Wi-Fi connectivity distance 2,500m 12000m 10 16000 400 1600 16000 1600 6 decks x 3 dets each =
18 dets 400 44 3km 20,000ms 0ms 1ms 10m Page | 4 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Prior to arrival on the bench:
1. Ensure Commanders and Taggers are fully charged. 2. Check for latest software version 3. Check communications settings on Bench Commander and Base Commander correspond. 4. Ensure Smart Cards are available and check serial numbers to ensure they are paired. 5. Ensure dates and times on control equipment are correctly set. 6. Ensure correct amount of detonators and harness wire are delivered to the bench. 7. Ensure that blast layout is correctly loaded 8. Ensure a copy of Tagging Plan is onto Tagger. available. 9. Ensure pre-planning is performed. Page | 5 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Harness wire terminals Pogo Pin Connector Blue Status White Charge Red Error LED LCD Screen Soft Keys Enter Key Backspace Key Escape Key On/Off Numerical Keys USB Connector Page | 6 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Turn Tagger ON Enter Password (Default password 9949 - If required) Configure Tagger From Main Menu press configuration soft key. Once in the CONFIGURATION menu press:
1 to enter 4G Setup 2 to enter Device Setup 3 to enter Advanced Setup 4 to enter Factory Setup (Password protected) The Device SETUP menu will allow you to:
Adjust the Screen CONTRAST Adjust the Screen Brightness Set the TIME ZONE for your location. (GMT+2 for SA) To set the Auto Shutdown time for the Tagger Choose one of 3 Languages ENGLISH, SPANISH and FRENCH Set up the conversion units used i.e. Imperial or Metric The Advanced SETUP menu will allow you to:
Assign Tagger ID (using multiple taggers) Link up PC to Tagger through Wi-Fi Link up PC to Tagger through a USB cable Link up Commander to Tagger through Wi-Fi Remote view on your PC (USB) Clear Det IDs (incorrectly tagged dets) Change the Device Password Press Home soft key to return to Main Menu Page | 7 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 SET UP TAGGER FOR TAGGING Tag Option Basic: Delay Option (D) Planned: Tag by Plan Option (P) Advanced: Location and Delay Option (A) Once the option is set, the corresponding symbol will be displayed in the top bar. Main Menu Press Press Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. to select 4G Setup to select Tag Option Use display the required selection as follows:
navigational keys to scroll up/down and Press SoftKey to save option as required. Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu Page | 8 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Site Setup Main Menu Press Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. to select 4G Setup Press Site Setup screen for each tagging mode to select Site Setup Use Markers: When this item is enabled (Black filled rectangle), the tagging screen will contain a soft key to allow marking and tagging a detonator at the same time. Autotag:
filled rectangle), tagging can only be performed on the pogo pins, and not by connecting a detonator onto the harness wire (It is not practical to connect and then remove the detonator from the harness wires). is disabled (White this option If Multi Commander: allows the user to load blast designs for multiple commanders up to 16 000 dets Multi-Primed: Enables setting of multiple dets per shot hole. Assign Locations: Allows for tagging locations without timing to detonators List Hole Config: Setting of decks and dets per deck. Det Label: Configures how locations is tagged to detonators i.e. numerical or Alfa-numerical. Delete ViewShot: Clears ViewShot Plan in Planned mode. Page | 9 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 10 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Power up the Commander 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup to select Bench Box Mode Press Bench Box Mode will be activated User will be prompted to shut the CE4 Commander down and restart for the change to take effect Page | 11 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Connecting CE4 Tagger to CE4 Commander via Wi-Fi ENSURE THAT THE BENCH IS CLEARED BEFORE THE DETONATORS OR CE4 TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO THE BENCH COMMANDER. 1. 2. Switch both the Commander and the Tagger ON Press and hold to connect CE4 Tagger to CE4 Commander via Wi-Fi key and then press the key Observe the Commander ID 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Commander ID key to connect to Commander Press CE4 Tagger will connect to Commander Enter device password when prompted Press 7. Device password will be required only during first connection to the Commander. key to continue 8. CE4 Commander Main Menu will be displayed Page | 12 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Set up RF Channel (Only used when not hard set by DNAP technical department) NOTE (Using paired Blast Cards will set the RF channel and Key automatically) NOTE (The Bench Commander and Base Commander must have the same Software version, RF Key and the same RF channel for successful communication to take place) Main Menu Press to select Configuration Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF Remote Blast Press to select Set RF Channel Use navigational keys to navigate selection. to select Region and open RF Channel Press selection. Use numerical keypad to enter Unique RF Channel range as follows:
Between 16 and 49 for Americas Between 48 and 55 for Australia. Press to continue Press SoftKey to return to Main Menu Page | 13 1. 2. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Set Encryption Key 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Long Range RF Remote Blast Press to select Set Encryption Key 3. 4. Set Encryption Key (Only used when not hard set by DNAP technical department) Key will be displayed Press Use numerical keypad to enter New Key to change Press Press to continue SoftKey to return to Main Menu Page | 14 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode 4. Base Station Mode Press Base Station Mode will be activated to select Base Station Mode User will be prompted to shut the CE4 Commander down and restart for the change to take effect Set up RF Channel NOTE (Using paired Blast Cards will set the RF channel and Key automatically) NOTE: The Bench Commander and Base Commander MUST have the same Software version, RF Key and the same RF channel for successful communication to take place) Refer to Page 14 above for setup detail. Page | 15 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Base + Repeat Mode 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup Press to select Base Station Mode 4. Base Station Mode to select Base + Repeat Mode Press Base + Repeat Mode will be activated User will be prompted to shut the CE4 Commander down and restart for the change to take effect Page | 16 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Repeater Mode 1. Main Menu Press to select Configuration 2. Configuration Menu Press to select Advanced Setup 3. Advanced Setup to select Repeater Mode Press Repeater Mode will be activated User will be prompted the 4G CE4 Commander down and restart for the change to take effect. to shut Page | 17 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 NO DETONATOR SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE TAGGER WHILST THE CE4 TAGGER IS CONNECTED TO A CHARGER Inherent Safety CE4 Taggers are said to be INHERENTLY SAFE because they cannot produce the necessary minimum required firing voltage to blast the electronic 4G detonator. The CE4 Tagger is also unable to produce the encoded FIRING SIGNAL necessary to initiate a blast. The CE4 Tagger must NEVER be connected to a normal electric detonator or a suspected damaged/shrink wrapped detonator. Page | 18 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Safety Warnings Batteries may leak or explode if incorrectly handled. Only use batteries approved for use in the CE4 Tagger. Do not expose the battery to an open flame or excessive heat. Replacing external batteries in the battery pack must be done in a safe and dry place so as to prevent ingress of moisture or condensation into the battery pack enclosure. Do not apply undue pressure to the LCD screen as this could damage the Tagger or cause a malfunction. Should the LCD screen break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the screen touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth. Page | 19 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 1. From the Main Menu Press Type in delay required to select New Design 2. Tag Detonators Warning Press OK SoftKey to acknowledge warning This detonator warning message will only be displayed when the user opens the tagging screen on the initial start-up of the device. Enter desired delay Use the keypad to enter the delay in milliseconds Connect detonator and press Detonator number and delay entered will be displayed Tagger will be in ready state to enter next detonator delay to continue Press after leaving the tag screen to select Tag Detonators to continue tagging Page | 20 3. 4. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Upload ViewShot Plan When a ViewShot plan is not downloaded onto the CE4 Tagger, the user will be prompted to download a plan. Connect the CE4 Tagger to the PC and download plan 1. From Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Configuration Settings. Configuration Settings Menu Press to select Advanced Setup. Advanced Setup Menu Press Connections to select Connections. Press PC via USB. USB Link with PC on the keypad to connect CE4 Tagger to Ready for PC Connect USB cable between PC and CE4 Tagger Connected to PC Download the Plan (via ViewShot on the PC) onto the CE4 Tagger to enable the use of the Tag by Plan option. Page | 21 2. 3. 4. 5. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 View the downloaded design on the CE4 Tagger 1. From the Main Menu Press to select View Design. 2. 3. View Plan The ViewShot plan will be displayed as a list. Users may exercise the functions on the Soft-Keys such as Plan Summary to check that all the detonators are captured in the plan. Start Tag process 1. From the Main Menu Press Clear det list to select New Design When a ViewShot plan is not downloaded onto the CE4 Tagger, the user will be prompted to download a plan. Select Start Position 2. The user will be prompted to select the starting position from the list. Only the detonator situated at the top position in the list can be selected. Selection in a list is displayed as white text on black background The keyboard mapping mode indicates navigation by arrows. at the top of the screen Use keys to navigate by one up/down. Use keys and to navigate to previous/next Page | 22 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 page (6 locations displayed per page). or Press made to return to tagging screen. key once the selected position is 3. to select Tag Detonators to continue tagging Press after leaving the tag screen When using Autotag ON mode, the detonators may be directly placed on the wire bus and only untagged detonators can be detected. When Autotag is OFF, connect the detonator to the pogo pins to tag. In Autotag OFF mode, any detonator can be re-
tagged (i.e. any detonator can be detected). Retagging is not possible if Autotag is enabled Page | 23 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 The Advanced Mode option is NOT recommended if the user does NOT have a paper plan. The emphasis with this tagging option is on TIME, since location is used for tracking purposes 1. Initial Setup:
String Number Row Number Hole number Absolute Time / Starting Time Inter-Hole Increment Hole configuration i.e. decked etc. Hole loading per deck or per hole dependent on hole configuration used 2. Manual adjustments:
Timing Mode Inter-Hole Increment Absolute Time Row Increment or decrement Observe the mode. display which will indicate keyboard mapping Use keys to add/subtract time increment from the current time displayed on the screen equal to the inter hole delay set Use keys to add/subtract hole increment in 1ms Page | 24 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Use Use the row number keys to adjust the row number.
&
keys and
&
keys to adjust Adjust hole configuration 1. From home screen:
Press Press SoftKey to go to Configuration Menu 4G Setup Press Site Setup to select List Hole Config(uration) Press Press + SoftKey (SF3) to add to the list of hole templates Press up/down arrows to select the required List Press ENTER key to continue up/down arrows to select the number of Decks Press per Hole (Maximum of 9 allowed) to save Press Press key to continue Use Keypad to enter Time per deck Page | 25 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Press to continue to next Time Press to save 7. 8. up/down arrows to select the number of Press Detonators per Hole (Maximum of 6 allowed) Press ENTER key to continue Enter the individual delay offset (Ms) to be applied for each detonator Press ENTER key to continue Press SoftKey (SF4) to continue The detonators should be counted from the bottom of the hole up. I.e. Detonator 1 is located at the bottom of the hole or in the bottom deck When using Autotag ON mode, the detonators may be directly placed on the wire bus and only untagged detonators can be detected. When Autotag is OFF, connect the detonator to the pogo pins to tag. In Autotag OFF mode, any detonator can be re-tagged (i.e. any detonator can be detected). Retagging is not possible if Autotag is enabled. Page | 26 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 4G detonators connected to the harness wire that are not in the detonator list will be ignored. Test All Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test All. Test All CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating to View Design After Testing press the Menu Key to return to the Test Page | 27 1. 2. 3. 4. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Test String Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test String. Test String Enter required String number to continue Press CE4 Tagger will Test All Detonators on specified string Done will be displayed when test all is complete. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating to View Design After Testing press the Menu Key to return to the Test Page | 28 1. 2. 3. 4. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Test Single Detonator 1. 2. 3. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Single Det. Test Single Connect Detonator to CE4 Tagger Detonator will be tested Results will be displayed Leakage Test High leakage levels can result in potential misfires of the 4G detonators. 1. 2. 3. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Leakage. Leakage Test CE4 Tagger will Test Leakage on all Channels Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating Page | 29 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 4. 5. CE4 Tagger will display leakage test results Note that even when leakage is high the Test OK will be displayed to indicate that the actual test was successful Press to continue After Testing press the Menu Key to return to the Test Untagged Test 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. 2. Test Menu Press SoftKey to select Untagged Test 3. Untagged Test OK message will be displayed when no untagged detonators are found. Error message will displayed when untagged detonators are found. 4. User may use the following SoftKeys:
Press Press test SoftKey to continuously repeat test. SoftKey to stop continuously repeating Page | 30 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 After Testing press the 5. Use a binary search to locate untagged detonator(s) Key to return to the Test Menu Search Detonators 1. 2. 3. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Test Menu. Test Menu SoftKey to select Search Dets Press Search Dets Enter required Channel number Press to continue Note: If new detonators are to be found they will be assigned
(logically) to Channel 1 as per the existing example. CE4 Tagger will search for detonators and display Done when complete Press Press to return to the Test Menu to View Design Page | 31 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 1. LIST DETONATORS displays a complete list of all detonators the Tagger has tagged 2. LIST MISSING DETS displays a list of missing detonators found during testing compared to the Detlist created during tagging 3. LIST NEW DETS displays a list of all new detonators found during testing compared to the Detlist created during tagging 4. LIST BAD STATUS displays a list of all detonators that are faulty during testing 5. BLAST SUMMARY displays a summary of detonators per row, total detonators connected and number of special detonators connected 6. DUPLICATE LOCATION will display only the detonators that were found having the same location. 7. BLAST SUMMARY displays the blast presenting a summary of detonators per channel. Page | 32 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Connect tagger to Bench Commander via Wi-Fi Local Blast 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. Prepare for Blast Press SoftKey to select Program Detonators. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press Menu Press button to return to Prepare for Blast to continue. Prepare for Blast Press button to select Arm. Arm Press button to select Local Blast Arm and fire commands for detonators will not initially be known to the CE4 Commander. These commands are only available from the blasting (red) Blast Card and will be issued to the CE4 Commander when necessary, either directly from the red BlastCard (in case of a local blast) or remotely from the base Page | 33 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 commander. Arm and fire blasting commands will be erased from the Commander memory after use. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Local Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan the Red Blast Card at the back of the CE4 Commander Enter the associated PIN Press to continue. Local Blast Press and hold the NEXT button on the of the CE4 Commander The CE4 Commander will period initiate a Grace front Local Blast The CE4 Commander will initiate a 30-second high-
voltage charging period followed by a 90-second blast window. Should there be detonators marked as last det, the last det test will be performed between the charge and blast window Local Blast Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger to fire Local Blast Blast Command sent Page | 34 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Remote Blast Connect tagger to Bench Commander via Wi-Fi 1. Main Menu Press SoftKey to select Prepare for Blast. 2. Prepare for Blast Press SoftKey to select Program Detonators. 3. Program Detonators Detonators will be programmed Press Blast Menu. or 4. Prepare for Blast button to return to Prepare for Press button to select Arm. 5. Arm Press button to select Remote Blast ARM and FIRE commands for detonators will not initially be known to the CE4 Commander. These commands are only available from the blasting (red) Blast Card and will be issued to the Commander when necessary, either directly from the red BlastCard (in case of a local blast) or remotely from the base CE4 Commander. ARM and FIRE blasting commands will be erased from the Commander memory after use. Page | 35 7. 8. UTM-00343 | Rev 1 6. Remote Blast Press SoftKey to initialise RF communication Remote Blast User will be prompted to Scan Key Scan of the CE4 Commander Enter the associated PIN the Yellow BlastCard at the back Press to continue. Remote Blast Press and hold the NEXT button on the of the CE4 Commander The CE4 Commander will initiate a Grace period front Disconnect the CE4 Tagger from the Bench Commander. Connect the CE4 Tagger via Wi-Fi to the Base Commander. 9. Remote Blast The Bench Commander will await a command from the Base Commander 10. Remote Blast the applicable Bench Commander(s) by Select pressing corresponding number on the keypad Applicable Bench Commander will be Indicated by Press to continue When a Bench Commander is accessed from the Base Commander, the remote number of the Bench Commander is the same as the bench commander number unless the number was greater than 4. If the number is greater than 4, subtract 4. Page | 36 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Example: A Bench Commander configured as 7 will have to be selected as 7-4 = 3 on the base. No other bench commander may be allowed to be 3 as all numbers must be unique. 11. Remote Blast Wait if message Not ready yet is displayed User will be prompted to Scan Key once all the bench commanders are out of grace period and ready to blast. 12. Scan Key Scan the RED BlastCard at the back of the CE4 Commander Enter the corresponding PIN to continue and Press Next Press Awaiting High Voltage messages will alternate on the screen Press and Hold the NEXT button on the front of the CE4 Commander The CE4 Commander will initiate a 30-second high-
voltage charging period followed by a 90-second blast window Press both FIRE-buttons (SoftKeys) on the CE4 Tagger to fire Blasting will take place Blast Command sent message will be displayed Page | 37 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 A Binary search is used to find untagged detonators, high leakage and short circuits 1. Untagged detonator (detonator does not have a delay or location) a. Apply BINARY SEARCH method in conjunction with UNTAGGED TEST in the TEST MENU (a binary search is the quickest way to determine the source of a leakage or untagged detonator error; the method consists of dividing the problem area into halves and isolating the problem by repeating this process) b. Once untagged detonator is identified, tag detonator with correct location c. Conduct TEST/ALL to ensure that the problem has been corrected Page | 38 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 2. High Leakage (> 1.0 mA) a. Apply BINARY SEARCH method in conjunction with LEAKAGE TEST in the TEST MENU b. Once the leakage is identified, determine if c. d. leakage can be fixed If harness wire leakage exists, fix or replace the affected harness wire If leakage exists on a detonator, attempt to remove leakage by removing excess downline e. Conduct a leakage test on all channels to ensure that the problem has been corrected f. Once the problem detonator/s have been isolated and removed note the lead length, ID#, Batch#
& DOM on your paperwork 3. Leakage (between 0.3mA and 1.0mA) a. Apply BINARY SEARCH method in conjunction with LEAKAGE TEST in the TEST MENU b. Once the leakage is identified, determine if leakage can be fixed If harness wire leakage exists, fix or replace the affected harness wire If leakage exists on a detonator, attempt to remove leakage by removing excess downline c. d. Page | 39 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 e. If this is not possible and the leakage is lower than 1mA, connect this detonator to a free channel f. Conduct a leakage test on all channels to ensure that the problem has been corrected g. Once the problem detonator/s have been isolated and removed note the lead length, ID#, Batch#
& DOM on your paperwork 4. FAIL (Detonator does not reply during tagging or b. test) a. Check the connection between the Tagger/Bench Commander and the detonator ensure the harness wire isnt broken or damaged If Tagging and in Auto mode, disconnect the tagger and the detonator from the harness wire c. Connect the CE4 tagger to the DS+ connector via the Pogo Pins and test single det via the tagger test menu If the detonator tests Fail cut the lead wire as close to the collar of the hole and beyond into the stemming if evidence is noted for possible damage within, as practicable, strip and hardwire to the tagger and test. If the detonator tests Fail Proceed with your site misfire procedure, which may involve recovery of the stemming in order to re-prime the hole d. e. Page | 40 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 5. WRONG PRODUCT a. Disconnect the suspected detonator and test using Test Single Det on pogo pins If the Tagger reports Fail re-prime hole If the Tagger reports Wrong Product treat as Low Read b. c. Example of poor connection Spade Connector blades not cutting in lead wire Page | 41 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Example of damaged Spade Connector blades within the connector Damaged connectors are removed and Det leads connected to harness using a Back to Back Connector Back to Back Connector Page | 42 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 43 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 44 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 45 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 46 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Page | 47 UTM-00343 | Rev 1 Name Vinesh Surname Naidoo Paul Laubscher Henry Sekhukhune Xolani Mavundla Position Global Market Support Manager Product Support Specialist Product Support Technician Product Support Technician Contact
+27737925968
+27824122807
+27825514486
+27795049682 https://portal.detnet.com/
DetNet Portal:
DetNet Website: www.detnet.com Address: Block 1B Founders Hill Office Park, Centenary Street, 1645 Phone: 011 657 7600 Page | 48
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2019-02-05 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | Original Equipment |
| 2 | 2412 ~ 2457 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
| 3 | 902.2 ~ 927.5 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
| 4 | JAB - Part 15 Class B Digital Device |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2019-02-05
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
DetNet South Africa (Pty) Ltd
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0027967363
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
Block 1B, Founders Hill Office Park
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
10
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
Modderfontein, N/A 1645
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
South Africa
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@tuv-sud.co.uk
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
2ARNH
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
15351660
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Name |
H**** H********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Title |
Mr
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
+27 1********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
+27 8********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
v******@detnet.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 07/23/2019 | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | JAB - Part 15 Class B Digital Device | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Blast Controller | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is conducted. | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Power output listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Installers and end-users must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions and instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Contains FCC ID YOPGS1011MEP and KQLAC4490 | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
TUV SUD Product Service
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Name |
M**** J******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
00-44********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
00-44********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 |
m******@tuv-sud.co.uk
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 | 0.0040000 | 420HD1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2457.00000000 | 0.0630000 | 13M0G1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 902.20000000 | 927.50000000 | 1.0000000 | 300KF1D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC